WQ0000884_Modification_20220615

Initial Review
Reviewer Thornburg, Nathaniel D
Is this submittal an application? (Excluding additional information.)*
Yes No
Permit Number (IR) * WQ0000884
Applicant/Permittee Butterball, LLC
Applicant/Permittee Address 1 Butterball Lane Garner, NC 27529
Is the owner in BIMS? Yes No Is the facility in BIMS?
Owner Type
Facility Name
County
Fee Category
Is this a complete application?*
Yes No
Signature Authority
Signature Authority Title
Signature Authority Email
Document Type (if non -application)
Email Notifications
Organization
Butterball - Mt. Olive WWTF
Duplin
Does this need review by the hydrogeologist? * Yes No
Regional Office
CO Reviewer
Admin Reviewer
llr�ore
Fee Amount $0
Complete App Date 06/15/2022
Below list any additional email address that need notification about a new project.
... ... ..
Email Address
Comments to be added to email notfication
Comments for Admin
Comments for RO

Comments for Reviewer
Comments for Applicant

Submittal Form
Project Contact Information
Please provide information on the person to be contacted by NDB Staff regarding electronic submittal, confirmation of receipt, and other correspondence.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Name* Tim Canter
Email Address*
[e-mail]
Project Information
Application/Document Type*
New (Fee Required)
Modification - Major (Fee Required)
Renewal with Major Modification (Fee
Required)
Annual Report
Additional Information
Other
Phone Number*
3145706807
Modification - Minor
Renewal
GW-59, NDMR, NDMLR, NDAR-1,
N DAR-2
Residual Annual Report
Change of Ownership
We no longer accept these monitoring reports through this portal. Please click on the link below and it will take you to the correct form.
hftps://edocs.deq.nc.gov/Forms/NonDischarge_Monitoring_Report
Perm it Type:*
Wastewater Irrigation
High -Rate Infiltration
Other Wastewater
Reclaimed Water
Closed -Loop Recycle
Residuals
Single -Family Residence Wastewater
Other
Irrigation
Permit Number: *
WQ0000884
Has Current Existing permit number
Applicant/Permittee*
Butterball, LLC
Applicant/Permittee Address*
1 Butterball Lane Garner, NC 27529
Facility Name*
Butterball - Mt. Olive WWTF
Please provide comments/notes on your current submittal below.
System is land application of treated process water. Construction permit application is for the
addition of water equalization prior to the dissolved air flotation (DAF) unit process to provide
for more efficient DAF performance by decreasing flow variation. There is no change to
hydraulic or pollutant load on the land application system itself.
At this time, paper copies are no longer required. If you have any questions about what is required, please contact Nathaniel Thornburg
at [e-mail].
Please attach all information required or requested for this submittal to be reviewed here. *
(Application Form, Engineering Plans, Specifications, Calculations, Etc.)
Butterball Mt Olive Submission.pdf 11.5MB
Upload only 1 PDF document (less than 250 MB). Multiple documents must be combined into one PDF file unless file is larger
than upload limit.
* By checking this box, I acknowledge that I understand the application will not be
accepted for pre -review until the fee (if required) has been received by the Non -
Discharge Branch. Application fees must be submitted by check or money order and
made payable to the North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality (NCDEQ).
I also confirm that the uploaded document is a single PDF with all parts of the
application in correct order (as specified by the application).
Mail payment to:
NCDEQ — Division of Water Resources
Attn: Non -Discharge Branch
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1617

Signature
9c� nwz�lt
Submission Date 6/15/2022

FabTech
WATER SOLUTIONS
May 31, 2022
NC Department of Environmental Quality — Non -discharge Permitting Unit
Attn: Nathaniel Thornburg, Unit Supervisor
Archdale Building
512 N. Salisbury Street
Raleigh, NC 27699
Re: Butterball, LLC — Construction Permit for Secondary Equalization Tank
Dear Mr. Thornburg:
820 O'Fallon Road
Weldon Spring, MO 63304
fa btechwws.com
314-478-3344
Fab Tech is pleased to submit this construction permit application on behalf of Butterball, LLC (Butterball). This
construction permit application is for the installation of a secondary equalization tank to improve performance of the
downstream dissolved air floatation (DAF) system by decreasing flow variability and resulting variance in chemical
dosing and performance. There is no increase in loading or flow to the receiving lagoons and/or land application
system, the elevation of the proposed system is such that changes to the hydraulic grade line are negligible, and the
proposed tank is in the middle of a facility that has undergone recent permit applications (e.g., package plant).
Therefore, there are several items listed in the WWIS checklist (AttachmentA) that are not applicable to this
submission package.
For example, the secondary equalization tank will be constructed from 304 stainless steel and will be placed on an
existing gravel parking lost between the existing equalization tank, DAF, receiving lagoon and package plant. The
proposed location places it no closer to property boundaries, existing wells, or receiving bodies of water than any of
the aforementioned unit processes. Additionally, prior permit applications have determined that none of the existing
processes harm, or have to potential to harm, endangered species.
Construction of the proposed equalization tank will consist of tapping the influent pipes to the existing tank and
installing valving to direct flow, building the foundation and sidewalls of the tank, installing a pressurized air mixing
system with blower and diffusers, installing a liquid level monitoring system, routing a tank drain and emergency
overflow to the receiving lagoon, and merging the new tank's effluent piping to the existing piping between the
DAFs and the existing equalization tank. The difference in the hydraulic grade line between the old and new systems
are nominal and no modification to the pumping system is required.
The following outline summarizes the sections of the Wastewater Irrigation System Application (Form WWIS-06-
16) that were identified as being required for this project during a conference call with Lauren Plummer on January
26, 2022 and follow up conversations with Mr. Lankford Ruffin of Butterball. Please note that the current permit,
while enclosed, is in the renewal process.
Instruction Section
A. Cover Letter
a. Enclosed
B. Application Fee
a. Not applicable — the proposed project is a minor modification.
C. Wastewater Irrigation Systems Application

a. Not applicable because there are no planned modifications to the irrigation system including flow
and/or load.
D. Property Ownership Documentation
a. Not applicable because the proposed equalization tank is surrounded by previously permitted
wastewater treatment unit processes to the west, north, and east, and the Butterball production
plant to the south.
E. Soil Evaluation
a. N/A because there are no planned modifications to the irrigation system including flow and/or
load.
F. Agronomist Evaluation
a. N/A because there are no planned modifications to the irrigation system including flow and/or
load.
G. Hydrogeologic Report
a. N/A because there are no planned modifications to the irrigation system including flow and/or
load.
H. Water Balance
a. N/A because there are no planned modifications to the irrigation system including flow and/or
load. Additionally, the existing equalization tank will remain in service as a back-up.
L Engineering Plans
a. Enclosed — See Attachment B
I Specifications
a. Enclosed — See Attachment C
K. Engineering Calculations
a. Enclosed — See Attachment D
L. Site Map
a. Enclosed within Engineering Plans
M. Power Reliability Plan
a. Requesting approval from the Director because the EQ Tank can tolerate septic (i.e., negligible
oxygen) water due to prolonged duration and the new EQ Tank, when combined with the lagoon
and existing EQ Tank, have sufficient storage capacity so that no potential for overflow exists.
Please note there is an overflow pipe from the proposed EQ tank to the lagoon.
N. Operation and Maintenance Plan
a. Enclosed
O. Residuals Management Plan
a. N/A because no additional residuals will be generated or collected by the proposed secondary
equalization tank.
P. Additional Documentation
a. Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity
i. Applicant is not a publicly owned utility
b. Existing Permit
i. Enclosed
c. Final Environmental Document
i. No public money or land subject to the North Carolina Environmental Policy Act are
being used
d. Floodway Regulation Compliance
i. This project is not within the 100-year floodplain
e. Operational Agreements
i. This project is not for an HOA or Developer
f. Threatened or Endangered Species Documentation
i. N/A — Proposed EQ tank is being installed on a previously developed area
g. Wastewater Chemical Analysis
i. The proposed project does not treat water.
Fab Tech Water Solutions 2 fabtechwws.com

Application Section
I. Applicant Information
a. Completed
IL Facility Information
a. Completed
III. Consultant Information
a. Completed
IV. General Requirements
a. Items 1-3, 8-9, 11-14
i. Completed
b. Items 4-7, 10
i. Previously submitted information has not changed
V. Wastewater Treatment Facility Design Criteria
a. Plans and specifications will be provided for the new secondary equalization tank. No changes to
the existing industrial water resource recovery system are being undertaken.
VI. Earthen Impoundment Design Criteria
a. No modifications to the existing treatment process or effluent storage facilities are being proposed.
VIL Irrigation System Design Criteria
a. No modification to the irrigation system is being proposed.
VIII. Setbacks
a. The proposed EQ tank is being installed on a previously developed area
IX. Coastal Waste Treatment Disposal
a. The Coastal Area is not inclusive of Duplin County.
Thank you for your time and consideration. Please feel free to contact me at 314-570-6807 if you have any
questions.
Kind regards,
Tim Canter, MS, PE
Process Specialist
Fab Tech Water Solutions 3 fabtechwws.com

Attachment A: WWIS Application

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
DWR
Division of Water Resources
15A NCAC 02T .0500 — WASTEWATER IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
Division of Water Resources INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: WWIS 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION
Plans, specifications and supporting documents shall be prepared in accordance with 15A NCAC 02H .0400 (if necessary), 15A
NCAC 02L .01001 15A NCAC 02T .01009 15A NCAC 02T .07009
Division Policies and good engineering practices. Failure to
submit all required items will necessitate additional processing and review time.
For more information, visit the Water Quality Permitting Section's Non -Discharge Permitting Unit website
General — When submitting an application to the Water Quality Permitting Section's Non -Discharge Permitting Unit, please use the
following instructions as a checklist in order to ensure all required items are submitted. Adherence to these instructions and checking
the provided boxes will help produce a quicker review time and reduce the amount of requested additional information.
Unless otherwise noted, the Applicant shall submit one original and two copies of the application and supporting documentation.
A. Cover Letter (All Application Packages):
® List all items included in the application package, as well as a brief description of the requested permitting action.
B. Application Fee (All New and Major Modification Application Packages):
❑ Submit a check, money order or electronic funds transfer made payable to: North Carolina Department of Environmental
Quality (NCDEQ). The appropriate fee amount for new and major modification applications may be found at: Standard Review
Project Fees.
C. Wastewater Irrigation Systems (FORM: WWIS 06-16) Application (All Application Packages):
❑ Submit the completed and appropriately executed Wastewater Irrigation Systems (FORM: WWIS 06-16) application. Any
unauthorized content changes to this form shall result in the application package being returned. If necessary for clarity or due
to space restrictions, attachments to the application may be made, as long as the attachments are numbered to correspond to the
section and item to which they refer.
❑ If the Applicant Type in Item L2. is a corporation or company, provide documentation it is registered for business with the
North Carolina Secretary of State.
❑ If the Applicant Type in Item L2. is a partnership or d/b/a, enclose a copy of the certificate filed with the Register of Deeds in
the county of business.
❑ The facility name in Item IL 1. shall be consistent with the facility name on the plans, specifications, agreements, etc.
❑ The Professional Engineer's Certification on Page 12 of the application shall be signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina
licensed Professional Engineer.
❑ The Applicant's Certification on Page 12 of the application shall be signed in accordance with 15A NCAC 02T .0106(b). Per
15A NCAC 02T .0106(c), an alternate person may be designated as the signing official if a delegation letter is provided from
a person who meets the criteria in 15A NCAC 02T .0106(b).
❑ If this project is for a renewal without modification, use the Non -Discharge System Renewal (FORM: NDSR) application.
D. Property Ownership Documentation (All Application Packages):
➢ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(f), the Applicant shall demonstrate they are the owner of all property containing the wastewater
treatment, storage and irrigation facilities:
❑ Legal documentation of ownership (i.e., GIS deed or article of incorporation), or
❑ Written notarized intent to purchase agreement signed by both parties with a plat or survey map, or
❑ Written notarized lease agreement that specifically indicates the intended use of the property and has been signed by both
parties, as well as a plat or survey map. Lease agreements shall adhere to the requirements of 15A NCAC 02L .0107.
❑ Provide all agreements, easements, setback waivers, etc. that have a direct impact on the wastewater treatment, conveyance,
storage and irrigation facilities.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: WWIS 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Page 1 of 6

E. Soil Evaluation (All Application Packages that include new irrigation sites):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(b) and the Soil Scientist Evaluation Policy, submit a detailed soil evaluation that has been signed,
sealed and dated by a North Carolina Licensed Soil Scientist and includes at a minimum:
❑ The report shall identify all the sites/fields with project name, location, and include a statement that the sites/fields were
recommended for the proposed land application activity.
❑ Field delineated detailed soils map meeting all of the requirements of the Soil Scientist Evaluation Policy.
❑ Soil profile descriptions meeting all of the requirements of the Soil Scientist Evaluation Policy.
❑ Provide all soil boring logs performed at the site.
❑ Standard soil fertility analysis conducted no more than one year prior to permit application for each map unit in the soil
map legend for the following parameters:
❑ Acidity ❑ Exchangeable sodium percentage (by calculation) ❑ Phosphorus
❑ Base saturation (by calculation) ❑ Magnesium ❑ Potassium
❑ Calcium ❑ Manganese ❑ Sodium
❑ Cation exchange capacity ❑ Percent humic matter ❑ Zinc
❑ Copper ❑ pH
➢ Saturated hydraulic conductivity (KSAT) data that shall include at a minimum:
❑ A minimum of three KSAT tests shall be conducted in the most restrictive horizon for each soil series in the soil map.
❑ All KSAT tests shall be conducted in areas representative of the site.
❑ All KSAT tests shall be run until steady-state equilibrium has been achieved.
❑ All collected KSAT data shall be submitted, including copies of field worksheets showing all collected readings.
❑ Submit a soil profile description for each KSAT data point that shall extend at least one foot below the tested horizon.
➢ Soil evaluation recommendations shall include at a minimum:
❑ A brief summary of each map unit and its composition and identification of minor contrasting soils.
❑ Maximum irrigation precipitation rate (in/yr) for each soil/map unit within the proposed irrigation areas.
❑ Seasonal irrigation restrictions, if appropriate.
❑ Identification of areas not suitable for wastewater irrigation.
❑ Recommended geometric mean KSAT rate to be used in the water balance for each soil/map unit based upon in -situ
measurement of the saturated hydraulic conductivity from the most restrictive horizon.
❑ Recommended drainage coefficient to be used in the water balance based upon comprehensive site evaluation, review
of collected onsite data, minor amounts of contrasting soils and the nature of the wastewater to be applied.
❑ Recommended annual hydraulic loading rate (in/yr) for each soil/map unit within the proposed irrigation areas based
upon in -situ KSAT measurements form the most restrictive soil horizon.
NOTE — If the soil evaluation was performed more than one year prior to the submittal of this application package, a statement shall
be included indicating that the site has not changed since the original investigation.
F. Agronomist Evaluation (All Application Packages that include new irrigation sites or new crops for existing irrigation sites):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(i), submit an agronomist evaluation that has been signed, sealed and dated by a qualified professional
and includes at a minimum:
❑ Proposed nutrient uptake values for each cover crop based upon each field's dominant soil series and percent slope.
❑ Plant available nitrogen calculations for each cover crop using the designed effluent concentrations in Application Item
V.1. and proposed mineralization and volatilization rates.
❑ Historical site consideration, soil binding and plant uptake of phosphorus.
❑ Seasonal irrigation restrictions, if appropriate.
❑ A clear and reproducible map showing all areas investigated and their relation to proposed fields and crops.
❑ Maintenance and management plan for all specified crops.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: WWIS 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Page 2 of 6

G. Hydrogeologic Report (All Application Packages treating industrial waste or having a design flow over 25,000 GPD):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(e), the Hydrogeologic Investigation and Reporting Policy, the Groundwater Modeling Policy and
the Performance and Analysis of Aquifer Slug Tests and Pumping Tests Policy, submit a detailed hydrogeologic description
that has been signed, sealed and dated by a qualified professional and includes at a minimum:
❑ A hydrogeologic description to a depth of 20 feet below land surface or bedrock, whichever is less. A greater depth of
investigation is required if the respective depth is used in predictive calculations.
❑ Representative borings within the irrigation areas and all proposed earthen impoundments.
❑ A description of the regional and local geology and hydrogeology.
❑ A description, based on field observations of the site, of the site topographic setting, streams, springs and other groundwater
discharge features, drainage features, existing and abandoned wells, rock outcrops, and other features that may affect the
movement of the contaminant plume and treated wastewater.
❑ Changes in lithology underlying the site.
❑ Depth to bedrock and occurrence of any rock outcrops.
❑ The hydraulic conductivity and transmissivity of the affected aquifer(s).
❑ Depth to the seasonal high water table (SHWT).
❑ A discussion of the relationship between the affected aquifers of the site to local and regional geologic and hydrogeologic
features.
❑ A discussion of the groundwater flow regime of the site prior to operation of the proposed facility and post operation of
the proposed facility focusing on the relationship of the system to groundwater receptors, groundwater discharge features,
and groundwater flow media.
❑ If the SHWT is within six feet of the surface, a mounding analysis to predict the level of the SHWT after wastewater
application.
H. Water Balance (All Application Packages that include new or modified irrigation sites, changes in flow or changes in storage):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(k) and the Water Balance Calculation Policy, submit a water balance that has been signed, sealed
and dated by a qualified professional and includes at a minimum:
❑ At least a two-year iteration of data computation that considers precipitation into and evaporation from all open atmosphere
storage impoundments, and uses a variable number of days per month
❑ Precipitation based on the 80' percentile and a minimum of 30 years of observed data.
❑ Potential Evapotranspiration (PET) using the Thornthwaite method, or another approved methodology, using a minimum
of 30 years of observed temperature data.
❑ Soil drainage based on the geometric mean of the in -situ KSAT tests in the most restrictive horizon and a drainage coefficient
ranging from 4 to 10% (unless otherwise technically documented).
➢ Other factors that may restrict the hydraulic loading rate when determining a water balance include:
❑ Depth to the SHWT and groundwater lateral movement that may result in groundwater mounding.
❑ Nutrient limitations and seasonal application times to ensure wastewater irrigation does not exceed agronomic rates.
❑ Crop management activities resulting in cessation of irrigation for crop removal.
NOTE — Wastewater Irrigation Systems serving residential facilities shall have a minimum of 14 days of wet weather storage.
Engineering Plans (All Application Packages):
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(c)(1), submit standard size and I I x 17-inch plan sets that have been signed, sealed and dated by a
North Carolina licensed Professional Engineer, and shall include at a minimum:
® Table of contents with each sheet numbered.
® A general location map with at least two geographic references and a vicinity map.
® A process and instrumentation diagram showing all flow, recycle/return, aeration, chemical, electrical and wasting paths.
® Plan and profile views of all treatment and storage units, including their piping, valves, and equipment (i.e., pumps,
blowers, mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.), as well as their dimensions and elevations.
® Details of all piping, valves, pumps, blowers, mixers, diffusers, recording devices, fencing, auxiliary power, etc.
❑ A hydraulic profile from the treatment plant headworks to the highest irrigation point.
❑ The irrigation area with an overlay of the suitable irrigation areas depicted in the Soil Evaluation.
❑ Each nozzle/emitter and their wetted area influence, and each irrigation zone labeled as it will be operated.
❑ Locations within the irrigation system of air releases, drains, control valves, highest irrigation nozzle/emitter, etc.
❑ For automated irrigation systems, provide the location and details of the precipitation/soil moisture sensor.
® Plans shall represent a completed design and not be labeled with preliminary phrases (e.g., FOR REVIEW ONLY, NOT
FOR CONSTRUCTION, etc.) that indicate they are anything other than final specifications. However, the plans may be
labeled with the phrase: FINAL DESIGN - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: WWIS 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Page 3 of 6

Specifications (All Application Packages):
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(c)(2), submit specifications that have been signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina licensed
Professional Engineer, and shall include at a minimum:
® Table of contents with each section/page numbered.
® Detailed specifications for each treatment/storage/irrigation unit, as well as all piping, valves, equipment (i.e., pumps,
blowers, mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.), nozzles/emitters, precipitation/soil moisture sensor (if applicable),
audible/visual high water alarms, liner material, etc.
® Site Work (i.e., earthwork, clearing, grubbing, excavation, trenching, backfilling, compacting, fencing, seeding, etc.)
® Materials (i.e., concrete, masonry, steel, painting, method of construction, etc.)
® Electrical (i.e., control panels, transfer switches, automatically activated standby power source, etc.)
® Means for ensuring quality and integrity of the finished product, including leakage, pressure and liner testing.
® Specifications shall represent a completed design and not be labeled with preliminary phrases (e.g., FOR REVIEW ONLY,
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION, etc.) that indicate they are anything other than final specifications. However, the
specifications may be labeled with the phrase: FINAL DESIGN - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
K. Engineering Calculations (All Application Packages):
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(c)(3), submit engineering calculations that have been signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina
licensed Professional Engineer, and shall include at a minimum:
❑ Hydraulic and pollutant loading calculations for each treatment unit demonstrating how the designed effluent
concentrations in Application Item V.1. were determined.
® Sizing criteria for each treatment unit and associated equipment (i.e., blowers, mixers, flow meters, pumps, etc.).
® Total and effective storage calculations for each storage unit.
® Friction/total dynamic head calculations and system curve analysis for each pump used.
® Manufacturer's information for all treatment units, pumps, blowers, mixers, diffusers, flow meters, irrigation system, etc.
❑ Flotation calculations for all treatment and storage units constructed partially or entirely below grade.
❑ A demonstration that the designed maximum precipitation and annual loading rates do not exceed the recommended rates.
❑ A demonstration that the specified auxiliary power source is capable of powering all essential treatment units.
L. Site Map (All Application Packages):
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(d), submit standard size and I I x 17-inch site maps that have been signed, sealed and dated by a
North Carolina licensed Professional Engineer and/or Professional Land Surveyor, and shall include at a minimum:
® A scaled map of the site with topographic contour intervals not exceeding 10 feet or 25 percent of total site relief and
showing all facility -related structures and fences within the wastewater treatment, storage and irrigation areas.
❑ Soil mapping units shown on all irrigation sites.
® The location of all wells (including usage and construction details if available), streams (ephemeral, intermittent, and
perennial), springs, lakes, ponds, and other surface drainage features within 500 feet of all wastewater treatment, storage
and irrigation sites.
® Delineation of the compliance and review boundaries per 15A NCAC 02L .0107 and .0108, and 15A NCAC 02T .0506(c)
if applicable.
❑ Setbacks as required by 15A NCAC 02T .0506.
❑ Site property boundaries within 500 feet of all wastewater treatment, storage and irrigation sites.
❑ All habitable residences or places of public assembly within 500 feet of all treatment, storage and irrigation sites.
NOTE — For clarity, multiple site maps of the facility with cut sheet annotations may be submitted.
M. Power Reliability Plan (All Application Packages):
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(1), submit documentation of power reliability that shall consist of at a minimum:
❑ An automatically activated standby power supply onsite that is capable of powering all essential treatment units under
design conditions, OR
➢ Approval from the Director that the facility:
❑ Serves a private water distribution system that has automatic shut-off during power failures and has no elevated water
storage tanks,
® Has sufficient storage capacity that no potential for overflow exists, and
® Can tolerate septic wastewater due to prolonged detention.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: WWIS 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Page 4 of 6

N. Operation and Maintenance Plan (All Application Packages):
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0507, submit an operation and maintenance (O&M) plan encompassing all wastewater treatment, storage
and irrigation systems that shall include at a minimum a description of:
® Operation of the wastewater treatment, storage and irrigation systems in sufficient detail to show what operations are
necessary for the system to function and by whom the functions are to be conducted.
® Anticipated maintenance of the wastewater treatment, storage and irrigation systems.
® Safety measures, including restriction of access to the site and equipment.
® Spill prevention provisions such as response to upsets and bypasses, including how to control, contain and remediate.
® Contact information for plant personnel, emergency responders and regulatory agencies.
NOTE — A final O&M Plan shall be submitted with the partial and/or final Engineering Certification required under 15A NCAC
02T .0116, however, a preliminary O&M Plan shall be submitted with each application package.
O. Residuals Management Plan (All Application Packages with new, expanding or replacement wastewater treatment systems):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(1) and .0508, submit a Residuals Management Plan that shall include at a minimum:
❑ A detailed explanation of how generated residuals (including trash, sediment and grit) willbe collected, handled, processed,
stored, treated, and disposed.
❑ An evaluation of the treatment facility's residuals storage requirements based upon the maximum anticipated residuals
production rate and ability to remove residuals.
❑ A permit for residuals utilization or a written commitment to the Applicant from a Permittee of a Department approved
residuals disposal/utilization program that has adequate permitted capacity to accept the residuals or has submitted a
residuals/utilization program application.
❑ If oil/grease removal and collection are a designed unit process, submit an oil/grease disposal plan detailing how the
oil/grease will be collected, handled, processed, stored and disposed.
NOTE — Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(o), a minimum of 30 days of residual storage shall be provided.
NOTE — Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(1), a written commitment to the Applicant from a Permittee of a Department approved residuals
disposal/utilization program is not required at the time of this application, however, it shall be provided prior to operation of any
permitted facilities herein.
NOTE — If an on -site restaurant or other business with food preparation is contributing wastewater to this system, an oil/grease
disposal plan shall be submitted.
P. Additional Documentation:
➢ Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity (All Application Packages for Privately -Owned Public Utilities):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0I15(a)(1) and .0504(g), provide the Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity from the North
Carolina Utilities Commission demonstrating the Applicant is authorized to hold the utility franchise for the area to be
served by the wastewater treatment and irrigation system, or
❑ Provide a letter from the North Carolina Utilities Commission's Water and Sewer Division Public Staff stating an
application for a franchise has been received and that the service area is contiguous to an existing franchised area or that
franchise approval is expected.
➢ Existing Permit (All Modification Packages):
® Submit the most recently issued existing permit.
® Provide a list of any items within the permit the Applicant would like the Division to address during the permit modification
(i.e., compliance schedules, permit description, monitoring, permit conditions, etc.).
➢ Final Environmental Document (All Application Packages using public monies or lands subject to the North Carolina
Environmental Policy Act under 15A NCAC 01C .0100 to .0400):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0105(c)(4), submit one copy of the environmental assessment and three copies of the final
environmental document (i.e., Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision).
❑ Include information on any mitigating factors from the Environmental Assessment that impact the design and/or
construction of the wastewater treatment and irrigation system.
➢ Floodway Regulation Compliance (All Application Packages where any portion of the wastewater treatment, storage and
irrigation system is located within the 100-year floodplain):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0105(c)(8), provide written documentation from all local governing entities that the facility is in
compliance with all local ordinances regarding construction or operation of wastewater treatment and/or disposal facilities
within the floodplain.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: WWIS 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Page 5 of 6

P. Additional Documentation (continued):
➢ Operational Agreements (All Application Packages for Home/Property Owners' Associations and Developers of lots to be
sold):
➢ Home/Property Owners' Associations
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0115(c), submit the properly executed Operational Agreement (FORM: HOA).
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0115(c), submit the proposed or approved Articles of Incorporation, Declarations and By-laws.
➢ Developers of lots to be sold
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0115(b), submit the properly executed Operational Agreement (FORM: DEV).
➢ Threatened or Endangered Aquatic Species Documentation (All Application Packages):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0105(c)(10), submit documentation from the Department's Natural Heritage Program demonstrating
the presence or absence of threatened or endangered aquatic species within the boundary of the wastewater treatment,
storage and irrigation facilities.
❑ If the facility directly impacts such species, this documentation shall provide information on the need for permit conditions
pursuant to 15A NCAC 02B .0110.
➢ Wastewater Chemical Analysis (All Application Packages treating Industrial Waste):
❑ Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(h), provide a complete Division certified laboratory chemical analysis of the effluent to be
irrigated for the following parameters (For new facilities, an analysis from a similar facility's effluent is acceptable):
❑ Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N) ❑ Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3-N) ❑ Total Organic Carbon
❑ Calcium ❑ pH ❑ Total Phosphorus
❑ Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) ❑ Phenol ❑ Total Trihalomethanes
❑ Chloride ❑ Sodium ❑ Total Volatile Organic Compounds
❑ Fecal Coliform ❑ Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) ❑ Toxicity Test Parameters
❑ 5-day Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5) ❑ Total Dissolved Solids
❑ Magnesium ❑ Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN)
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION AND SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES
WATER QUALITY PERMITTING SECTION
NON -DISCHARGE PERMITTING UNIT
By U.S. Postal Service:
1617 MAIL SERVICE CENTER
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
By Courier/Special Delivery:
512 N. SALISBURY ST.
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
FAX NUMBER: [phone]
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: WWIS 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Page 6 of 6

DWR
Division of Water Resources
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
r
Division of Water Resources
15A NCAC 02T .0500 — WASTEWATER IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
FORM: WWIS 06-16
L APPLICANT INFORMATION:
1. Applicant's name: Butterball, LLC
2. Applicant type: ❑ Individual ® Corporation ❑ General Partnership
❑ Federal ❑ State ❑ Municipal
3. Signature authority's name: Lankford Ruffin per 15A NCAC 02T .0106(b)
4. Applicant's mailing address: 1 Buttterball Lane
City: Garner State: NC Zip: 27529-
5. Applicant's contact information:
Phone number: [phone] Email Address: lmffin(a_butterball.com
❑ Privately -Owned Public Utility
❑ County
Title:
IL FACILITY INFORMATION:
1. Facility name: Butterball, LLC
2. Facility status: Existing
3. Facility type: Major (> 10,000 GPD or> 300 disposal acres)
4. Facility's physical address: 1628 Garner Chapel Road
City: Mount Olive State: NC Zip: 28365- County: Duplin
5. Wastewater Treatment Facility Coordinates (Decimal Degrees): Latitude: 35.14' Longitude:-77.91'
Datum: NAD83 Level of accuracy: Nearest minute Method of measurement: Unknown
6. USGS Map Name: Williams Quadrangle
III. CONSULTANT INFORMATION:
1. Professional Engineer: Jeremey Lay, PE License Number: Firm: 21 Design Group, Inc.
Mailing address: 1351 Jefferson Street, Suite 301
City: Washington State: MO Zip: 63090-
Phone number: 6( 36) 432-5029 Email Address: jeremyA21designgroup.net
2. Soil Scientist: License Number: Firm:
Mailing address:
City: State: Zip: -
Phone number: (_) = Email Address:
3. Geologist: Aaron Goss, PG License Number: 2620 Firm: Summit Design
Mailing address: 320 Executive Court
City: Hillsborough State: NC Zip: 27278-
Phone number: (_) = Email Address:
4. Agronomist: Firm:
Mailing address:
City: State: Zip: -
Phone number: (_) = Email Address:
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 1 of 12

IV. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS —15A NCAC 02T .0100:
1. Application type: ❑ New ❑ Major Modification ® Minor Modification
If a modification, provide the existing permit number: WQ0000884 and most recent issuance date:
2. Application fee: $0 - Standard - Minor Modification
3. Does this project utilize public monies or lands? ❑ Yes or ® No
If yes, was an Environmental Assessment required under 15A NCAC 01C9 ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If yes, which final environmental document is submitted? ❑ Finding of No Significant Impact or ❑ Record of Decision
Briefly describe any mitigating factors from the Environmental Assessment that may impact this facility:
4. What is the status of the following permits/certifications applicable to the subject facility?
Permit/Certification
Date
Submitted
Date
Approved
Permit/Certification
Number
Agency Reviewer
Collection System (Q > 200,000 GPD)
Dam Safety
Erosion & Sedimentation Control Plan
Nationwide 12 / Section 404
Pretreatment
Sewer System
Stormwater Management Plan
Wetlands 401
Other:
5. What is the wastewater type? ❑ Domestic or Industrial (See 15A NCAC 02T .0103(20))
Is there a Pretreatment Program in effect? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
Has a wastewater chemical analysis been submitted? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
6. Wastewater flow: GPD
Limited by: ❑ Treatment, ❑ Storage, ❑ Field Hydraulics, ❑ Field Agronomics or ❑ Groundwater Mounding
7. Explain how the wastewater flow was determined: ❑ 15A NCAC 02T .0114 or ❑ Representative Data
Has a flow reduction been approved under 15A NCAC 02T .0114(f)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
Establishment Type
Daily Design Flow'
No. of Units
Flow
gal/
GPD
gal/
GPD
gal/
GPD
gal/
GPD
gal/
GPD
gal/
GPD
Total
GPD
a See 15A NCAC 02T .0114(b), (d), (e)(1) and (e)(2), for caveats to wastewater design flow rates (i.e., minimum flow per
dwelling; proposed unknown non-residential development uses; public access facilities located near high public use areas;
and residential property located south or east of the Atlantic Intracoastal Waterway to be used as vacation rentals as defined
in G.S. 42A-4).
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 2 of 12

IV. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS —15A NCAC 02T .0100 (continued):
8. What is the nearest 100-year flood elevation to the facility? 90.9 feet mean sea level. Source: FEMA
Are any treatment, storage or irrigation facilities located within the 100-year flood plain? ❑ Yes or ® No
If yes, which facilities are affected and what measures are being taken to protect them against flooding?
If yes, has the Applicant submitted written documentation of compliance with § 143 Article 21 Part 69 ❑ Yes or ❑ No
9. Has the Applicant provided documentation of the presence or absence of threatened or endangered aquatic species utilizing
information provided by the Department's Natural Heritage Program? ❑ Yes or ® No
10. Does the facility have a proposed or existing groundwater monitoring well network? ® Yes or ❑ No
If no, provide an explanation as to why a groundwater monitoring well network is not proposed:
If yes, complete the following table (NOTE — This table may be expanded for additional wells):
Well Name
Status
Latitude a
Longitude a
Gradient
Location
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
Select
0-
Select
Select
a Provide the following latitude and longitude coordinate determination information:
Datum: Select Level of accuracy: Select Method of measurement: Select
11. If the Applicant is a Privately -Owned Public Utility, has a Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity been submitted?
❑ Yes, ❑No or ®N/A
12. If the Applicant is a Developer of lots to be sold, has a Developer's Operational Agreement (FORM: DEV) been submitted?
❑ Yes, ❑No or ®N/A
13. If the Applicant is a Home/Property Owners' Association, has an Association Operational Agreement (FORM: HOA) been
submitted? ❑ Yes, ❑No or ®N/A
14. Demonstration of historical consideration for permit approval — 15A NCAC 02T .0120:
Has the Applicant or any parent, subsidiary or other affiliate exhibited the following?
a. Has been convicted of environmental crimes under Federal law or G.S. 143-215.613? ❑ Yes or ® No
b. Has previously abandoned a wastewater treatment facility without properly closing that facility? ❑ Yes or ® No
c. Has unpaid civil penalty where all appeals have been abandoned or exhausted? ❑ Yes or ® No
d. Is non -compliant with an existing non -discharge permit, settlement agreement or order? ❑ Yes or ® No
e. Has unpaid annual fees in accordance with 15A NCAC 02T .0105(e)(2)? ❑ Yes or ® No
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 3 of 12

V. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DESIGN CRITERIA — 15A NCAC 02T .0505:
1. For the following parameters, provide the estimated influent concentrations and designed effluent concentrations as
determined in the Engineering Calculations, and utilized in the Agronomic Evaluation and Groundwater Modeling (if
applicable):
Parameter
Estimated Influent Concentration
Designed Effluent Concentration
(monthly average)
Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N)
mg/L
mg/L
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5)
mg/L
mg/L
Fecal Coliforms
per 100 mL
Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3-N)
mg/L
mg/L
Nitrite Nitrogen (NO2-N)
mg/L
mg/L
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen
mg/L
Total Nitrogen
mg/L
mg/L
Total Phosphorus
mg/L
mg/L
Total Suspended Solids (TSS)
mg/L
mg/L
2. Is flow equalization of at least 25% of the average daily flow provided? ® Yes or ❑ No
3. Does the treatment facility include any bypass or overflow lines? ® Yes or ❑ No
If yes, describe what treatment units are bypassed, why this is necessary, and where the bypass discharges: The DAF can be
bypassed if an overflow condition occurs or if the EQ tank must be drained. Water is discharged into the holding lagoon if
the DAF is bypassed.
4. Are multiple pumps provided wherever pumps are used? ® Yes or ❑ No
If no, how does the Applicant intend on complying with 15A NCAC 02T .0505(k)?
5. Check the appropriate box describing how power reliability will be provided in accordance with 15A NCAC 02T .0505(1):
❑ Automatically activated standby power supply onsite capable of powering all essential treatment units; or
® Approval from the Director that the facility:
➢ Has a private water supply that automatically shuts off during power failures and does not contain elevated water
storage tanks;
➢ Has sufficient storage capacity that no potential for overflow exists; and
➢ Can tolerate septic wastewater due to prolonged detention.
6. If the wastewater treatment system is located within the 100-year flood plain, are there water -tight seals on all treatment units
or a minimum of two feet protection from the 100-year flood plain elevation? ❑ Yes, ❑ No or ® N/A
7. In accordance with 15A NCAC 02T .0505(o), how many days of residuals storage are provided? N/A
8. How does the Applicant propose to prohibit public access to the wastewater treatment and storage facilities? Fencing and
guards
9. If an influent pump station is part of the proposed facility (i.e., within the wastewater treatment plant boundary), does the
influent pump station meet the design criteria in 15A NCAC 02T .0305(h)? ❑ Yes, ❑ No, ® N/A — To be permitted
separately, or ❑ N/A — Gravity fed
10. If septic tanks are part of the wastewater treatment facility, do the septic tanks adhere to the standards in 15A NCAC 18A
.1900? ❑ Yes, ❑ No or ® N/A
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 4 of 12

V. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DESIGN CRITERIA — 15A NCAC 02T .0505 (continued):
11. Provide the requested treatment unit and mechanical equipment information:
a. PRELIMINARY / PRIMARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical removal operations and flow equalization):
Treatment Unit
No. of
Manufacturer or
Dimensions (ft) /
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
Units
Material
Spacings (in)
(gallons)
Reference
Reference
Flow Equalization
1
Fab Tech
120' dia titer, 24'
2,030,465
hig
Select
Select
Select
Select
b. SECONDARY / TERTIARY TREATMENT (i.e., biological and chemical processes to remove organics and nutrients)
Treatment Unit
No. of
Units
Manufacturer or
Material
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
(gallons)
Plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
c. DISINFECTION
No. of
Manufacturer or
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
Treatment Unit
Dimensions (ft)
Units
Material
(gallons)
Reference
Reference
Select
Select
➢ If chlorination is the proposed method of disinfection, specify detention time provided: minutes (NOTE — 30
minutes minimum required), and indicate what treatment unit chlorine contact occurs:
➢ If ultraviolet (UV) light is the proposed method of disinfection, specify the number of banks: , number of lamps
per bank: and maximum disinfection capacity: GPM.
d. RESIDUAL TREATMENT
No. of
Manufacturer or
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
Treatment Unit
Dimensions (ft)
Units
Material
(gallons)
Reference
Reference
Select
Select
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 5 of 12

V. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DESIGN CRITERIA — 15A NCAC 02T .0505 (continued):
e. PUMPS
Location
No. of
Pumps
Purpose
Manufacturer /
Type
Capacity
Plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
GPM
I TDH
f. BLOWERS
Location
No.
No. of
Units Served
Manufacturer /
Type
Capacity
(CFM)
Plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
Equalization
1
1
Kaeser PD
1754
g. MIXERS
Location
No. of
Mixers
Units Served
Manufacturer /
Type
Power
(h)
Plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
h. RECORDING DEVICES & RELIABILITY
Device
No. of
Units
Location
Manufacturer
Maximum
Capacit
Plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
Other
1
Equalization
Siemens
N/A
Select
Select
Select
i. EFFLUENT PUMP / FIELD DOSING TANK (IF APPLICABLE):
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 6 of 12

Plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
Internal dimensions (L x W x H or (p x H)
ft
ft
ft
Total volume
ft,
gallons
Dosing volume
ft,
gallons
Audible & visual alarms
jj
Equipment to prevent irrigation during rain
events
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 7 of 12

VI. EARTHEN IMPOUNDMENT DESIGN CRITERIA —15A NCAC 02T .0505:
IF MORE THAN ONE IMPOUNDMENT, PROVIDE ADDITIONAL COPIES OF THIS PAGE AS NECESSARY.
1. What is the earthen impoundment type? Select
2. Storage Impoundment Coordinates (Decimal Degrees): Latitude: Longitude: - °
Datum: Select Level of accuracy: Select Method of measurement: Select
3. Do any impoundments include a discharge point (pipe, spillway, etc)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
4. Are subsurface drains present beneath or around the impoundment to control groundwater elevation? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
5. Is the impoundment designed to receive surface runoff? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If yes, what is the drainage area? ft', and was this runoff incorporated into the water balance? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
6. If a liner is present, how will it be protected from wind driven wave action?:
7. Will the earthen impoundment water be placed directly into or in contact with GA classified groundwater? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If yes, has the Applicant provided predictive calculations or modeling demonstrating that such placement will not result in a
contravention of GA groundwater standards? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
8. What is the depth to bedrock from the earthen impoundment bottom elevation? ft
If the depth to bedrock is less than four feet, has the Applicant provided a liner with a hydraulic conductivity no greater than
1 x 10-' cm/s? ❑ Yes, or ❑ N/A
Has the Applicant provided predictive calculations or modeling demonstrating that surface
water or groundwater standards will not be contravened? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If the earthen impoundment is excavated into bedrock, has the Applicant provided predictive calculations or modeling
demonstrating that surface water or groundwater standards will not be contravened? ❑ Yes, ❑ No or ❑ N/A
9. If the earthen impoundment is lined and the mean seasonal high water table is higher than the impoundment bottom
elevation, how will the liner be protected (e.g., bubbling, groundwater infiltration, etc.)?
10. If applicable, provide the specification page references for the liner installation and testing requirements:
11. If the earthen impoundment is located within the 100-year flood plain, has a minimum of two feet of protection (i.e., top of
embankment elevation to 100-year flood plain elevation) been provided? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
12. Provide the requested earthen impoundment design elements and dimensions:
Earthen Impoundment Design Elements
Earthen Impoundment Dimensions
Liner type:
❑ ciay
I ❑ synthetic
Top of embankment elevation:
ft
❑ Other
❑ Unlined
Liner hydraulic conductivity:
x cm/s
Freeboard elevation:
ft
Hazard class:
Select
Toe of slope elevation:
ft
Designed freeboard:
It
Impoundment bottom elevation:
ft
Total volume:
ft,
gallons
Mean seasonal high water table depth:
ft
Effective volume:
ft,
gallons
Embankment slope:
Effective storage time:
days
Top of dam water surface area:
ft2
Plan Sheet Reference:
Freeboard elevation water surface area:
ft2
Specification Section:
Bottom of impoundment surface area:
ft2
NOTE — The effective volume shall be the volume between the two foot freeboard elevation and the: (1) pump intake pipe
elevation; (2) impoundment bottom elevation or (3) mean seasonal high water table, whichever is closest to the two foot
freeboard elevation.
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 8 of 12

VIL IRRIGATION SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA —15A NCAC 02T .0505:
1. Provide the minimum depth to the seasonal high water table within the irrigation area:
NOTE — The vertical separation between the seasonal high water table and the ground surface shall be at least one foot.
2. Are there any artificial drainage or water movement structures (e.g., surface water or groundwater) within 200 feet of the
irrigation area? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If yes, were these structures addressed in the Soil Evaluation and/or Hydrogeologic Report, and are these structures to be
maintained or modified?
3. Soil Evaluation recommended loading rates (NOTE — This table may be expanded for additional soil series):
Soil Series
Fields within
Soil Series
Recommended
Loading Rate
(in/hr)
Recommended
Loading Rate
(in/ r)
Annual /Seasonal
Loading
If Seasonal, list
appropriate
months
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
4. Are the designed loading rates less than or equal to Soil Evaluation recommended loading rates? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If no, how does the Applicant intend on complying with 15A NCAC 02T .0505(n)?
5. How does the Applicant propose to prohibit public access to the irrigation system?
6. Has the irrigation system been equipped with a flow meter to accurately determine the volume of effluent applied to each
field as listed in VILE.? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If no, how does the Applicant intend on complying with 15A NCAC 02T .0505(t)?
7. Provide the required cover crop information and demonstrate the effluent will be applied at or below agronomic rates:
Cover Crop
Soil Series
% Slope
Nitrogen Uptake Rate
(lbs/ac r)
Phosphorus Uptake
Rate (lbs/ac r)I
I
I
a. Specify where the nitrogen and phosphorus uptake rates for each cover crop were obtained:
b. Proposed nitrogen mineralization rate:
c. Proposed nitrogen volatilization rate: _
d. Minimum irrigation area from the Agronomist Evaluation's nitrogen balance: ft2
e. Minimum irrigation area from the Agronomist Evaluation's phosphorus balance: ft2
f. Minimum irrigation area from the water balance: ft2
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 9 of 12

VIL IRRIGATION SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA —15A NCAC 02T .0505 (continued):
8. Field Information (NOTE — This table may be expanded for additional fields):
Field
Area
(acres)
Dominant
Soil Series
Designed
Loading
Rate
(in/hr)
Designed
Loading
Rate
(in/ r)
Latitude a
Longitude a
Waterbody
Stream Index
No.
Classification
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Total
a Provide the following latitude and longitude coordinate determination information:
Datum: Select Level of accuracy: Select Method of measurement: Select
b For assistance determining the waterbody stream index number and its associated classification, instructions may be
downloaded at: http://deq.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/planning/classification-standards/classifications
Spray Irrigation Design Elements
Drip Irrigation Design Elements
Nozzle wetted diameter:
ft
Emitter wetted area:
ft2
Nozzle wetted area:
ft2
Distance between laterals:
ft
Nozzle capacity:
GPM
Distance between emitters:
ft
Nozzle manufacturer/model:
/
Emitter capacity:
GPH
Elevation of highest nozzle:
ft
Emitter manufacturer/model:
/
Specification Section:
Elevation of highest emitter:
ft
Specification Section:
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 10 of 12

VIIL SETBACKS —15A NCAC 02T .0506:
1. Does the project comply with all setbacks found in the river basin rules (15A NCAC 02B .0200)? ® Yes or ❑ No
If no, list non -compliant setbacks:
2. Have any setback waivers been obtained in order to comply with 15A NCAC 02T .506(a) and .0506 ? ❑ Yes or ® No
If yes, have these waivers been written, notarized and signed by all parties involved and recorded with the County Register of
Deeds? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
3. Provide the minimum field observed distances (ft) for each setback parameter to the irrigation system and treatment/storage
units (NOTE — Distances greater than 500 feet may be marked N/A):
Setback Parameter
Irrigation
System
I Treatment /
tora a Units
Any habitable residence or place of assembly under separate ownership or not to be
maintained as part of the project site
N/A
Any habitable residence or place of assembly owned by the Permittee to be maintained as
art of the project site
Any private or public water supply source
N/A
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial waterbodies, and wetlands)
N/A
Groundwater lowering ditches (where the bottom of the ditch intersects the SHWT)
Subsurface groundwater lowering drainage systems
Surface water diversions (ephemeral streams, waterways, ditches)
Any well with exception of monitoring wells
N/A
Any property line
N/A
Top of slope of embankments or cuts of two feet or more in vertical height
Any water line from a disposal system
Any swimming pool
Public right of way
Nitrification field
Any building foundation or basement
Impounded public water supplies
Public shallow groundwater supply (less than 50 feet deep)
4. Does the Applicant intend on complying with 15A NCAC 02T .0506(c) in order to have reduced irrigation setbacks to
property lines? ❑ Yes or ® No
If yes, complete the following table by providing the required concentrations as determined in the Engineering Calculations:
Estimated Influent
Designed Effluent
Designed Effluent
Parameter
Concentration
Concentration
Concentration
(monthly average)
(daily maximum)
Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N)
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
Biochemical Oxygen Demand
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
(BOD5)
Fecal Coliforms
per 100 mL
per 100 mL
Total Suspended Solids (TSS)
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
Turbidity
NTU
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 11 of 12

IX. COASTAL WASTE TREATMENT DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS —15A NCAC 02H .0400:
1. Is this facility located in a Coastal Area as defined per 15A NCAC 02H .0403? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
For assistance determining if the facility is located within the Coastal Area, a reference map may be downloaded at: Coastal
Areas Boundary.
2. Is this an Interim Treatment and Disposal Facility per 15A NCAC 02H .0404(g)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
NOTE — Interim facilities do not include County and Municipal area -wide collection and treatment systems.
IF ANSWERED YES TO ITEMS IX.1. AND IX.2., THEN COMPLETE ITEMS IX.3. THROUGH IX.17.
3. Is equalization of at least 25% of the average daily flow provided? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
4. How will noise and odor be controlled?
5. Is an automatically activated standby power source provided? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
6. Are all essential treatment units provided in duplicate? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
NOTE — Per 15A NCAC 02T .0103(16), essential treatment units are defined as any unit associated with the wastewater
treatment process whose loss would likely render the facility incapable of meeting the required performance criteria, including
aeration units or other main treatment units, clarification equipment, filters, disinfection equipment, pumps and blowers.
7. Are the disposal units (i.e., irrigation fields) provided in duplicate (e.g., more than one field)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
8. Is there an impounded public surface water supply within 500 feet of the wetted area? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
9. Is there a public shallow groundwater supply (less than 50 feet deep) within 500 feet of the wetted area? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
10. Is there a private groundwater supply within 100 feet of the wetted area? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
11. Are there any SA classified waters within 100 feet of the wetted area? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
12. Are there any non -SA classified waters within 50 feet of the wetted area? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
13. Are there any surface water diversions (i.e., drainage ditches) within 25 feet of the wetted area? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
14. Per the requirements in 15A NCAC 02H .0404(g)(7), how much green area is provided? ft2
15. Is the green area clearly delineated on the plans? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
16. Is the spray irrigation wetted area within 200 feet of any adjoining properties? ❑ Yes, ❑ No or ❑ N/A (i.e., drip irrigation)
17. Does the designed annual loading rate exceed 91 inches? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 12 of 12

Professional Engineer's Certification:
I Ben Kuenzel, P.E. attest that this application for
(Professional Engineer's naive from Application Item III.1.)
Butterball, LLC
(Facility name from Application Item II.1.)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate, complete and consistent with the information supplied in the plans, specifications, engineering
calculations, and all other supporting documentation to the best of my knowledge. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the
proposed design has been prepared in accordance with this application package and its instructions, as well as all applicable regulations
and statutes. Although other professionals may have developed certain portions of this submittal package, inclusion of these materials
under my signature and seal signifies that I have reviewed this material and have judged it to be consistent with the proposed design.
NOTE — In accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6B, any person who knowingly makes any false statement,
representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to
exceed $10,000, as well as civil penalties up to $25,000 per violation,
North Carolina Professional Engineer's seal, signature, and date:
CARfj''•
°° essi
U y� .t
Z Q Is
' V :
!,�j�✓'FNGINE�Q��tiJ���
Applicant's Certification per 15(A` NCAC 02T .0106(b(): y
I, L�_n k tYj �^� ✓ }�� , �; Ce • 4-,e ^ o�T &v, ro �mekiS7t�'�g� �;r(test that this application for
( ignature Authority's name & title from Application Item I.3.)
r
name from Application Item II.1.)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I understand that any discharge of wastewater
from this non -discharge system to surface waters or the land will result in an immediate enforcement action that may include civil
penalties, injunctive relief, and/or criminal prosecution. I will snake no claim against the Division of Water Resources should a condition
of this permit be violated. I also understand that if all required parts of this application package are not completed and that if all required
supporting information and attachments are not included, this application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I further certify
that the Applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of an environmental crime, has not abandoned a wastewater facility without
proper closure, does not have an outstanding civil penalty where all appeals have been exhausted or abandoned, are compliant with any
active compliance schedule, and do not have any overdue annual fees per 15A NCAC 02T .0105(e).
NOTE — In accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6B, any person who knowingly makes any false statement,
representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to
exceed $10,000 as well as civil penalties up to $25,000 per violation.
Signature: Date: r 2-2--
FORM: WWIS 06-16 Page 13 of 12

Attachment B: Engineering Plans
Fab Tech Water Solutions 5 fabtechwws.com

w
0 0
Q
a ¢ U
O
> LLIW J J
U�w»ZULL
cn
��7-xsJJa�w
u.lZ_ZQQ UV
5ww�w0
>aoocnLua
J N M LO CC ti 00
O O O O O O O O
z Z co CO CO co CO CO CO CO
O O CDO O O O O
O O CD O O CD O O
" N . N . CV N N
CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV
LLLL L~L L~L L~L L~L L~L L~L L-

N
w
W
O
m
m w
z
W
W LL
a
a �
Z X
g.�
oa
wad
U ZYZ
= Q
O F
d Q
O �
;o LL
O
N W
co
w
w
u�
Q
z
F
O
N
z
z
m Y
in Ozz
c
> >
Q
J
W
LO
H o
W Z
0 Z
0
gz
z O
W LU
W•
W
U)
W O O �
m ~ U z
�maz
w
cn
cn o z
¢LLIF
OLLLL4
U O O �
Q
W
U
Q
O
co
Q
�
4
LL
n
W
4
N
O
Q
Z
LL
LU
g�
w�
Wo
>
CO
Q
m1Z\1\\
m w
g a a W
OZ�W0
o- ZO3a�
=aWz�?p
W Y W—
LL
U a w LL LL
m ¢
WLL W
g W W W W N
O O
Z W
J X J J
O l L O W LL LL

- DRAIN TO LAGOON

_)
(�§
_§2
/
�)
2§0
22)
k§G
LU �22
§§§
pmo
)/�
0cn
sm
§E■
�)§
@em
§
\\§
@a@
)�-0 §
§.§§§
K&2G2
®�§k/
\i�eM
FS§z
&\3
—44
0z0
=
, )§ai
„
}}�
�E�z
§�
)�(z
)!
jf[2
§LU
\d
§/
e\I)
k�2
;o/0
f
LLa§
LL
z«{
§§j
co
oR
§�
2§ Z _
sLu
S] � LL�j
§[ b /gym
2j � <
«2 2 999
Lu
� )§

0
0
5
W
F-w
zF
LU
w w z
J IwL W
U N �
M
p X w
Wz
Z
Q � yXX
O W 111
a
�aF-
J
z
:3 a 0
a O
w g
m a
wa 0
zarz
x(L0^
LL co
_ z
LU
~ J
boo�w
d
zd�z
z z
oWwz
F LL
�wga
-`W`y_x
waz
gzCO
()
O J 0
v z
\
Fq
W
ZYZ
+ I
z F
w,
1
:::
o / ill
:•.�:. ••�
��
dB
Lu
z
G/ s0
/ aLf
�v \
LL ^
QW za
of �a
z Y z
LLI u� w
J z g J
LL d O LL
W g N W
0 a
z
U) w
X W
W LL

§
\
g
§o
�(
m£ k -
CD g LU
7 ƒ|§
)\ Lu
r /
Lu 2
�2 22
)§
\/
g
�/
2 \ ± «
U§
■�
« a
§
�§
§2
7§
2
\ § § < j
2(
§
0 b
g§
§
-W
§�
k#
—k ) 2\ ®k
®r A#
ge
$
§� §�
§§ ��
)
m> §\
§S
§§
�� g
2 �m
-
k\
\q§§
�{ §\
_
\
(§�)2<- /S
---
Wj
� ��
Zk
k§)§§mod �0
/
��
�\§§)§\�\\�^\
)
c w
ow
����IR2A±a§
.
]&
&%E
.0
§ \§§)§</)k§%
<�0Lo_aie

�
�§ §
§§o�
� ■§���
O#±=b
§ §�[Amz
$
fm
\z �
\§ \
¢k0M
§)§=k
22§(e
_§
\§E0
2�Sa�
CL
»�EA�
�k»£k
�£E§]
§§
§k k��
§* \�Lu
�\ LuC)
cn z
)\ R£7
IL
)§

Attachment C: Specifications
Fab Tech Water Solutions 6 fabtechwws.com

BUTTERBALL - MOUNT OLIVE, NORTH CAROLINA
WATER RESOURCE RECOVERY SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
Technical Specifications (WQ0000884)
FabTiech
WATER SOLUTIONS
Prepared for:
Lankford Ruffin
Director of Environmental Affairs and Sustainability
Butterball, LLC
1 Butterball Lane
Garner, NC 27S29
Prepared by:
Fab Tech Wastewater Solutions
820 O'Fallon Road
Weldon Spring, MO 63044
314-478-3344
6/07/2022

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

SECTION 000110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS -
01 10 00 - Summary
01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
01 64 00 - Owner Furnished Products
01 70 00 - Execution
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 - Demolition
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 05 10 - Leakage Testing of Hydraulic Structures
03 30 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 09 — PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 — Painting and Coating
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 10 - Common Motor Requirements
26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 22 00 - Low -Voltage Transformers
26 24 16 - Panelboards
26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
26 28 16 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers
26 36 00 - Transfer Switches
26 56 19 - LED Exterior Lighting
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 10 00 -Site Clearing
31 20 00 - Earth Moving
31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 05 16 - Precast Concrete Utility Structures
33 31 00 - Sanitary Sewer Systems
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION
40 05 00 - General Piping Requirements
40 05 15 - Pressure Testing of Piping
40 05 24 - Valves, General
TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

40 05 65 - Check Valves for Specific Applications
40 05 66 - Butterfly Valves
40 07 22 - Flexible Pipe Couplings and Expansion Joints
40 07 62 - Wall Pipes, Seep Rings, and Penetrations
40 20 40 - Ductile Iron Process Pipe
40 20 76 — Carbon & Stainless Steel Pipe
40 20 91 - PVC Pipe (4 Inch and Larger)
40 97 15 - Pressure Gauges
DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
46 05 29 — Blowers and Blower Controls
46 51 03 — Air Diffusers
END OF SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2

SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section generally describes the project and includes work by others, work sequencing,
Contractor's use of premises, Owner occupancy, maintenance and operation of existing facilities,
special conditions, work restrictions, and utility connection fees.
1.2 LOCATION OF PROJECT SITE
A. Butterball — Mount Olive: The project site is located on Garner Chapel Road in Duplin County, North
Carolina where shown on the drawings.
1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work involves the addition of a pre -dissolved air floatation equalization tank to provide additional
water balance flexibility and improve DAF performance. The scope of the work includes erecting the tank
with mixing system and liquid level sensor and splicing into the influent and effluent lines of the existing
equalization tank.
1.4 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The outlined sequence of construction does not include all items necessary to complete the work but
is intended to identify the sequence of critical events necessary to minimize disruption and to ensure
compliance with regulatory requirements. It shall be understood by the Contractor that critical events
identified are not all inclusive and that additional items of work not shown may be required. The
sequence of construction is a precedence requirement and does not attempt to schedule the
Contractor's work. It is intended only to indicate which activities must precede other activities in order
to minimize interference and disruptions.
B. The work sequence shall be determined by the Contractor and within ten (10) days after the "Notice to
Proceed" is issued shall be:
1. Submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval by the Engineer.
2. The following suggested sequence of construction describes simplistically, the major events
required to complete the work in the preferred order of completion. The order of events is
designed to minimize disruption to the ongoing operation of the existing facilities.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. The Contractor's use of the project site shall be limited to its construction operations, including on -site
storage of materials, on -site fabrication facilities, and field offices, as noted in the Contract Drawings.
B. Contractor shall note the location of all utilities, such as sanitary sewer manholes, water meters and
fire hydrants along the route of the work. The Contractor shall notify the owner of the property not less
than five days prior to occupation of such land by the Contractor.
1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The Owner may utilize all or part of the existing facilities during the entire period of construction for the
conduct of the Owner's normal operations. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner to minimize
interference with the Contractor's operations and to facilitate the Owner's operations.
1.7 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner as to result in the least possible disruption
to the operation of the existing facilities and to the public's use of roadways, driveways, and utilities.
B. Contractor shall also deliver written notice to property occupants (private and public) of all planned
disruption to roadways, driveways, and utilities seventy-two hours in advance of disruption.
C. At no time shall the Contractor undertake to close off any pipelines, or open valves, or take any other
action which would affect the operation of the existing system or facilities, except as specifically
required by the Drawings and specifications, until authorization is granted by the Owner or Engineer
and after proper notification.
D. The facilities will be maintained in continuous operation by the Owner during the entire construction
period of this contract. Work shall be scheduled and coordinated by the Contractor that such work will
not impede the collection system or pump station operation or cause odor or other nuisance. In
SUMMARY 011000 - 1

performing the work shown and specified, the Contractor shall plan and schedule his work to meet the
operating requirements and all additional restrictions.
E. Only the Owner can authorize the shutdown of any portions of the facility or system. The Contractor
shall, under no circumstances, interfere with any existing component without the Owner's authorization
in writing. Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 5 days in advance in writing. The Owner shall be
responsible for removing facilities from operation.
F. A planned shutdown may be cancelled by the Owner upon a 24-hour notification by the
Owner/Engineer to the Contractor. Such cancellation shall be expected due to wet weather conditions
or other conditions beyond the control of the Owner, Engineer or Contractor. All efforts shall be taken
to check weather forecasts and the like prior to scheduling facility shutdowns. However, if a
cancellation must occur, the Owner shall not be responsible for any additional costs associated with
mobilization and demobilization.
1.8 SPECIAL PERMIT CONDITIONS AND WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Contractor shall research and report to Owner on any local jurisdiction's ordinance restricting the hours
of operation for heavy construction equipment and schedule work in accordance with such ordinance.
Contractor shall assume normal working hours on site may be 7 AM to 6 PM, Monday through Friday,
and seek approval from Engineer or Owner for work outside of the normal working hours.
1.9 UTILITY CONNECTION FEES
A. Contractor shall submit contact information for each utility for which utility connections are desired
and report to Owner or Engineer on communications with such utilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY 011000 - 2

SECTION 013000
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes project management, project records, project meetings, photographic
documentation, site safety, security, and environmental procedures.
1.2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
A. All work under the Contract shall be performed under the continuous supervision of competent
personnel thoroughly experienced in the class of work specified. Prior to beginning the work, the
Contractor shall give the Engineer, in writing, the name of the Contractor's official representative or
superintendent for the project. The superintendent shall be capable of providing adequate supervision
to the project and shall be responsible for receiving instructions, notices, and written orders from the
Engineer. A change of the superintendent shall be reported to the Engineer in writing. Failure to
provide adequate supervision to the project shall be grounds for the Engineer to require a change in
supervision before allowing the work to proceed. The superintendent shall be responsible for reporting
to the Engineer any inconsistencies, omissions, or lack of definite detail which is not covered on the
plans or in the specification
B. File with the Engineer the names, phone numbers and addresses of two or more responsible persons
in the Contractor's organization who are to be on call at all times. Contractor shall update the list within
24 hours of a change.
C. The Contractor shall employ a Project Superintendent who will be responsible for continuous
coordination among all phases of work. He shall serve as the Contractor's liaison with the Owner's
Representative.
D. The Project Superintendent shall have a minimum of three years of experience in the field and be
acceptable to the Owner. He shall be maintained by the Contractor throughout the project and not be
replaced without concurrence of the Owner.
E. The Project Superintendent's responsibilities shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Consult the contract drawings and specifications of all trades to verify and coordinate the location
of the various building components and items to be installed by all Contractors. Review the daily
work schedules of all Contractors for a minimum of interferences to the work of other
Contractors. This work includes (but is not limited to) installation of sleeves in walls and/or
foundations for electrical and mechanical pipes and damper or louver openings.
2. Consult and cooperate with all Contractors and their installers for all work to determine space
requirements and adequate clearances with respect to other equipment in the building. The
Owner's Representative reserves the right to determine space priority in the event of interference
between piping, conduit equipment, furnishings, etc., of various trades.
3. Inspect, report to the Owner's Representative and coordinate the removal, relocation and
reconnection of any installed work which interferes with the work of other trades. All work so
directed shall be at the expense of the installing Contractor.
1.3 PROJECT RECORDS
A. During the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall maintain a suitable office at or near the
site of the work which shall be the headquarters of a representative authorized to receive drawings,
instructions, or other communication or articles. The Contractor may use a workman's vehicle for the
office at the site of the work and shall designate which workman's vehicle it will be.
B. Copies of the drawings, specifications, approved shop drawings, change orders, and other contract
documents shall be kept at the Contractor's office at the site of the work, and be made available for
use at all times by Engineer and Owner.
C. "As constructed" information shall be recorded on a separate set of Plans for submittal upon
completion of the project. See Section 017800 for specifics on recording this information.
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 1

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Prior to the start of work the Engineer, in cooperation with the various agencies, will establish the time
and date, distribute agenda, and administer the preconstruction conference. Owner, Engineer,
Contractor, major Subcontractor(s) and Governmental Agencies will attend.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Progress meetings will generally occur at the end of the month. The general job status will be
discussed including progress of work, field observations, problems & decisions, shop submittal
schedules and reviews, revision of construction schedule, corrective measures and project payments.
1.6 ELECTRONIC PROTOCOL
A. This project will use electronic media for communications, submittal of shop drawings, pay
requests, and other project related correspondence:
1.7 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the production of pre -construction and construction photographs as
provided herein.
1. Pre -Construction Photographs: Photographs taken, in sufficient numbers and detail prior to the
start of Work to show original construction site conditions.
2. Progress Photographs: Photographs shall be taken throughout the duration of construction at
regular intervals to document progress of the Work.
B. Digital images shall be electronically transferred monthly and at the end of the project on computer
disks in JPEG format. Each image shall be labeled with the date taken.
C. Contractor shall provide electronic copies of photographs at the completion of the project before final
payment is made.
1.8 OWNER PURCHASED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A. Owner will be purchasing equipment and materials for the project which may affect the Work
Sequence and Work Schedule. The following delivery schedule will be described elsewhere.
B. Owner will be purchasing equipment and materials for the project which may affect the Work
Sequence and Work Schedule. Refer to Section 016400 for the details and dates of arrival of the
Owner's purchased equipment and materials for the project. Double handling may be required when
equipment must be moved from a common carrier and placed in a temporary storage area.
1.9 AVAILABLE LAND
A. Owner is providing for all land and access required for constructing the Work. If it is necessary or
desirable that the Contractor use land outside of the Owner's acquired land, the Contractor shall obtain
a written agreement with the landowner. The agreement between Contractor and property owner shall
describe in detail such items as removal of fences, installation of temporary fences, limits of land to be
occupied, and any costs associated with crop damage.
1.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Develop an overall schedule and submit two copies within seven days of Notice to Proceed for review
and approval to Owner's Representative a schedule of the work to be completed on the Project.
B. Revise the schedule as requested by the Owner's Representative when:
1. Work progress falls 10 percent behind scheduled progress.
2. When time extensions are approved for changes and causes beyond Contractor's control.
3. When Contractor feels a significant reorganization of activities becomes necessary because of
field and material supply conditions in order to meet the contract completion date of the Project.
C. Coordinate Work of various sections, space requirements for installation, and accessibility for
construction by others.
D. Work that disrupts utility service shall be shown on the Construction Schedule and specifically
scheduled with the Owner. Schedule notification shall consist of a written notice defining the work to
be accomplished, the normal function that will be interrupted, the duration of the interruption, and the
mitigating effort to be performed by the Contractor to maintain the capacity to operate continuously.
The written notice shall be submitted to the Owner fourteen days in advance of the proposed work and
the Owner will respond to the Contractor in writing within 7 days of receipt of the notice regarding the
acceptability of the proposed plan.
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 2

E. At no time shall the Contractor close off any pipelines, or open valves, or take any other action which
would affect the operation of the existing system or facilities, except as specifically required by the
Drawings and specifications, until authorization is granted by the Owner or Engineer and after proper
notification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 4

SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies general requirements for the submittals of shop drawings, product data, and
samples. Refer to Section 017800 for closeout submittal requirements.
1.2 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All submittals shall be sent to Engineer at an email address to be provided to contractor during the pre -
construction conference.
B. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be approved by Contractor before submitting to Engineer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for timely submittals so that there will be no delay to the Work due to
the absence of approved submittals.
C. Upon receipt of a submittal, the Engineer will review and return the shop drawings within 14 calendar
days. This review time will commence starting the next working day following receipt of the
submittal.
D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness of each submittal, including the
identification of all deviations from the Contract Documents on each submittal and in the Contractor's
letter of transmittal. Each submittal shall be complete in all aspects incorporating all information and
data required to evaluate the products' compliance with the Contract Documents.
E. Partial or incomplete submissions shall be returned to the Contractor without review. Time delays
caused by rejection of submittals are not cause for extra charges to the Owner or time extensions.
1.3 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor may make electronic submittals which will be exchanged electronically through mutually
agreeable software. Procore, ProjectWise, Submittal Exchange are acceptable, and others may be
proposed by Contractor.
B. Follow the submittal requirements below.
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single specification section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation
to each item.
2. Use the same submittal and resubmittal numbering system.
3. Identify the Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification section number, as appropriate.
4. Apply Contractor's standard certification stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval,
verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination
of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
Submittals without this certification will be returned without review.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Contract Documents and other technical sections in
these Contract Documents requiring submittals.
B. The use of contract drawing reproductions for shop drawings is subject to rejection.
C. Shop drawings shall show applicable standards, such as ASTM number or Federal Specification,
performance characteristics, the principal dimensions, weight, structural and operating features, space
required, clearances, dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other equipment and
materials, external connections, anchorages, supports required, type and/or brand of finish or shop
coat, grease fittings, etc. depending on the subject of the Drawings.
D. If the Contractor submits shop drawings of equipment by manufacturers other than those listed in the
specifications, provide the following information with the submittal:
1. The name and address of at least three companies or agencies that are currently using the
equipment.
2. The name and telephone number of at least one person at each of the above companies or
agencies whom the Owner's Representative may contact.
3. A description of the eauioment that was installed at the above locations. The description shall be
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

in sufficient detail to allow the Owner's Representative to compare it with the equipment that is
proposed to be installed in this project.
E. For materials originating outside of the United States for which tests are required, provide
recertification and retesting by an independent domestic testing laboratory.
F. Provide a professional engineer's, architect, land surveyor, or landscape architect seal on appropriate
drawings of items that are submitted for review where required by the Specifications. Each copy of a
submittal requiring a Professional Seal shall bear an original seal with signature and date.
Electronic seals are permitted provided they meet the State Board of Professional Licensing
regulations.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product data may be in the form of manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules,
performance charts, illustrations, and other standard descriptive data. Product data shall show
applicable standards, such as ASTM number or Federal Specification.
B. Where product data from a manufacturer is submitted, clearly mark each copy with indelible ink to
identify pertinent materials, products or models proposed with all pertinent data, performance
characteristics and capacities, dimensions, clearances, diagrams, controls, connections, anchorage,
and supports. Present a sufficient level of detail for assessment of compliance with the contract
documents.
C. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings may be used in the submittal, but shall be modified by
deleting information which is not applicable to the project, and by providing additional information
specific to the project.
D. When warranties are required, a sample of the warranty for each product shall be submitted with the
shop drawings or product data. The sample warranty shall be the same form that will be used for the
actual warranty.
E. When Buy American Provisions are required for the Project, Supplier/Manufacturer shall provide a Buy
American Certification with submittals for materials and equipment covered by the Buy American
Provisions. Contractor is responsible for confirming that any product purchased for the Project meets
the Buy American Provisions.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples for review of the various materials, together with the finish, before purchasing,
fabricating, applying, or installing such materials and finishes.
B. Identify samples as to product, color, manufacturer, trade name, lot, style, model, etc., location of use,
and contract document reference.
C. Samples shall be of sufficient size or quantity to illustrate clearly the quality, type, range of color, finish
or texture and shall be properly labeled to show complete project identification, the nature of the
material, trade name of manufacturer and location of the Work where the material represented by the
sample will be used.
D. Acceptable samples will establish the standards by which the completed Work will be judged.
Therefore, materials, finishes, and workmanship in the completed project shall be equal in every
respect to that of the samples submitted and accepted.
E. Samples of value may be returned to the Contractor for use in the project after review, analysis,
comparison, and/or testing as may be required in the review process. One sample marked
"resubmittal is not required" will be returned to the Contractor. Rejected samples will not be returned.
F. Furnish one sample of the finally reviewed materials, colors, or textures to Engineer for final record.
Such material samples shall carry on the back all identification as previously described. If the sample
is paint, include manufacturer, mix and proportion, name of color, building, Contractor/Subcontractor,
and surfaces to which it is to be applied.
1.7 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE
A. Furnish a Certificate of Compliance for materials specified to a recognized standard or code prior to
the use of any such materials in the work. The Engineer may permit the use of certain materials or
assemblies prior to sampling and testing if accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance. The certificate
shall be signed by the manufacturer of the material or the manufacturer of assembled materials and
shall state that the materials involved comply in all respects with the requirements of the
Specifications. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished with each lot of material delivered to the
work and the lot so certified shall be clearlv identified in the certificate.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2

B. All materials used on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance may be sampled and tested at any time.
The fact that material is used on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for incorporating material in the Work which conforms to the requirements
of the Contract Documents and any such material not conforming to such requirements will be subject
to rejection whether in place or not.
C. The Engineer reserves the right to refuse permission for use of material on the basis of a Certificate of
Compliance.
1.8 ENGINEER'S REVIEW
A. Engineer's review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the
information given in the Construction Documents. Neither the review nor any corrections or comment
made on submittals during review relieves the Contractor from full compliance with the Contract
Documents, including, but not limited to, the plans and specifications. Engineer's review of a specific
item does not, nor shall it be construed to, include review of an assembly of which the item is a
component. The Contractor is solely responsible for: all measurements, dimensions, quantities,
materials, and proper fit up and interfacing of all components; all aspects of any fabrication process;
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; coordination of the work
with that of all other trades; and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
B. The returned submittal will indicate one of the following actions:
1. Resubmittal not required - The review indicates that the submittal is in general conformance with
the design concept and complies with the drawings and specifications. The Contractor may begin
to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal.
2. Make corrections noted - The review indicates limited corrections are required as marked on the
submittal. The Contractor may begin implementing the work method or incorporating the material
and equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections. Where
submittal information will be incorporated in O&M data, a corrected copy shall be provided.
3. Revise & resubmit - The review reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect
data, or indicates that the material, equipment or work method is not in general conformance with
the design concept or in compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall
not undertake work covered by such submittals until a new submittal is submitted.
4. Rejected - The submittal was not accepted or reviewed.
C. Engineer's review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors,
omissions, deviations, or responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.
1.9 RESUBMITTALS
A. Resubmittals shall be made within 30 days of the date of the review letter returning the material to be
modified or corrected, unless within 14 days Contractor submits a request for an extension of the
resubmittal time, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that time, and are
approved by the Engineer.
B. Contractor shall request an amendment to the Contract Documents, if the Contractor considers
any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a change to the Contract Documents.
C. Resubmittals will be reviewed and returned in the same 14 day review period. It is considered
reasonable that the Contractor shall make a complete and acceptable submittal by the second
submission of a submittal item. Contractor shall verify that all exceptions previously noted by
Engineer have been taken into account.
D. Resubmittals shall have the original submittal number for that item followed by an alphabetic suffix.
For example, if Submittal 33000-2 requires a resubmittal, the first resubmittal number will bear the
designation "33000-2A" and the second resubmittal number will bear the designation "33000-213".
E. Resubmittals shall identify what revisions were made.
F. The need for more than one resubmittal, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of
submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extensions of Contract Times unless the delay of the Work is
the direct result of failure of Engineer to review and return any submittal to Contractor within the
specified review period. Additionally, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for
review of the additional resubmissions. Monies due to the Contractor may be withheld to cover
additional costs of any review beyond the second submittal.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3

1.10 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout, and according
to Section 017800.
1. Project record documents
2. Operation and maintenance data
3. Warranties
4. Bonds
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4

SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section Includes:
1. Temporary Utilities: Water, sanitary facilities, electrical power, heating, lighting, ventilation.
2. Temporary Controls: Site security, material storage, dust control, water control, noise control,
safety, and fire danger.
3. Construction Controls: Traffic Regulation, access roads and parking areas.
4. Construction Facilities: Temporary field office, inspection hoist, and project sign.
1.2 ELECTRICAL POWER
A. Provide for the purchase of power or provide portable power for the construction of the project where
existing outlets are not available. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection. Provide
for the extension of utility lines to the point of usage. The cost of power shall be included in the
appropriate bid items to which it is appurtenant and shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, and equipment required to obtain and distribute power for construction
purposes.
B. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes. Provide
flexible power cords as required for construction operations.
C. Existing receptacles may be utilized during construction.
1.3 TEMPORARY BUILDING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
A. HEATING
1. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for
construction operations.
2. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation
is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in place. Provide and pay for
operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
B. LIGHTING
1. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2
watt/sq. ft.
2. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails,
and lamps as required.
3. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
4. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
C. VENTILATION
1. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION WATER
A. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for developing water sources and supply labor and
equipment to collect, load, transport, and apply water as necessary for compaction of materials,
concrete construction operations; testing; dust control; and other construction use.
B. Obtain water from private sources. Payment for costs connected with utilization of the source shall
be made by the Contractor. Water shall be clean and free from objectionable deleterious amounts
of acids, alkalines, salts, or organic materials.
C. Include the cost of construction water in the appropriate bid item to which it is appurtenant. The
cost shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment and
doing all the work necessary to develop a sufficient water supply and furnishing the necessary
equipment for applying the water as described in these specifications.
D. Coordinate the use of water for any construction related purpose with the water utility and Engineer.
Provide 24-hour notice prior to withdrawing water from any source.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

1.5 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fixed or portable chemical sanitary toilet facilities on
the job site and conform to local health codes which govern in the project area. Toilets at construction
job sites shall conform to the requirements of Part 1926 of the OSHA Standards for Construction.
B. The Contractor shall always maintain the sanitary facilities in a satisfactory and sanitary condition
and shall enforce their use. He shall rigorously prohibit the committing of nuisances on the site of the
Work, on the lands of the Owner, or an adjacent property.
C. Contractor's use of Owner's facilities will not be allowed.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION SITE SECURITY
A. The Owner is not responsible for the security of the site or structures.
B. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.7 MATERIAL STORAGE
A. Storing and Protecting Materials
1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate -controlled enclosures.
2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
3. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
avoid condensation.
4. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with
foreign matter.
B. Storage Areas
1. Generally, storage areas shall be provided within the designated staging area. The staging area
is general and does not indicate limits of construction. Responsibility for protection and
safekeeping of equipment and materials at or near the sites will be solely that of the Contractor
and no claim shall be made against the Owner by reasons of any act of an employee or
trespasser. Should an occasion arise necessitating access to an area occupied by stored
equipment and/or materials, the Contractor shall immediately move them. No equipment or
materials shall be placed upon the Owner's property until it is acceptable to the Owner
2. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection.
3. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
4. Upon completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the storage areas all of their
equipment, temporary fencing, surplus materials, rubbish, and restore the areas.
1.8 DUST CONTROL
A. Perform dust control operations to prevent construction operations from producing dust in amounts
harmful to persons or causing a nuisance to persons living nearby or occupying buildings in the vicinity
of the work. Use water or dust preventative to control dust. May be tied to SWPPP requirements.
1.9 WATER CONTROL
A. Work to be performed may require draining, pumping, dewatering, and certain cleaning operations
necessary to complete the work as specified and as indicated on the drawings. It is the intent of these
specifications that such draining, pumping, dewatering, and cleaning operations shall be the obligation
of the Contractor
B. Make provisions for maintaining proper drainage of the work area. Preserve and maintain natural
drainage patterns. Remedy situations which could cause excessive erosion including the use of
drainage checks or water bars on slopes subject to erosion.
1.10 NOISE CONTROL
A. Maintain equipment, particularly muffling systems on internal combustion engines, so that acceptable
noise levels are not exceeded. If on -site generators are used, locate it in area where the sound will be
least offensive.
B. Provide sound barriers as shown on the drawings.
1.11 SAFETY
A. The Contractor shall alone be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of the plant,
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2

appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper
construction, maintenance or operation.
B. Contractor shall have a man available 24 hours a day who can be contacted at any time in case of an
emergency caused by the construction operations. Name, address, and telephone number of this
person shall be filed with the Owner.
C. All open trenches and other excavations shall be provided with suitable barriers, signs, and lights to
the extent that adequate protection is provided to the public against accident by reason of such open
construction. All open trenches shall be backfilled or must be barricaded, at the end of each working
day.
D. All barricades, signs, warning lights and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in
conformance with applicable statutory requirements, and, where within highway right-of-way, as
required by the authority having jurisdiction.
E. Materials or equipment in or alongside public streets, roads and highways shall be so placed that the
work at all times shall be so conducted as to cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the
traveling public. These obstructions shall be provided with barricades, signs, warning lights and other
protective devices.
F. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) shall be provided to the Owner for all materials stored/used during
construction of the project.
1.12 FIRE DANGER
A. Minimize fire danger in the vicinity of and adjacent to the construction site. Provide labor and
equipment to protect the surrounding private property from fire damage resulting from construction
operations.
B. All fire hydrants and water control valves shall be kept free from obstruction and available for use at all
times.
1.13 INSPECTION AIDS
A. Contractor shall provide power driven equipment for hoisting Owner's representative for inspection
purposes.
1.14 TRAFFIC REGULATION
A. Contractor shall maintain traffic and protect the public from all damage to persons and property within
the contract limits, in accordance with all applicable state, local, and city regulations. The Contractor
shall conduct its operations so as to maintain and protect access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic to
and from all properties and business establishments adjoining or adjacent to those streets affected by
its operations, and to subject the public to a minimum of delay and inconvenience. Suitable signs,
barricades, railing, etc. shall be erected and the work outlined by adequate lighting at night. Danger
lights shall be provided as required. Watchmen and flagmen shall be provided as may be necessary
for the protection of traffic.
B. The Contractor shall notify the owner or occupant (if not owner -occupied) of the closure of the
driveways to be closed more than one eight -hour work day, at least three working days prior to the
closure. The Contractor shall minimize the inconvenience and minimize the time period that the
driveways will be closed. The Contractor shall fully explain to the owner/occupant how long the work
will take and when closure is to start.
1.15 PROJECT SIGN
A. A project sign is not required for this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3

SECTION 015713
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
B. Erosion Control Measures
C. Velocity and Flow Control Measures
D. Sediment Control Measures
E. Application/Installation of Measures
F. Removal/Replacement of Measures
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish all materials; install, construct, maintain, and remove specified erosion control devices; at
locations specified in the contract documents, or where specified by the Engineer.
B. Complete the required construction work on this project, while minimizing soil erosion and controlling
water pollution. Maintain these features as specified, from initial construction stages to final completion
of the project.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 013300.
B. Upon request, provide copies of all records and documentation related to compliance with the
SWPPP.
1.4 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS
A. Comply with the following:
1. Implement erosion and sediment control measures at the appropriate time(s).
2. Coordinate construction to minimize damage to erosion and sediment control devices.
1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Protection of Property: Prevent accumulation of soil, sediment, or debris from project site onto
adjoining public or private property. Remove any accumulation of soil or debris immediately and take
remedial actions for prevention.
B. Permit Compliance: When applicable, conduct all operations in compliance with the SWPPP. Labor,
equipment, or materials not included as a bid item, but necessary to prevent stormwater
contamination from construction related sources, are considered incidental. Incidental work related
to compliance with the permit may include, but is not limited to: hazardous materials protection, fuel
containment, waste disposal, and providing employee sanitary facilities.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
015713 - 1

C. Project Staging: Replacing erosion and sediment control practices that are damaged or removed
by the contractor in a manner that is inconsistent with the current project staging or SWPPP is the
Contractor's responsibility and will be at the Contractor's expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS — NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SWPPP PREPARTION
A. Prepare a SWPPP according to the requirements of the State.
B. Have the SWPPP prepared by an individual experienced in erosion and sediment control.
C. Ensure that controls utilized in the SWPPP conform to the type and quantity of erosion and sediment
controls required.
D. Submit the completed SWPPP to the Engineer for review and approval prior to filing.
E. Upon approval of the Engineer, submit and pay fee as appropriate.
3.2 SWPPP MANAGEMENT
A. Update the SWPPP according to the requirements of the State.
B. Revise the SWPPP and implement changes, as necessary, to prevent sediment or hazardous
materials from being transported off the site.
C. Submit all SWPPP revisions to the Engineer for review and approval.
D. Perform and maintain records of erosion and sediment control site inspections, unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents.
E. Retain all records on -site.
F. Provide all records and documentation to the Engineer upon completion of the project.
3.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL INSPECTION
A. Perform inspections following rainfall events more than inch.
B. Notify the Engineer immediately of situations requiring attention beyond that provided for in the
contract documents.
C. Provide copies of the inspection reports to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
015713 - 2

SECTION 016400
OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section generally describes the logistical aspects of equipment and materials that will be
furnished by the Owner for each project.
1.2 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall include in his Contract price or prices all costs in connection with handling,
storing, protecting, and installing materials, supplies, or equipment furnished by the Owner and shall
make good all losses and breakage due to carelessness or negligence while same are in his
possession. The obligations of the Contractor under this section shall not extend to defective materials
or equipment supplied by the Owner, and the Owner will reimburse the Contractor for Contractor's
cost, for work in relation to defective material supplied by the Owner.
B. Equipment and material furnished by Owner will include:
Stainless steel tank with diffused air mixing, liquid level sensor,
sampling platform and lighting.
2. Blowers (BLWR-201), blower enclosures if applicable, blower control
panel with motor starters (New MD, New DP), check valve, and
pressure relief valve shipped loose for contractor installation (see
Plans and Section 460529).
3. Yard piping for water and air supply (see Plans and Sections
402076 and 402091).
4. Butterfly valves (see Section 400566.
5. Diffusers (see Section 465103)
C. A copy of the approved shop drawings and installation requirements for the
Owner furnished equipment will be made available to the Contractor.
D. A copy of the specifications, purchase order and manufacturer's information for Owner furnished
equipment will be made available to the Contractor.
1.3 DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT
A. The Owner will provide furnished equipment to the project site. The Contractor shall provide a crane or
lull and labor to unload the Owner furnished equipment.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall review specifications, manufacturer's information, approved shop drawings and
installation requirements for the Owner furnished equipment.
B. Contractor shall carefully examine each shipment of Owner furnished equipment or material upon
arrival. Defective items shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Upon inspection and
acceptance by the Contractor, the Contractor shall assume custody, and provide insurance for and be
responsible for the Owner furnished equipment and materials from the point of delivery on. The Owner
furnished equipment and materials shall be properly handled to prevent damage. The Owner will not
accept title to the equipment until the project is substantially complete.
C. Damaged or misplaced Owner furnished items shall be replaced by the Contractor. Replacements
shall conform to the original equipment specifications.
D. Contractor to install all equipment and materials, Owner furnished and otherwise.
1.5 OWNER -FURNISHED TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
A. Field service representatives from manufacturers for Owner furnished equipment will be provided in
accordance with the purchase orders, specifications, and agreements with the Owner furnished
equipment suppliers. Contractor will be responsible for coordinating with manufacturer's
representative for providing necessary services.
OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS 016400 - 1

B. The Owner -furnished equipment manufacturers will provide technical services at no cost to the
Contractor, as detailed in the agreements between Owner and the manufacturers.
C. If the Contractor requires additional time from manufacturer representatives for installation
supervision or assistance, installation review, instrumentation calibration, or other field services
beyond what is detailed in the agreements between the Owner and the manufacturers, the
Contractor shall include these costs in their bid. No additional charges by manufacturers will be
paid by Owner for manufacturer's services.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS 016400 - 2

SECTION 017000
EXECUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes lands and rights -of -way, underground utility locations, construction layout and
staking, methods of operation, salvage of materials and equipment, and cutting and patching.
1.2 MOBILIZATION AND NOTIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner seven working days in advance of startup of
construction operations, addition of work crews, or major increase in work force.
1.3 UNDERGROUND UTILITY LOCATIONS
A. Utility locations are generally not shown on the Drawings. If shown, the locations of the utilities
depicted on the Contract Drawings are not to be considered exact. The approximate utility locations,
where shown, were derived from data obtained from generalized large-scale utility company supplied
drawings or from prior facility construction drawings. The actual location of existing utilities is the sole
responsibility of the Contractor. Those shown on the plans are given to call particular attention to areas
of special concern.
B. The Contractor shall make his own investigations including exploratory excavations as needed to
determine the locations and type of existing utilities to be encountered. Any work associated with
crossing or paralleling a particular utility shall be subsidiary to the work as stipulated in General
Conditions.
C. The utilities anticipated to be affected, if any, by this Project are indicated on the Contract drawings.
The utilities shown are not intended to be a complete or all-inclusive. Other utilities may exist in the
Project area and may not be shown. The Contractor shall be responsible for contacting all affected
utilities; municipalities, local, County, State, and Federal entities whether or not they are shown or
listed.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate all work which parallels, crosses, or is in the vicinity of a given utility
with the Owner of that utility. The Contractor shall notify all utilities and underground service agencies
in advance of work scheduled or envisioned and arrange to have their respective services located.
Upon exposing a utility or underground service, the respective service agency shall be contacted by
the Contractor, such that an inspection of the service can be made by the utility (if desired) prior to
backfilling. The Contractor shall obtain acceptance, in writing, from the utility regarding the
preservation of their respective service during construction.
E. Should any facility, either underground or overhead, be unexpectedly encountered or damaged during
construction, the Contractor shall immediately notify a representative of the company involved and
take such steps as necessary for protection of the general public and his own personnel.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT AND STAKING
A. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on
the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Elevation of existing ground, structures and
appurtenances are believed to be reasonably correct, but are not guaranteed to be absolute and
therefore are presented only as an approximation. Any error or apparent discrepancy in the data
shown or omissions of data required for accurately accomplishing the stakeout survey shall be
referred immediately to the Engineer for interpretation or correction.
EXECUTION 017000 - 1

B. The Owner will establish reference points for construction, which in the judgment of the
Engineer are necessary to enable the Contractor to proceed with the Work. The
reference points shall be basic horizontal and vertical control points in the project area.
Preserve these points and transfer from them distances and elevations necessary for the
execution of the structural and piping work. These points shall be used as datum for work
under this contract.
C. The Contractor will furnish construction staking to execute the work as described below.
The Contractor shall provide an experienced instrument man, competent assistants, and
such instruments, tools, stakes, and other materials required to complete the survey,
layout, and measurement work.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible to preserve benchmarks, reference points, stakes,
property pins, and all other survey location items. In case of destruction by the
Contractor or resulting from his negligence, he shall be held liable for any expense and
damage and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused by the
unnecessary loss or disturbance of such benchmarks, reference points and stakes.
1.5 LAYOUT MODIFICATIONS
A. Should the Contractor desire a revision in the designated alignment or location he
shall make said request to the Owner's Representative. The decision of the Owner's
Representative is final.
B. Alignment changes may be proposed and staked by Contractor for review in field by
the Owner's Representative and/or Owner. Contractor may propose differences or
deviations of the work to avoid disturbances, surface obstructions, easement
changes. Reroutes may be authorized by the Owner or Owner's Representative
based on staked field conditions. Alignment changes agreed upon by Owner or
Owner's representative shall be recorded by the Contractor on the Record
Drawings. Field Orders will be issued by the Owner's Representative to document
significant changes in alignment.
C. Adjustment for actual quantities installed for the pipeline and appurtenances, if different
from the drawings, will be paid for in accordance with Contract Documents.
1.6 OWNER'S CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE AT PROJECT SITE
A. The Owner may appoint or employ a person(s) to work as the Construction
Representative on the project. The Owner's Representative shall represent the Owner as
specifically set forth in the Contract and shall observe the work performed under this
Contract to the end that such work is performed in substantial accordance with the
drawings and specifications. Such observation shall in no way remove any obligations on
the part of the Contractor to provide all required supervision and quality control necessary
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract.
B. If the Owner's Representative observes departures from the drawings and specifications,
the Owner's Representative will call them to the attention of the Contractor, who shall
promptly correct the unsatisfactory conditions. If the Contractor believes there has been
no departure from the drawings and specifications, the Contractor may make written
appeal.
C. The presence or absence of the Owner's Representative, or the failure of the Owner's
Representative to detect faulty work shall in no way relieve the Contractor from their
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
D. The Owner's Representative shall have no authority to permit any deviation from the
drawings and specifications, except on written Change Order or Field Order as
applicable. The Contractor will be liable for any deviation, except on such written order.
1.7 METHODS OF OPERATION
A. The Contractor shall inform the Owner in advance concerning his plans for carrying on
EXECUTION 017000 - 2

each part of the work, but the Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety,
adequacy, and efficiency of his plant, equipment, and methods.
B. Any method of work suggested by the Owner or Engineer, but not specified, shall be
used at the risk and responsibility of the Contractor; and the Engineer and Owner will
assume no responsibility therefor.
C. Review by the Owner or Engineer of any plan or method of work proposed by the
Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility therefor, and such review
shall not be considered as an assumption of any risk or liability by the Owner or Engineer,
or any officer, agent, or employee thereof. The Contractor shall have no claim because of
the failure or inefficiency of any plan or method so reviewed.
D. The Owner and the Engineer will not be responsible for any act or omission of the
Contractor, or any subcontractor, or any of their agents or employees, or any other
persons performing any of the work. The Owner and Engineer will not be responsible for
any failure of the Contractor or his subcontractors or any other persons to perform the
work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.8 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
A. During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable construction conditions,
Contractor shall confine his operations to work which will not be affected adversely by
such conditions. No work shall be constructed under conditions that would adversely
affect the quality unless the Contractor takes special precautions to perform the work in
a proper and satisfactory manner.
1.9 OBSTRUCTIONS
A. Any street signs, traffic signs, posts, mailboxes, guard fence, standards, yard lights or
other similar obstructions shall be removed, properly stored and reset or salvaged to the
Owner as directed by the Engineer.
B. Trees and shrubs that are encountered in the vicinity of the proposed facilities shall be
removed only if deemed necessary by the Engineer.
C. Existing fences (including chain link fences) interfering with the construction operations
shall be maintained by the Contractor until completion of the work affected thereby,
unless written permission is obtained from the owner to leave an interfering fence
dismantled for any agreed period of time. On completion of the work the Contractor shall
restore all fences to their original or to a better condition and to their original location or
as shown on the plans
D. All property pins, section corners or other monuments moved and/or destroyed by the
Contractor's operations shall be replaced and reset. Replacement and resetting shall
be done by a professional Engineer or Surveyor paid by the Contractor at no additional
cost to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
EXECUTION 017000 - 3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXECUTION 017000 - 4

SECTION 017800
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes closeout submittals, operation and maintenance data, warranties, spare parts
and maintenance materials, and project records.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected,
and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's review. A
partial list of such items appears below, but it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to submit any
other items that are required in the Contract Documents:
1. Written test results of project components, where required.
2. Performance affidavits for equipment, where required.
3. Certificates of inspection and acceptance by local governing agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Keys, padlocks, and other items not considered spare parts or maintenance materials.
5. Clearances of all property owners for work requiring site restoration caused by Contractor's
operations.
B. Provide final submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted quantities, and final change order if
required.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11-inch text pages, three ring binders with metal hinges.
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of
project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described
below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description
identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1. Section 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Section 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by specification section. For each
category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors, suppliers and
manufacturers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Section 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Air and water balance reports.
b. Certificates.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 017800 - 1

c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 30 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed
and returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as
required prior to final submission.
F. Submit the required number of sets of revised final volumes within 30 days after receipt of
Engineer's comments.
1.4 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
C. Contractor shall furnish an inventory listing of all spare parts for each piece of equipment using the
form included at the end of this section, or similar form.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Provide notarized copies of all warranties.
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three ring binder similar to O&M manuals.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within
10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.6 PROJECT RECORDS
A. Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual
Products installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
B. Drawings: Contractor shall legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced
to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 017800 - 2

SECTION 024100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The removal and or reuse, salvage and disposal of materials and equipment necessary for the work to
be performed as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Existing buildings, structures, boxes, pipes, pavements, curbs, and other items are to be removed,
altered, salvaged, and disposed of as specified herein or indicated in the drawings.
C. Equipment, material, and piping, except as specified to be salvaged for the Owner, or removed by
others, within the limits of the demolition, excavations, and backfills, will become the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed from the project site. The salvage value of this equipment, materials,
and piping shall be reflected in the contract price.
1.2 PROCEDURES
A. Procedures to be used for the removal of all types of materials shall provide for careful removal and
disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which is to remain undisturbed,
coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection of utility services. Existing property
which is damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be repaired or replaced in kind by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall notify the Owner and other proper authorities concerned not less
than seven days before starting work in any area. They shall furnish all necessary information as to the
nature and extent of the work and shall obtain their cooperation and instructions in locating and
protecting all underground pipes, cables, and other utilities. All utility line locations shown on the
Drawings are approximate.
C. Perform the work in a manner that will not damage parts of the structure not intended to be removed
or to be salvaged for the Owner. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the method of
demolition used may endanger or damage parts of the structure or affect the satisfactory operation of
the facilities, promptly change the method when so notified by the Owner's Representative.
D. Explosives: The use of explosives will not be permitted.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section 013300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable items. Include
proposed method of demolition and provisions for erosion, dust, and noise control.
C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface
obstructions. Indicate what fill materials were used in backfilling. Information is to be recorded in
drawing form.
D. Salvaged Material Data: Submit description of all savaged materials, inspection data, and parts lists.
DEMOLITION 024100 - 1

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials noted to be removed and not relocated, salvaged, or reused in the project shall be removed
from the construction site and disposed of by the Contractor. Salvaged materials shall be delivered to
an area designated by the Engineer or Owner.
B. Do not reuse material salvaged from demolition work on this project, except as specifically shown or
specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. During removal operations all persons and property shall be protected from injury or damage. The
work shall proceed in a manner that will minimize the generation and spread of dust, flying particles
and objectionable odors.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Before beginning any cutting or demolition work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing
structures and examine the Drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the proposed
construction activities. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to insure against damage
to existing work to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Owner, and any
damage to such work shall be repaired or replaced as approved by the Engineer at no additional cost
to the Owner. Repairing shall mean the restoration of a surface or item to a condition as near as
practicable to match the existing adjoining surfaces unless otherwise noted, detailed, or specified.
When repairing involves painting, special coatings, vinyl fabric, or other applied finish, refinish the
entire surface plane (i.e., wall or ceiling), unless complete refinishing of the entire space is scheduled
or specified. Repairing includes cleaning of soiled surfaces.
B. Erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices, including warning signs and lights, and
similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor's employees, and existing
improvements to remain. Method and materials of the partitions including adequate bracing shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review.
C. Provide temporary weather protection, where required.
D. Mark location of utilities.
3.3 DISPOSITION BY CLASSIFICATION
A. Disposition of materials and equipment shall be indicated on the plans by the following designations:
1. Reinstall: Material or equipment to be reinstalled into the work shall be carefully removed from
the existing location, shall be cleaned, and otherwise readied for reuse, and shall be protected
from damage. Such items shall be reinstalled in accordance with applicable sections of these
specifications covering new items of similar categories.
2. Salvage: Materials and equipment to be salvaged shall be carefully removed, cleaned and
delivered to a location on Owner's premises as designated by the Engineer or Owner. Final
list of items to be salvaged is subject to the Owner's review.
3. Remove: Materials and equipment to be removed shall be considered scrap and shall be
disposed of by the Contractor. Removed concrete shall be disposed of off -site unless otherwise
directed by the Owner or his representative. Final list of items to be scrapped is subject to the
Owner's review.
4. Abandon: Materials and equipment to be abandoned in place shall be properly taken out of
service according to the methods identified in the project specifications.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. Debris and rubbish: Remove debris and rubbish from the site daily.
DEMOLITION 024100 - 2

B. Debris Control: Remove and transport debris in a manner as to prevent spillage on streets or adjacent
areas.
C. Regulations: Local regulations regarding hauling and disposal apply.
3.5 REMOVALS -GENERAL
A. All mechanical and electrical materials indicated to be salvaged shall be removed prior to initiating the
scrapping/removal of the existing structure or facility.
B. All removed structural steel, supports, grating, etc. shall be scrapped unless otherwise noted on the
Drawings.
C. Structures, Walls, and Partitions: Structure and finish shall be removed to the minimum required to
remove and install piping. The Contractor shall limit the size of openings for removal. At locations
where pipes are removed and not reinstalled, the openings or holes shall be completely filled in to
match the surrounding area. At locations where pipes are removed and reinstalled, the openings or
holes shall be filled in as shown on the Drawings or specified.
D. Remove all reinforcement, anchor bolts, and other protruding elements that can cause a safety
hazard.
E. All sanitary sewer lines to be abandoned in place shall be pressure filled with flowable concrete fill as
specified in the section entitled "Cast in Place Concrete" unless otherwise shown.
F. Exposed pipes to be abandoned may be plugged at the ends in lieu of being completely removed.
G. Underground structures to be abandoned in place shall be filled with concrete or flowable concrete fill
to a depth not less than the crown elevation of the uppermost connecting sewer line. The remaining
volume of the structures shall be filled with flowable concrete fill or granular fill compacted 90%
standard Proctor density.
3.6 REMOVALS - ASBESTOS PIPE
A. Removal procedures shall be in accordance with current federal and state regulations. Testing of
material may be required unless the material has been classified.
END OF SECTION
DEMOLITION 024100 - 3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
DEMOLITION 024100 - 4

SECTION 030510
LEAKAGE TESTING OF HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the method of testing stainless steel hydraulic structures for leakage.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Precast Concrete Utility Structures: 330516.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PROVIDE WATER, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT TO TEST STRUCTURES FOR LEAKAGE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Hydrostatically test any basin which will contain water to determine that it is free of detectable leaks.
Do not start leak testing until cast -in -place concrete has achieved its full 28-day compressive strength
and joint sealants have set and cured a minimum of 14 days. Basins to be tested shall be in their final
condition will all structural supporting members (slabs, beams, etc.) in place.
B. Prior to testing, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces, removing loose matter from walls and slabs.
3.2 LEAKAGE TEST PROCEDURE
A. Fill hydraulic structures to be subjected to leakage tests with water to the maximum operating liquid
level line. Filling shall not exceed 6 feet of water depth per 24-hour period. Filling shall be at a uniform
rate over a 24-hour period with continuous monitoring. Repair any running leaks which appear during
filling before continuing.
B. Seed the floor slab of each hydraulic structure with one bag of cement per 1,000-square-foot surface
area. Seeding shall take place after the test filling has reached 18 inches in depth. Detect leaks in
construction and expansion joints with the aid of a diver. Stir cementitious deposits on the floor.
Observe cement deposits flowing toward leaks and repair where the defect is located.
C. After the structure has been kept full for 48 hours, it will be assumed for the purposes of the test that
the absorption of moisture by the concrete floor in the structure is complete. Close all valves and gates
to the structure and measure the change in water surface each day for a five-day period.
D. During the test period, examine exposed portions of the structure, and mark visible leaks or damp
spots. Repair visible leaks or damp spots after dewatering. If the drop in water surface in a 24-hour
period exceeds 1/10 of 1% of the average volume of liquid contained in the structure, the leakage
shall be considered excessive.
E. If the leakage is excessive, drain the structure, repair leaks and damp spots, and refill the structure
and again test for leakage. Continue this process until leaks have been repaired.
F. Inspect the manholes of the underdrain system for evidence of leaks in floor slabs. If leaking is
indicated, locate and repair.
G. Repair visible leaks and damp spots whether leakage exceeds the allowable leakage or not. Repair
leaks and damp spots with the same procedure that would otherwise be used to repair leakage in the
event that the leakage test fails.
H. Repairs and additional filling and testing (including the cost of water) shall be made by the Contractor
at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.3 REPAIR METHODS
A. Methods for repairing concrete not passing the leakage test and that for repairs of leaks and damp
spots shall be as described in Section 033000.
END OF SECTION
LEAKAGE TESTING OF HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
030510 - 1

SECTION 033000
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1. Footings.
2. Foundation walls.
3. Slabs -on -grade.
4. Suspended slabs.
5. Concrete toppings.
6. Building frame members.
7. Building and basin walls.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following:
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and
silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. The proposed mix designs shall be submitted by the
contractor for review to the engineer of record. Mix design is the responsibility of the Contractor
subject to the limitations of the Specifications. Review processing of this submission will be required
only as evidence that the mix has been designed by qualified persons and that the minimum
requirements of the Specifications have been met. Such review will in no way alter the responsibility of
the Contractor to furnish concrete meeting the requirements of the Specifications relative to all criteria
listed in the specification. Concrete mix design quantities and test results shall be submitted for review
and shall be accepted before concrete work is started. Reports covering the source, quality, and
proportions of the concrete materials used in the design mix should include the following information:
C. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test
results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar
arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for
concrete reinforcement.
E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring
removal, and reshoring installation and removal.
F. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.
1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and samples in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form -release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

6.
Waterstops.
7.
Curing compounds.
8.
Floor and slab treatments.
9.
Bonding agents.
10.
Adhesives.
11.
Vapor retarders.
12.
Semirigid joint filler.
13.
Joint -filler strips.
14.
Repair materials.
C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with
requirements:
1. Aggregates. Provide certificates that aggregate comply with ASTM C 33. State weathering region
limits of coarse aggregates: severe, moderate, or negligible. State basis of determining that alkali
reactivity potential is negligible. Identify certifications and tests to actual materials to be used in
the work. Provide additional tests and certifications for each change in material source. Provide
an alternate materials source of aggregate if tests indicate that aggregates are reactive or
possess severe weathering potential. Submit gradation analysis for fine and course aggregate
with concrete mix designs. If deleterious substances are present, state the amount.
D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.
E. Field quality -control reports.
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified
Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork
Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and
that complies with ASTM C 1602 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production
Facilities."
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field -Testing Technician,
Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory
supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the
same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single
source from single manufacturer.
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding
Code - Reinforcing Steel."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7,
"Lightweight Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
3. ACI 318, "Building Code requirements for Structural Concrete"
4. ACI 350, "Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures"
G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
H. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete
1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete shall be according to the
requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 "Concrete Quality, Mixing, and Placing", and as specified
herein.
2. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall be taken to
increase the compressive strength for all subsequent batches of the type of concrete affected.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2

3. All concrete which fails to meet ACI requirements and these specifications, is subject to removal
and replacement at the cost of the Contractor.
I. In the event tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified requirements, the Engineer
may permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores drilled from the related part
of the structure in accordance with ASTM C 42 and C 39. All costs associated with the failure to meet
the specification requirements, including this type of testing and removal and replacement shall be
borne by the Contractor.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth
concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as
follows:
a. High -density overlay, Class 1 or better.
b. Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass -fiber -reinforced plastic, paper,
or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified
formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads
without detrimental deformation.
D. Pan -Type Forms: Glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete
loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to
support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4-inch, minimum.
G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
H. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials.
I. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable, or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete
surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.
4. Form ties for liquid retaining walls and walls below grade shall be provided with water stop
washers located on the permanently embedded portions of the ties at the approximate center of
the wall.
5. Bolts and rods that are to be completely withdrawn shall be coated with a nonstaining bond
breaker.
6. The Contractor shall be responsible for the water tightness of the form ties and any repairs
needed.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content of Steel Product may be utilized at proportions approved by Engineer.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
C. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, deformed
D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars,
assembled with clips.
E. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
F. Deformed -Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
G. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into
flat sheets.
H. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and
free of burrs.
B. Epoxy -Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, ASTM A 775 epoxy coated.
C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775.
D. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc -based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc.
E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire,
plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI
Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports.
F. Bar Couplers: Reinforcing steel bar splicing couplers shall be a mechanical type as manufactured by
Dayton Barsplice Inc., or equal. Use couplers which develop 125% of the specified yield strength of
the reinforcing bars. Make field demonstrations and sample splicing prior to splicing bars being
included into the work.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; gray.
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
b. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
c. The Portland cement shall contain not more than 0.60% alkalies. The term "alkalies"
referred to herein is defined as the sum of the percentage of sodium oxide and 0.658 times
the percentage of potassium oxide (Na20 + 0.658 K20). These oxides shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM C 114.
d. The Portland cement shall contain not more than 8% tricalcium aluminate.
e. A single brand of cement shall be used throughout the Work, and prior to its use, the brand
shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
f. The cement shall be suitably protected from exposure to moisture until used. Cement that
has become lumpy shall not be used. Sacked cement shall be stored in such a manner so
as to permit access for inspection and sampling.
g. Certified mill test reports for each shipment of cement to be used shall be submitted to the
Engineer if requested regarding compliance with these Specifications.
h. Fly ash shall have a carbon content of less than 4% as measured by the loss on ignition.
75% of the fly ash shall have a fineness of 45 microns or less.
B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S; coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source.
1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
2. Coarse aggregates shall consist of well -graded, clean, hard, durable gravel, crushed gravel,
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4

crushed rock or a combination thereof. Coarse aggregates shall not contain any materials that
are reactive with the alkalis in the cement when exposed to moisture. Where aggregate reactivity
has not been established or tested, low -alkali cement shall be used.
3. Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or a combination of natural and manufactured sand that
are hard and durable.
4. Combined aggregates shall be well graded from coarse to fine sizes, and shall be uniformly
graded between screen sizes to produce a concrete that has optimum workability and
consolidation characteristics. Where a trial batch is required for a mix design, the final combined
aggregate gradations will be established during the trail batch process
5. When tested in accordance with "Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method)" (ASTM
C 289), the ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity shall not exceed 1.0.
6. When tested in accordance with "Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete" (ASTM C 40), the
fine aggregate shall produce a color in the supernatant liquid no darker than the reference
standard color solution.
7. When tested in accordance with "Resistance to Abrasion of Small size Coarse Aggregate by Use
of the Los Angeles Machine (ASTM C 131), the coarse aggregate shall show a loss not
exceeding 42% after 500 revolutions, or 10.5% after 100 revolutions.
8. When tested in accordance with "Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate" (ASTM C 88), the loss resulting after five cycles shall not exceed 15% for
fine or coarse aggregate when using sodium sulfate.
D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 1-inch; nominal maximum aggregate size.
E. Water: ASTM C 1602.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Concrete used for liquid containing or retaining structures such as tanks, basins or other liquid
retaining or holding structures shall include a crystalline waterproofing admixture such as that
manufactured by Xypex Chemical Corp. Such admixture is to be provided for all elements of such
liquid containing or retaining structures including top slabs and beams for closed tanks or basins.
Equal admixtures from any other manufacturer are acceptable. Mix designs containing flyash shall use
Xypex Admix C-500 or equal. Mix design without fly ash shall use Xypex Admix C-1000 or equal.
Follow all manufacturer recommendations including dosage rates.
C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: Use where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be
consistently over 80' F. ASTM C 494, Type B.
3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. High -Range, Water -Reducing
and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.
a. If the high range water reducing agent is added to the concrete at the batch plant, it shall be
second generation type, W.R. Grace & Co. Daracem 100; BASF Pozzolith 430R, or equal.
High range water reducer shall be added to the concrete after all other ingredients have
been mixed and initial slump has been verified.
b. If the high range water reducer is added to the concrete at the job site, it shall be used in
conjunction with a low range water reducer and shall be BASF Pozzolith 400N and
Pozzolith MBL82, W.R. Grace & Co. WRDA 19 and WRDA 79, or equal. Concrete shall
have a slump of 3 inches ± 1/2 inch prior to adding the high range water reducing
admixture at the job site. The high range water reducing admixture shall be accurately
measured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced
technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each days operation of
the job site system.
c. Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 30 mixer revolutions after the
addition of the high range water reducer.
5. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.
D. Set -Accelerating Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Use where the air temperature at the time of
placement is expected to be consistently under 40' F. Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5

mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride
reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494, Type C.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; ARRMATECT.
d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.
E. Non -Set -Accelerating Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non -set -accelerating,
anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and
minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+.
b. Cortec Corporation; MCI-2000.
c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S.
d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901
F. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water -reducing admixtures;
color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ChemMasters.
b. Davis Colors.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation.
d. Hoover Color Corporation.
e. Lambert Corporation.
f. QC Construction Products.
g. Rockwood Pigments NA, Inc.
h. Scofield, L. M. Company.
i. Solomon Colors, Inc.
2. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Carbon -Steel Fiber: ASTM A 820, deformed, minimum of 1.5 inches long, and aspect ratio of 35 to 40.
1. Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fiber:
Type 1, Cold -Drawn Wire:
1)
Bekaert; Dramix.
2)
Fibercon International, Inc.; Fibercon Drawn Wire.
3)
Nycon, Inc.; Nycon SF Type I.
4)
Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Novocon 1050.
5)
Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber SH.
b. Fiber:
Type 2, Cut Sheet:
1)
Bekaert; Wiremix.
2)
Fibercon International, Inc.; Fibercon Cut Sheet.
3)
Nycon, Inc.; Nycon SF Type II.
2. Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Monofilament
Micro -Fibers:
1)
Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Fibrasol II P.
2)
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 100.
3)
FORTA Corporation; FORTA Econo-Mono.
4)
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace MicroFiber.
5)
Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000.
6)
Nycon, Inc.; ProConM.
7)
Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 150.
8)
Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber PPM.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6

b. Fibrillated Micro -Fibers:
1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Fibrasol F.
2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand F.
3) FORTA Corporation; FORTA Econo-Net.
4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace Fibers.
5) Nycon, Inc.; ProConF.
6) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 300.
7) Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber PPF.
B. Synthetic Macro -Fiber: Polyolefin macro -fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete,
complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1 to 2-1/4 inches long.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. 3M; Scotchcast Polyolefin Fibers 1".
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Tuf-Strand SF.
c. FORTA Corporation; FORTA FERRO.
d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Strux 90/40.
e. Nycon, Inc.; XL.
f. Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 650.
g. Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber MS.
2.7 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory -installed metal eyelets, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,
intersections, and directional changes.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Greenstreak.
b. Williams Products, Inc.
2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.
3. Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick, nontapered.
B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, [with factory -installed metal eyelets,] for embedding in
concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and
directional changes.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BoMetals, Inc.
b. Greenstreak.
c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company.
d. Vinylex Corp.
2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.
3. Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick; nontapered.
C. Self -Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with
sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP.
b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX.
c. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231.
d. Greenstreak; Swellstop.
e. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro -Flex.
f. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20.
D. Self -Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free
hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal.
b. Greenstreak; Hydrotite.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7

c. Vinylex Corp.; Swellseal.
2.9 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor -Aid.
i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
I. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
r. Unitex; PRO -FILM.
s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz. / sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
nondissipating
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB.
c. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure & Seal 20.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB.
e. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal.
f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18).
g. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II.
h. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX; Clearseal WB 150.
i. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion.
j. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.
k. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.
I. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.
m. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure.
n. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E.
o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.
p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB.
q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309.
F. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV.
b. ChemMasters; Spray -Cure & Seal Plus.
c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8

d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV).
e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315.
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear; LusterSeal 300.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25.
h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30.
k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30.
I. Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30.
m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315.
2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.10 SEALANT
A. The joint sealant shall be a two-part, gray, nonstaining, nonsagging, polyurethane sealant, which cures
at ambient temperature to a firm, flexible, resilient, tear -resistant rubber.
B. Technical Requirements:
1.
Consistency
Gun grade
2.
Tack free time
72 hours maximum
3.
Pot life
1 to 3 hours
4.
Hardness
30 Shore A, +/-5
5.
Elongation
50%
6.
Tensile strength, ASTM D 412
200 psi
7.
Peel strength on concrete
No loss of bond with 50% +/- movement
8. Temperature service range
-40 F to +150 F
C. Backing Rod: Backing rod shall be an extruded closed -cell polyethulene foam road. The rod shall be
1/4 inch larger in diameter than the joint wideth. Where possible, provide full-length sections for the
joint; minimize splices. Apply backup rod and bond breaker tape in expansion joints.
D. Bond breaker tape shall be an adhesive -backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape, which will adhere to
the premolded joint material or concrete surface The tape shall be the same width as teh joint. The
tape shall be compatible with the sealant.
E. Expansion Joint Filler: Extruded closed -cell polyethalene foam equal in thickness to joint. Provide foam
with tear off strip where joint to receive sealant.
F. Pre -molded joint Filler: Joint filler shall be preformed, non -extruded type constructed of closed -
cell neoprene conforming to ASTM D 1752. Type 1, as manufactured by W.R. Grace Company
of Cambridge, Massachusetts; W. R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, Illinois; or equal.
2.11 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A
shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1. Types I and II, non -load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022 inch thick, galvanized -steel sheet. Temporarily fill or
cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab
anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
G. Nonepoxy bonding agent shall be Larsen Weldcrete, Euclid Euco Weld, or equal.
H. Nonshrink grout shall conform to ASTM C 1107 and shall be BASF Masterflow 713, Sika
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9

SikaGrout 212, or equal.
2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in
thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C
109.
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in
thicknesses from 1/4 inch (and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.
3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by
topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C
109.
2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs
based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume
as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less
than 40 percent:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
3. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland
cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
5. Silica Fume: 10 percent.
6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not
exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag, and Silica Fume: 50
percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10
percent.
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,
or other adverse placement conditions.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10

3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and
parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion -inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions
and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
F. Controlled Low Strength Material (Flowable Fill): Flowable fill shall be manufactured at plants that have
qualified as an approved source in accordance with the Standard Operating Procedure for Ready -Mix
Concrete
1. The Contractor shall submit mix design for flowable fill to the Engineer for approval. The following
table lists the suggested mix design for flowable fill:
COMPONENT
QUANTITY
CEMENT TYPE 1
75-150 LB/YD3
FLY ASH
150-600 LB/YD3
WATER
MIX DESIGN SHALL PRODUCE A CONSISTENCY THAT
WILL RESULT IN A FLOWABE, SELF -LEVELING PRODUCT
AT THE TIME OF PLACEMENT.
AIR
5%-15%
UNIT WEIGHT
100-125 LB/FT3
2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Footings, Foundation Walls: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 daysMaximum Water-Cementitious Materials
Ratio: 0.5
3. lump Limit: 5 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high -range
water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal
maximum aggregate size.
B. Slabs -on -Grade: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
6. Steel -Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, at a rate of 50 lb/cu. yd
C. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
6. Steel -Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, at a rate of 50 lb/cu. yd.
7. Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.
8. Synthetic Macro -Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate, but not less than 4.0 lb/cu. yd.
2.15 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.16 CONCRETE MIXING
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11

A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M
and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2
hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
B. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C
1602. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer.
1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more
than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1
cu. yd.
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water
added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support
such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces.
2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for
inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations
and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use
strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in
Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of
concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other
conditions.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not
support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for
24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form -
removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight
of concrete in place until concrete has achieved its 28-day design compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or
disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release
agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align
and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless
approved by Engineer.
3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Bar bending details and placing drawings shall conform to the "Manual of Standard Practice
for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" ACI 315 and with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"
for placing reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would
reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining
sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.Steel in walls,
unless otherwise shown, shall be continuous through the length of the various members.
G. Wire mesh reinforcements in slabs shall be continuous, shall have joints lapped at least one full
square + 2", and shall be supported as specified.
H. Welding of reinforcing bars is prohibited unless noted otherwise. When welding is approved, welding
shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4 "Welding Reinforcing Steel".
I. Provide corner bars of the same size and spacing as adjacent reinforcing.
J. Openings in walls or structural slabs shall be reinforced with minimum 245 bars on all sides or as
indicated in details. Extend reinforcing minimum 24" beyond the opening or as indicated.
K. All reinforcing bars are to be made continuous or lapped minimum 48 bar diameters or as indicated on
drawings.
L. Dowel Bar Substitution: Contractor has the option to replace any or all dowels indicated on the
drawings with a dowel bar substitution. Dowel bar substitution shall be of a size to match size of
dowels indicated for strength. Inserts shall be secured to the forms in a manner recommended by the
manufacturer. Bolts shall be provided with wire fabricated type to provide bolt clearance.
M. Epoxy Adhesive Set Dowel Bars:
1. Install in accordance with adhesive manufacture recommendations.
2. Drill hole 1/8" larger than the bar outer diameter to a depth 1/2" deeper than the minimum design
embedment.
3. Clean the hole completely with brush and air blast removing all debris.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13

4. Fill hole half full with properly mixed adhesive.
5. Insert the bar while rotating it two full revolutions to completely distribute epoxy throughout the
annular space.
6. Agitate the bars to remove all air voids to full depth embedment penetration.
3.6 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip
placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1 1/2 inches into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam -girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders
and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near
corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
7. Use epoxy -bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete
into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of
concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge
of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear,
abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
3. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams,
and other locations, as indicated.Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint,
terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
4. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished
concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are
indicated.
5. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required
lace or clip sections together.
D. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or
asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.7 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous
diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during
progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. To properly secure waterstops in wall joints before concrete is placed, drill holes in waterstops
approximately 1 inch from each edge or between the outermost ribs at each edge and center the
waterstop in the joint. Tie both edges of the waterstop and fasten to reinforcing steel with black
annealed steel tie wire as specified for tying reinforcing steel and secure in place so that the waterstop
will be perpendicular to the joint and remain in the required position during concrete placement. The
spacing of the waterstop ties shall match the spacing of the adjacent reinforcing, but need not be
spaced closer than 12 inches on center.
C. Self -Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly
pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14

D. Horizontal PVC waterstops in slabs shall have the edge of the waterstop lifted while placing concrete
below the waterstop. Then the waterstop shall be manually forced against and into the placed concrete
and covered with fresh concrete, to ensure adequate encasement of the waterstop in concrete.
E. Waterstops shall be installed so that half of the width will be embedded on each side of the joint. Care
shall be exercised to ensure that the waterstop is completely embedded in void -free concrete.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Immediately before installing the joint sealant, clean the joint cavity by sandblasting or power wire
brushing. Install bond breaker tape per manufacturer's instructions.
B. After the joints have been prepared as described above, apply the joint sealant. Apply the primer, if
required, and joint sealant only with the equipment and methods recommended by the joint sealant
manufacturer.
C. Application criteria for the sealant materials, such as temperature and moisture requirements and
primer cure time, shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer.
D. Apply masking tape along the edges of the exposed surface of the exposed joints. Trowel the joints
smooth with a tuck pointing tool wiped with a solvent recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
E. After the sealant has been applied, remove the masking tape and any sealant spillage.
F. Installation of Premolded Joint Filler: Install in joint accurately as shown. Attach to concrete with a
bonding agent recommended by the joint sealant and joint filler manufacturer for compatibility.
3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless such quantity
of water is intentionally withheld for later addition at project site. Such addition, in no case should result
in altering of the specified water to cementitious material ratio. Indicate the amount of mixing water
that is withheld for later addition at the project site on the batch tickets. Provide such batch tickets to
the concrete inspector for review and record.
C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete
to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding
layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At
each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to
segregate.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface
plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces
before starting finishing operations.
F. Placement in Wall Forms: Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any
deep form, whether reinforcement is present or not, causing separation of the coarse aggregate from
the mortar on account of repeatedly hitting rods or the sides of the form as it falls, nor shall concrete
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15

be placed in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of mortar on the form surfaces
above the placed concrete. In such cases, some means such as the use of hoppers and, if
necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the forms in
a manner that it may reach the place of final deposit without separation. In no case shall the free fall
of concrete exceed 4 feet before the ends of ducts, chutes, or buggies. Concrete shall be uniformly
distributed during the process of depositing and in no case after depositing shall any portion be
displaced in the forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction. Concrete in forms shall be deposited in
uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet; and care shall be taken to avoid inclined layers or
inclined construction joints except where such are required for sloping members. Each layer shall be
placed while the previous layer is still soft. The rate of placing concrete in forms shall not exceed 5
feet of vertical rise per hour.
G. Conveyor Belts and Chutes: All ends of chutes, hopper gates, and all other points of concrete
discharge throughout the Contractor's conveying, hoisting and placing system shall be so designed
and arranged that concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle
immediately receives it. Conveyor belts, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Chutes
longer than 50 feet will not be permitted. Minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the
specified consistency will readily flow in them. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be wiped clean by a
device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All
conveyor belts and chutes shall be covered. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of all
forms so that the concrete at the places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway.
H. Placement in Slabs: Concrete placed in sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the
slab to the top, for the full width of the pour. As the work progresses, the concrete shall be vibrated
and carefully worked around the slab reinforcement, and the surface of the slab shall be screeded in
an upslope direction
I. Temperature of Concrete: Concrete temperature shall conform to the applicable requirements of ACI
305R - Hot Weather Concreting, and ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting, unless otherwise modified
herein. The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than 90' F. Concrete
ingredients shall not be heated to a temperature higher than that necessary to keep the temperature of
the mixed concrete, as placed, from falling below the specified minimum temperature. If concrete is
placed when the weather is such that the temperature of the concrete would exceed 90' F, the
Contractor shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregates and mixing water using ice
or placing at night, as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete, as it is placed, below 90'
F. The Contractor shall be entitled to no additional compensation on the account of the foregoing
requirements. See subsections 3.4 and 3.5 for additional requirements.
J. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by
methods, which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients and in a manner that the required quality
of the concrete is maintained. No concrete shall be placed more than 1'/2 hours after mixing of that
particular batch has commenced.
K. Pumping Equipment: Pumping equipment and procedures, if used, shall conform to the
recommendations contained in the report of ACI Committee 304 on Placing Concrete by Pumping
Methods, ACI 304.2R. The specified slump shall be measured at the point of discharge. The loss of
slump in pumping shall not exceed 1 inch with or without a superplastizer. The slump loss shall be
determined by tests made at each end of the pumping system. If tests indicate a loss greater than 1
inch, the contractor shall modify the pumping system as required to reduce the slump loss.
L. The order of placing concrete in all parts of the work shall be acceptable to the Engineer. In order to
minimize the effects of shrinkage, placement shall be scheduled so that one end of each unit is free,
except at corner closures. The placing of units shall be done by placing alternate units in a manner
such that each unit placed shall have cured at least 7 days before the contiguous unit or units are
placed, except that the corner sections of vertical walls shall not be placed until the 2 adjacent wall
panels have cured at least 14 days.
M. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To insure a level,
straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least 3/4 inch thick shall be tacked to the
forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be carried about 1/2 of an inch above the underside of the
strip. About one hour after the concrete is placed, the strip shall be removed and any irregularities in
the edge formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel and all laitance shall be removed.
N. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and compacted,
throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous
mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets,
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16

and bringing only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement.
Vibrators shall be high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 10,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficient
number and with (at least one) standby units as required.
O. Care shall be used in placing concrete around waterstops. The concrete shall be carefully worked by
rodding and vibrating to make sure that all air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where
waterstops are placed horizontally, the concrete shall be worked under the waterstops by hand,
making sure that all air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Concrete surrounding the waterstops
shall be given additional vibration, over and above that used for adjacent concrete placement to
assure complete embedment of the waterstops in the concrete.
P. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time stirred, or worked with suitable
appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely fills the forms or excavations and
closes snugly against all surfaces, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause
honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness. Subsequent layers of concrete shall not be placed until
the layers previously placed have been worked thoroughly as specified. Vibrators shall be provided in
sufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the results herein specified within 15
minutes after concrete of the prescribed consistence is placed in the forms. The vibrating head shall
be kept from contact with the surfaces of the forms. Overvibrating and use of vibrators to transport
concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at many points,
approximately 18 inches apart. At each insertion, the duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the
concrete, but not sufficient to cause segregation, generally from 5 to 15 sec. duration.
Q. Backfill placed against walls and grade beams shall be done evenly on both sides. Do not place
Backfill against walls until the concrete has attained a compressive strength equal to the specified
28-day compressive strength. Backfill against basement foundation walls shall not be placed until
ground level floor and lower level slabs that brace this wall are in place and cured unless the wall is
properly braced with temporary bracing. All bracing, if used, shall be responsibility of the contractor.
Submit all calculations and details to the structural engineer for record. Backfill placed directly adjacent
to basement and retaining walls shall be compacted clean free draining granular material. For a
minimum of 2'-6" from face of wall. Provide a 1'-6" deep cap of compacted approved impervious
cohesive material at top of granular Backfill. All Backfill shall be compacted using hand operated
equipment; no heavy equipment shall be allowed within 5-0" of any wall.
R. No aluminum of any type shall be allowed in concrete work unless coated to prevent
aluminum -concrete reaction.
S. Cross reference structural and Engineerural drawings for inserts, anchor bolts, notches, ledges, lugs,
etc. required on beams. Width and depth of beams given are overall out -to -out dimensions of
concrete.
T. All field bending of reinforcing shall be done cold. Heating of bars will not be permitted.
U. Maximum O.D. of embedded conduit shall be no larger than 1/3 slab thickness. No conduit shall be
placed above the welded wire fabric in slabs- on -grade or concrete fill placed onto composite metal
deck. Do not place pipes, ducts, reglets or chases in structural concrete or composite floor systems
without approval of the structural engineer through the Engineer.
V. Provide vertical construction joints in concrete walls that have their outside surface exposed to view at
a maximum uniform spacing not to exceed 30'-0". Coordinate joint locations with Engineerural
drawings. Do not cast unexposed walls or grade beams in lengths over 60'-0". Wait 48 hours between
adjacent pours. Provide waterstops at all vertical construction joints in walls.
W. Construction joints in floors shall be located within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams, and
girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance of two times the width of intersecting
beams. Provide waterstops at all construction joints in basin top and bottom concrete slab and beam
framing.
X. No footing shall be placed onto or against sub -grades containing free water, frost, or ice.
Y. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive
days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by
ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17

accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Z. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to
total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10 CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE CONSTRUCTION
A. All unacceptable fill and top soil shall be removed from below all proposed slabs -on -grade and the
exposed natural soil shall be proof rolled and the compaction verified by a qualified independent soils
testing firm prior to placing fill. Areas exhibiting weakness shall be removed and replaced by
acceptable compacted fill.
B. A minimum 4" of compacted granular fill shall be placed under all slabs -on -grade. All fill required to
attain final sub -grade for slabs and walls shall be an acceptable material placed and compacted as
directed by the project soils consultant report recommendations.
C. A vapor barrier with minimum 10 mil thickness shall be placed under all interior slab -on -grade or below
granular fill for floors to receive floor covering as indicated on Engineerural drawings. Lap and seal all
edges. No vapor barrier required for slab on grades without floor coverings unless noted otherwise.
D. Pitch slabs to drains and provide depressions, where shown on the process or structural or
Engineerural drawings, without reducing the thickness of slab indicated. See details for additional
reinforcing for slabs on grade depressions greater than 1 ".
E. Provide slab -on -grade construction joints around each column, against grade beams, interior walls,
and between columns and walls. Provide slab joints to form areas not to exceed 15' in length in each
direction. See typical details. Submit detailed drawings showing locations of all construction joints.
3.11 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on
formed -surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view
B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects.
Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed finished as -cast concrete for basin and tank
walls that are exposed to view and where indicated:
1. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces
and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture.
Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Grout -Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to
coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine
sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts
determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into
voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep
surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork -Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement
and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement
in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork
float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed
surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.12 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18

operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -floated or
darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float
passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marksand uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked
floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs -on -grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.
d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10 ft. long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the
surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as
indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before
application.
3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place
unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in -place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by
steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly
rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown
on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with
diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast -in
inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.
3.14 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather
protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,
and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If
removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 19

including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. All concrete in liquid containing structures shall be water cured.
F. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following
materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water -fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and
edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12
inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof
tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor
coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture -retaining cover or a
curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor
covering used on Project.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer <<None -
N/A; or unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bondina
of floor coverina used on Proiect>>.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours
later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
period.
3.15 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete
surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than <<ht ree; seven; 14; or 28>> days' old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat
brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a
second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
B. Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared
slabs to match accepted mockup.
1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth«None - N/A; or and
to depth reauired to reveal aaareaate to match approved mockup>>.
2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according
to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive
coats.
3. Continue polishing with progressively finer grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level to match
approved mockup.
4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.
5. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.
C. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened
concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. When called for in Finish Schedule or on plans, apply first coat of clear concrete floor sealer after final
troweling. Surface is damp, but not wet, and can no longer be marred by workman spray sealer at rate
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 20

of 300 sq. ft. per gallon. After all trades have completed work, mop -clean floor with TSP solution to
remove oil, grease, and dirt, rinse, allow to dry, then cover with second spray coat of sealer at rate of
400 sq. ft. per gallon. Do not allow puddles to occur in either coat.
3.16 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction
traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of
joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints.
Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.17 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and
one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and
placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2
inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids
with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill
form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test
area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Engineer.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify
surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to
drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to
reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other
objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by
cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare,
mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to
produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to
ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare,
mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to
produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by
cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts
and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete
surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of
same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place,
compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent
concrete.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 21

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove
top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles.
Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before
bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep
patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval.
G. Repair of concrete not passing leakage test: After the structure has been tested for leaks, repair
leaking concrete cracks by cutting out a square edged and uniformly aligned joint 3/8 inch wide by 3/4
inch deep, preparing exposed surfaces of the joint, priming the joint, and apply low viscosity
polyurethane joint sealant in accordance with Manufacturer. The Contractor may submit alternate
methods of crack repair for review by the Engineer.
H. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
I. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
J. Inspections:
1. Steel reinforcement placement.
2. Steel reinforcement welding.
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.
K. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172
shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture
exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or
fraction thereof.
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof
of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each
concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than
one test for each days pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete
consistency appears to change.
4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; one test for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and
below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 138, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two and one set of one standard cylinder specimens for
each composite sample.
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
8. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at 7
days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. Hold one set of one specimen for future testing if
the two tests mentioned above do not meet strength requirements.
a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28
days.
b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
9. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -cured
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 22

cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing in -place concrete.
10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency,
location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and
28-day tests.
12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test
results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have
not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 23

determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other
methods as directed by Engineer.
14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the
Contract Documents.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.
M. Water -Soluble Chloride Ion: Water-soluble chloride ion testing shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM C 1218.
N. Drying Shrinkage Test
O. Concrete shrinkage tests shall be performed once for each 1,000 cubic yards of concrete with
controlled shrinkage that is placed and shall be made on concrete from a batch of concrete from which
concrete compression test cylinders are made. Shrinkage testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C
157.
P. A drying shrinkage test shall be conducted on the preliminary trial batch with the maximum
water-cementitious materials ratio used to qualify each proposed concrete mix design using the
concrete materials, including admixtures, which are proposed for the project. Three test specimens
shall be prepared for each test. Specimens shall be fabricated, cured, dried, and measured in
accordance with ASTM C 157.
Q. Drying shrinkage for each specimen shall be computed as the difference between the base length at
(0) zero days drying age and the length after drying at each test age. Results of the shrinkage test
shall be reported to the nearest 0.001 %. If drying shrinkage of any specimen deviates from the
average for that test age by more than 0.004%, the results for that specimen shall be disregarded.
R. The average drying shrinkage of each set of test specimens cast in the laboratory from a trial batch as
measured at the 21 days drying age shall not exceed 0.035% for concrete to be used in
liquid -containing structures and 0.045% for concrete to be used in other structures. Drying shrinkage
tests will not be required for isolated footings, pipe blocking, pipe encasement, and duct banks.
S. At the Contractor's option, a shrinkage -reducing admixture may be used to comply with the maximum
shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage reducing admixture shall be Grace Construction Products Eclipse;
or Degussa Tetraguard AS20, or equal, at a rate of 1 gallon per cubic yard. All concrete admixtures
shall be from one manufacturer and shall be compatible. Admixture content, hatching method, and
time of introduction to mix shall comply with these specifications and with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.18 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use
protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor
treatments installer.
END OF SECTION
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 24

SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other
Sections.
3. Shelf angles.
4. Metal ladders.
5. Ladder safety cages (if shown).
6. Alternating tread devices.
7. Metal ships' ladders and pipe crossovers.
8. Metal floor plate and supports.
9. Metal grating, handrail, and kickplate (FRP is acceptable alternative), and supports.
10. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards and steel edgings.
11. Metal bollards.
12. Pipe guards.
13. Tank walls and wind girder.
14. Tank stairs and sampling/viewing platform.
15. Access hatches.
16. Custom fabricated pipe supports.
17. Abrasive metal nosings.
18. Cast-iron wheel guards.
19. Metal downspout boots.
20. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.
21. Loose steel lintels.
22. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be
cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
23. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not
specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections:
Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,
slotted -channel inserts, wedge -type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design steel members including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders including landings shall
withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI
A14.3.
C. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices shall withstand the
effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ICC's International Building
Code.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip -aggregate surface finishes.
2. Metal nosings and treads.
3. Paint products.
4. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless -steel certifying that products furnished comply
with requirements.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying
that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal
fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For
metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre -
consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 283,
Grade C or D.
F. Rolled -Stainless -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
G. Abrasive -Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2

H. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold -formed steel tubing.
I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
J. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches unless indicated otherwise.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653, commercial steel, Type B with G90 coating; 0.108-inch
nominal thickness.
3. Material: Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 1008, commercial steel, Type B; 0.0966-inch minimum
thickness; unfinished.
K. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
C. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632, Alloy 6061-T6.
D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/13 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
E. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent
copper).
F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
G. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded
semired brass).
H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151, Alloy UNS No. C74500.
I. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze).
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and
zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
3. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A
563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563,
Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Stainless -Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head annealed stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593;
with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where
indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is
indicated to be galvanized.
F. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
H. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
K. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
L. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
M. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated;
galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts,
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3

washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
N. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633
or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
O. Slotted -Channel Inserts: Cold -formed, hot -dip galvanized -steel box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches
long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee -head bolts, complete with
washers and nuts, all zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening
to inserts.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Low -Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000.
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer.
E. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible
with paints specified to be used over it.
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
H. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory -packaged, ferrous -aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107,
specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior
and exterior applications.
Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight,
air -entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of
joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners
unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6 inch embedment and 2 inch
hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the
Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supports from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as
required. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe
with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2 inch baseplates with four 5/8 inch anchor bolts and 1/4
inch top plates.
D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports as indicated in Section 099000.
2.8 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing.
Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4 inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends
and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately
2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls as specified in Section 099000.
E. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in -place
concrete.
2.9 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Vertical Ladders: Fabricate ladders as shown in the drawings. Ladders shall be aluminum unless
indicated otherwise in the drawings. The distance between rungs, cleats, and steps shall not exceed
12 inches and shall be uniform throughout the length of the ladder. The minimum clear length of rungs
or cleats shall be 16 inches.
C. Inclined Aluminum Ladders with built in handrail: Ladders shall be aluminum construction: Alloy
6063-T5, mill finish. Clear width of stair treads shall be 16-inches unless otherwise indicated.
Provide 1-1/2-inch diameter handrails. Provide 6-inch by 2-inch by 1/8-inch minimum channel
stringers. Provide minimum 4-1/8-inch by 1/4-inch minimum rung able to withstand a 1,000-pound
load. Provide minimum 3/16-inch thick aluminum wall and floor brackets. Provide 1-1/2-inch
aluminum handrails. Manufacturer: O'Keefe's, Inc., Model 523-10 or equal.
D. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches apart.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5

3. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
4. Rungs: 1-inch diameter steel bars.
5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum -oxide
granules set in epoxy -resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with
aluminum -oxide grout.
7. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically
bonded to rung.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.
2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT.
8. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure -locked steel bar grating,
supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
9. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c.
with welded or bolted steel brackets.
10. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
11. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc -rich primer.; or primer
specified in Section 099000.
E. Aluminum Ladders:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ACL Industries, Inc.
b. Alco-Lite Industrial Products.
c. Halliday Products.
d. O'Keeffe's Inc.
e. Precision Ladders, LLC.
f. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc.
g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.
2. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
3. Siderails: Continuous extruded -aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2 1/2 inches deep, 3/4
inch wide, and 1/8 inch thick.
4. Rungs: Extruded -aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch deep and not less than 1/8 inch thick,
with ribbed tread surfaces.
5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless -steel fasteners or brackets
and aluminum rivets.
6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure -locked aluminum bar grating or
extruded -aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded -aluminum framing. Limit openings in
gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted
aluminum brackets.
8. Provide minimum 72 inch high, hinged security door with padlock hasp at foot of ladder to
prevent unauthorized ladder use.
2.10 ALTERNATING TREAD DEVICES
A. Alternating Tread Devices: Fabricate alternating tread devices to comply with ICC's International
Building Code. Fabricate of open -type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube
railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the
following:
a. Lapeyre Stair Inc.
b. Schmidt Structural Products; a subsidiary of Penco Products, Inc.
3. Fabricate from aluminum and assemble by welding or with stainless -steel fasteners.
2.11 METAL SHIPS' LADDERS AND PIPE CROSSOVERS
A. Provide metal ships' ladders and pipe crossovers where indicated. Fabricate of open -type
construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated.
Provide brackets and fittings for installation.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6

1. Fabricate ships' ladders and pipe crossovers, including railings from aluminum.
2. Fabricate treads and platforms from pressure -locked aluminum bar grating, extruded -aluminum
plank grating, rolled -aluminum -alloy tread plate or abrasive -surface floor plate. Limit openings in
gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
3. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Section 055100 "Metal Stairs, Handrails and
Railings."
2.12 METAL FLOOR PLATE
A. Fabricate from rolled-steel floor or rolled -aluminum -alloy tread, as indicated:
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch or as indicated.
B. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from <<welded or pressure -locked steel bar
grating or pressure -locked aluminum bar grating as indicated. Limit openings in gratings to no more
than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
C. Provide steel or aluminum angle supports as indicated.
D. Include steel or aluminum angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
E. Provide flush steel or aluminum bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each
end of each section.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices
where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other
work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc -rich primer as specified in Section 099000.
2.14 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
1. Cap bollards with 1/4 inch thick steel plate.
2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for
controls and holes for wire.
3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for fixtures and
holes for wire.
B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8 inch thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all
four corners for 3/4 inch anchor bolts.
1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb
alignment of bollards.
C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 inch thick steel plate welded to
bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7

D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4 inch
wall -thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch less than ID of bollards. Match drill
sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch steel machine bolt.
E. Prime bollards with zinc -rich primer as specified in Section 099000.
2.15 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction.
Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
C. Prime plates with zinc -rich primer as specified in Section 099000.
2.16 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete
construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally
welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding
surface.
2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153 for steel and iron
hardware and with ASTM A 123 for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in
concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099000 unless zinc -rich primer is indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning".
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2.19 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
B. As -Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm
or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld,
cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for
bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use
with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other
connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry,
or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including
manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with
anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe
columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column
baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fill metal -capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.
1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
B. ; anchor bolts; or through bolts. Provide four 3/4 inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise
indicated.
Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.
C. Anchor bollards in concrete as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve
bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been
positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut
off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 9

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to
moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.5 INSTALLING LADDERS
A. Mount ladders to so that no permanent obstruction is within 7 inches of the ladder's centerline.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099000.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 10

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes materials and application of painting and coating systems for the following
surfaces:
B. Exposed, submerged, and buried metal.
C. PVC
D. Concrete (in contact with aluminum)
E. Wood
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 16 - Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.
B. ASTM D 4263 - Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.
C. ASTM F 1869 - Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride.
D. AWWA D 102 - Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks
E. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guideline No. 310.2-1997 (formerly 03732) - Selecting
and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays.
F. NACE SP0188 - Standard Recommended Practice, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective
Coatings.
G. NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning.
H. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.
I. SSPC-SP 3 - Powertool Cleaning
J. SSPC-SP 5/NACE 1 - White Metal Blast Cleaning.
K. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
L. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2 - Near -White Metal Blast Cleaning.
M. SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6 - Surface Preparation of Concrete.
N. SSPC-SP 16 - Brush -Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels,
and Non -Ferrous Metals
O. SSPC-TU 11 - Inspection of Fluorescent Coating Systems
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Contract Documents and Section 013300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information, including surface preparation
products such as block fillers and galvanized metal primers:
1. Percent solids by volume.
2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry -film thickness per coat for prime, intermediate, and
finish coats.
3. Recommended surface preparation.
4. Recommended thinners.
5. Statement verifying that the specified prime coat is recommended by the manufacturer for use
with the specified intermediate and finish coats.
6. Application instructions including recommended equipment and temperature limitations.
7. Curing requirements and instructions.
C. Submit color swatches or charts
D. Submit certifications from the manufacturer of field coatings that shop prime coat materials to be
applied by others is compatible with field coats.
E. Submit manufacturer's certification that coatings comply with specified requirements and are suitable
for intended application.
F. Submit material safety data sheets for each coating.
G. Submit certificate identifying the type and gradation of abrasives used for surface preparation.
H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty, or special warranty if set forth in the
contract documents.
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 1

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. Specialize in manufacture of coatings with a proven successful experience.
2. Able to demonstrate successful performance on comparable projects.
3. Single Source Responsibility: Coatings and coating application reducers and additives shall be
products of a single manufacturer.
B. Applicator's Qualifications:
1. Experienced in application of specified coatings on projects of similar size and complexity to this
Work.
2. Applicator's Personnel: Employ persons trained for application of specified coatings.
3. Applicator's Quality Assurance: Upon request, submit list of a minimum of 5 completed projects
of similar size and complexity to this Work. Include for each project:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of owner.
c. Name of contractor.
d. Name of engineer.
e. Name of coating manufacturer.
f. Approximate area of coatings applied.
g. Date of completion.
C. Provide field primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the intermediate and
finish coats. All field coatings shall be by the same manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying:
1. Coating or material name.
2. Manufacturer.
3. Color name and number.
4. Batch or lot number.
5. Date of manufacture.
6. Mixing and thinning instructions.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials in a clean dry area and within temperature range in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions in the area designated by owner's representative.
2. Keep containers sealed until ready for use.
3. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer's shelf -life limits.
C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination
1. Avoid danger of fire: Deposit cleaning rags and waste materials in metal containers having tight
covers or remove from building each night. Provide fire extinguishers of type recommended by
coating manufacturer in areas of storage and where finishing is occurring. Allow no smoking or
open containers of solvents. Store solvents in safety cans.
2. Upon project completion, remaining material will become property of Owner. Seal material as
required for storage, marked as to contents and shelf life, and store where required by Owner.
3. Protect floor and walls of storage area from splatter and disfiguration.
1.6 WORK SCHEDULE
Two weeks prior to the beginning of any coating work, establish with the Owner and Engineer a
mutually agreeable schedule for the work. The schedule shall allow for all inspections required.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tnemec Company Inc.
B. The Sherwin Williams Company
C. Induron
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 2

D. Diamond Vogel
E. Approved Equal
2.2 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE
Paint Systems Schedule is located at the end of this section. Painting products are listed on the
System Schedule.
2.3 PAINT FINISH SCHEDULE
The Paint Finish Schedule at the end of this section or located on the drawings indicates which
surfaces are to be painted. If there is a doubt as to whether a surface is to be painted, assume it is
until instructed otherwise by the Engineer.
2.4 COLORS
Paint colors will be selected from the manufacturer's standard color charts by the Owner and
Engineer.
2.5 TOUCH-UP PAINT
Furnish a minimum of one gallon of each coating, in each color used, for the Owners use in future
touch-up and minor repair work. Furnish the coatings in unbroken containers clearly labeled with the
manufacturer's name, product number, product number, color, date of manufacture and coating
system identification.
2.6 GALVANIZED METAL TOUCH-UP
Touch-up galvanized metals with Sherwin Williams Zinc Clad "Cold Galvanizing Compound", or equal,
3 mils DFT minimum, unless shown otherwise in another specification section. Provide SSPC-SP1
surface preparation.
2.7 ABRASIVES AND SURFACE PROFILE
Abrasives and surface profile shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the paint
material being coated and the application. Provide information for Engineer review.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Weather:
1. Air and Surface Temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within air and
surface temperature range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Surface Temperature: Minimum of 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above dew point.
3. Relative Humidity: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within relative humidity range in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Precipitation: Do not prepare surfaces or apply coatings in rain, snow, fog, or mist.
5. Wind: Do not spray coatings if wind velocity is above manufacturer's limit.
B. Ventilation: Provide ventilation during coating evaporation stage in confined or enclosed areas in
accordance with AWWA D 102.
C. Dust and Contaminants:
1. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants.
2. Protect work areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminants during coating application
and curing
3. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface
preparation and painting process. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials
from entering the motors.
D. Maintain interior temperature and relative humidity of space, as recommended by coating
manufacturer, 24 hours before applying and until coating is cured.
E. Do not paint when temperature of metal to be painted is above 120°F.
F. Do not apply alkyd, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic paints if air or surface
temperature is below 40°F or expected to be below 40°F within 24 hours.
3.2 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT SCHEDULED TO BE COATED
A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated from damage during surface
preparation and application of coatings.
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 3

B. Immediately remove coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION OF STEEL
A. Prepare steel surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fabrication Defects:
1. Correct steel and fabrication defects revealed by surface preparation.
2. Remove weld spatter and slag.
3. Round sharp edges and corners of welds to a smooth contour.
4. Smooth weld undercuts and recesses.
5. Grind down porous welds to pinhole -free metal.
6. Remove weld flux from surface.
C. Ensure surfaces are dry.
D. Immersion or Below Grade Surfaces: Remove visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint,
oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2. Create
a surface profile as required by the coating manufacturer.
E. Exterior Exposed or Interior Exposed Surfaces: Remove visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust,
paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3.
Create a surface profile mils as required by the coating manufacturer.
F. Abrasive Blast -Cleaned Surfaces: Coat abrasive blast -cleaned surfaces with primer before visible rust
forms on surface. Do not leave blast -cleaned surfaces uncoated for more than 8 hours. Do not touch
blasted surface with bare hands. Do not abrasive blast or prepare more surface area in one day than
can be coated in one day; prepare surfaces and apply coatings the same day.
G. For carbon steel surfaces, after abrasive blast cleaning, verify the surface profile by measuring with an
impreser tape acceptable to the Owner's Representative. Performa minimum of one test per 100
square feet of surface area. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. The impresser
tape used in the test shall be permanently marked with the date, time, and locations where the test
was made. Test results shall be promptly presented to the Owner's Representative.
H. Shop Primer: Shop primed steel shall receive a field sweep blast prior to the application of subsequent
coats. Prepare shop primer to receive field coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Removal all unknown shop primers and re -prime in accordance with this specification.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION OF GALVANIZED STEEL AND NONFERROUS METAL
A. Prepare galvanized steel and nonferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 16 and the
coating manufacturer's instructions.
B. Test galvanized surfaces for chromate treatments and remove as required by SSPC-SP 16, or other
Engineer approved method.
C. Ensure surfaces are dry.
3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION OF DUCTILE OR CAST IRON
A. Prepare ductile or cast iron surfaces in accordance with NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning with
the exception that ALL rust and mold coating be removed. Only tightly adhered annealing oxide may
remain.
B. Bituminous coated pipe shall NOT be allowed if field painting is required.
C. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
D. Painting contractor shall install a 360-degree bead of caulk. Prior to painting, in the void between
mating flange faces and in the void between any pipe and the thread -on flange. The bead caulk shall
prevent exterior water from penetrating into the described void and leaving rust streaks.
E. Caulk shall be a paintable, high grade flexible polysulfide joint sealant as manufactured by Polyspec
or equal
3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION OF PVC
A. Prepare PVC surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
C. Scarify PVC surfaces.
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 4

3.7 SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE
A. Interior, Wet Substrate:
1. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6,
and ICRI 310.2.
2. Allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days.
3. Test concrete for moisture in accordance with ASTM D 4263 and, if necessary, F 1869.
4. Abrasive blast surface to remove laitance and solid contaminants and to provide clean, sound
substrate with uniform anchor profile.
5. Verify that the pH of the cleaned concrete surfaces to be coated is within the range of to 8 to 11.
Application of coating materials outside this range will not be permitted without written approval
from the Engineer.
6. Fill holes, pits, voids, and cracks with manufacturer approved surfacer.
7. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, chalk, form release agents, and other
contaminants.
B. Exterior and Interior Dry:
1. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6,
and ICRI 310.2.
2. Allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days.
3. Test concrete for moisture in accordance with ASTM D 4263 and, if necessary, F 1869.
4. Level concrete protrusions and mortar spatter.
5. Verify that the pH of the cleaned concrete surfaces to be coated is within the range of to 8 to 11.
Application of coating materials outside this range will not be permitted without written approval
from the Engineer.
6. Fill hairline cracks less than 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
7. Prepare cracks wider than 1/64 inch (0.4 mm), moving cracks, gaps, and expansion joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
8. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, chalk, form release agents, and other
contaminants.
3.8 SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS
A. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6, and
ICRI 310.2.
B. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
C. Allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days before coating.
D. Test concrete for moisture in accordance with ASTM D 4263 and, if necessary, F 1869.
E. Verify that the pH of the cleaned concrete surfaces to be coated is within the range of to 8 to 11.
Application of coating materials outside this range will not be permitted without written approval from
the Engineer.
3.9 SURFACE PREPARATION OF POROUS CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Prepare porous concrete masonry unit surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6.
B. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
C. Allow mortar to cure for a minimum of 28 days before coating.
D. Level protrusions and mortar spatter.
3.10 SURFACE PREPARATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. Prepare gypsum board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
C. Sand joint compound smooth and feather edge.
D. Avoid heavy sanding of adjacent gypsum board surfaces, which will raise nap of paper covering.
E. Do not apply putty, patching pencils, caulking, or masking tape to drywall surfaces to be painted.
F. Lightly scuff -sand tape joints after priming to remove raised paper nap. Do not sand through primer.
3.11 SURFACE PREPARATION OF WOOD
A. Prepare wood surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 5

B. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, surface deposits of sap or pitch, and
other contaminants.
C. Seal knots and pitch pockets.
D. Sand rough spots with the grain.
E. Fill cracks and holes with approved materials after primer is dry. Sand flush with surface when filler is
hard.
F. Lightly sand between coats.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR ITEMS HAVING SHOP -APPLIED PRIME COATS
A. After application of primer to surfaces, allow coating to cure for a minimum of two hours before
handling to minimize damage.
B. When loading for shipment to the project site, use spacers and other protective devices to separate
items to prevent damaging the shop -primed surfaces during transit and unloading. If wood spacers are
used, remove wood splinters and particles from the shop -primed surfaces after separation. Use
padded chains or ribbon binders to secure the loaded items and minimize damage to the shop -primed
surfaces.
C. Cover shop -primed items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of road
salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit.
D. Handle shop -primed items with care during unloading, installation, and erection operations to minimize
damage. Do not place or store shop -primed items on the ground or on top of other work unless ground
or work is covered with a protective covering or tarpaulin. Place shop -primed items above the ground
upon platforms, skids, or other supports.
3.13 FIELD TOUCH-UP OF SHOP -APPLIED PRIME COATS
A. Remove oil and grease surface contaminants on metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Use
clean rags wetted with a degreasing solution, rinse with clean water, and wipe dry.
B. Remove dust, dirt, salts, moisture, chalking primers, or other surface contaminants that will affect the
adhesion or durability of the coating system. Use a high-pressure water blaster or scrub surfaces with
a broom or brush wetted with a solution of trisodium phosphate, detergent, and water. Rinse scrubbed
surfaces with clean water.
C. Remove rust, scaling, or primer damaged by welding or during shipment, storage, and erection in
accordance with SSPC SP-10. Take care that remaining primers are not damaged by the blast
cleaning operation. Areas smaller than 1 square inch may be prepared per SSPC SP-11. Remaining
primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with cleaned edges feathered.
D. Use repair procedures on damaged primer that protects adjacent primer. Blast cleaning may require
the use of lower air pressure, smaller nozzles, and abrasive particle sizes, short blast nozzle distance
from surface, shielding, and/or masking.
E. After abrasive blast cleaning of damaged and defective areas, remove dust, blast particles, and other
debris by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming; then apply the specified touch-up coating.
F. Surfaces that are shop primed shall receive a field touch-up of the same primer used in the original
prime coat.
G. Review other Specification Sections in which primers are shop applied to assure compatibility of the
total coating system. On request, furnish information on characteristics of intermediate and finish
coating materials to assure compatibility with primers. Notify the Owners Representative of
anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.
3.14 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix and thin coatings, including multi -component materials, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Only full kits shall be mixed, unless properly measured using graduated measuring
devices. Only mix coatings in areas designated for that purpose by the Owner's
Representative.
C. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination.
D. Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits.
E. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings, and techniques in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 6

F. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT.
G. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or
appearance of coating systems.
H. Stripe paint with brush critical locations on steel such as welds, corners, and edges using specified
primer. Apply an additional stripe coat of the intermediate coating material in immersion areas.
I. Roll or backroll the first coat of epoxy or block filler applied to concrete or interior block substrates to
work the material into the substrate
3.15 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED
A. Do not paint the following surfaces unless otherwise noted in the drawings or in other specification
sections. Protect during the painting of adjacent areas:
B. Prefinished items not to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following factory -finished
components, unless noted otherwise:
1. Toilet enclosures
2. Acoustic materials
3. Architectural woodwork and casework
4. Shop finished water treatment process, mechanical, and electrical equipment
5. Light fixtures
6. Switchgear
7. Distribution cabinets
8. Metal Building Wall and Roof Panels
9. FRP Pipe Supports, Hangers, and grating
10. Laboratory Cabinets
C. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following, unless noted
otherwise:
Aluminum
2. Stainless steel and stainless steel piping, except for color coding
3. Chromium plated
4. Copper pipe, except for color coding
5. Submerged brass and copper.
D. Interior and exterior galvanized metal surfaces shall not be painted, unless noted otherwise in the paint
schedule or on the plans.
E. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such as the following:
1. Valve and damper operators
2. Linkage
3. Sensing devices
4. Motor and fan shafts
F. Labels
Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or
equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
G. Concrete and masonry surfaces unless noted to be painted on Paint Finish Schedule.
H. Shop primed steel joists if not exposed to view upon completion of construction.
Miscellaneous Items
1. Fencing
2. Concrete reinforcement steel
3. Buried piping unless specifically noted otherwise
4. Exposed electrical conduit.
5. Glass
6. Roofing
7. Metal letters
8. Grease fittings
J. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces,
machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not
intended to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring
adjacent surfaces. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during
surface preparation and painting process. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 7

materials from entering the motors.
3.16 SURFACES TO BE COATED
A. Coat surfaces with the specific coating systems as described below:
1. Coat mechanical equipment, such as pumps, as described in the various mechanical equipment
specifications. Color of finish coat shall match the color of the connecting piping.
2. Coat aboveground and exposed piping or piping in vaults and structures as described in the
various piping specifications.
3. Coat valves as described in the various valve specifications. Aboveground valves, or valves in
vaults and structures, shall match the color of the connecting piping.
4. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete per System No. 11.
5. Coat aboveground structural steel or structural steel located in vaults and structures as described
in Section 05120.
6. Field applied epoxy coatings for patching and touch-up of fusion -bonded epoxy lining and
coatings shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 09961.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Required Inspections and Documentation:
1. Verify coatings and other materials are as specified.
2. Verify environmental conditions are as specified.
3. Verify surface preparation and application are as specified.
4. Verify DFT of each coat and total DFT of each coating system are as specified using wet film and
dry film gauges. DFT's shall be measured in accordance with SSPC-PA2.
5. Coating Defects: Check coatings for film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect
performance or appearance of coating systems.
a. Check for holidays on interior steel immersion surfaces using holiday detector in accordance
with NACE SP0188 or SSPC TU-11 using a safe blue light inspection lamps if OAP
technology is used.
6. Report:
a. Prepare inspection reports daily.
b. Submit written reports describing inspections made and actions taken to correct
nonconforming work.
c. Report nonconforming work not corrected.
d. Submit copies of report to Engineer and Contractor.
7. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative when available. The Owner's
Representative may perform independent testing of coating systems, including wet film, dry film,
holiday, surface profile, or testing of paint products as deemed necessary.
8. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance
and guidance for surface preparation and application of coating systems
3.18 REPAIR OF IMPROPERLY COATED SURFACES
If the item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean and topcoat the surface with
the specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage. Sandblast or mechanically
abrade visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, feathering the edges. Then prime and finish
coat in accordance with the specifications. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other
imperfections.
3.19 CLEANING
A. During the progress of the work, remove discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at the end of
each day's work.
B. Thoroughly clean brushes and other application equipment at the end of each period of use and when
changing to another paint or color.
C. Upon completion of painting work, remove masking tape, tarps, and other protective materials. Clean
glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scaping. Use care not to
scratch or damage finished surfaces.
D. All glass that is scratched or damaged by the painter's work or while cleaning off the paint from the
glass shall be replaced.
E. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 8

END OF SECTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 9

SECTION 260510
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices shall be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of motors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Motor winding failure.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe -duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea
level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Manufacturers:
1. US Motor
2. General Electric Company
3. Westinghouse
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 260510 - 1

4. Approved Equal.
C. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
D. Service Factor: 1.15.
E. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture -resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to
resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse -width
modulated inverters.
F. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
G. Rotor: Random -wound, squirrel cage.
H. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
I. Temperature Rise: Class B.
J. Insulation: Class F.
K. Peak Voltage Rating of stater wiring to be a minimum of 2,200 volts.
L. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
M. Enclosure Material: Cast iron frame and end bells.
N. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1.
O. Severe -Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
P. Provide shaft grounding (diverter) ring on drive end of all vertical motors.
Q. Provide shaft grounding (diverter) ring on drive end and insulated bearing on the non -drive end of
all motors 25 hp and larger controlled by variable -frequency motor controllers.
2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements
of specific motor application:
1. Permanent -split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal
range.
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 260510 - 2

SECTION 260519
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to
this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Field quality -control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. Alpha Wire.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Encore Wire Corporation.
5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
6. Southwire Incorporated.
B. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2 and
Type XHHW-2.
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal -clad cable, Type MC
with ground wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gednev; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
4. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.
5. Tyco Electronics.
B. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4
AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type SE or Type USE
multiconductor cable.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal -clad cable,
Type MC.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,
single conductors in raceway Metal -clad cable, Type MC.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-
THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway
Metal -clad cable, Type MC.
F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2,
single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG Metal -clad cable, Type MC.
G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in
raceway Metal -clad cable, Type MC.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway Metal -clad cable, Type MC.
I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-
2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in
raceway Metal -clad cable, Type MC.
K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal -clad
cable, Type MC.
L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless -
steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for
Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire -resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections [with the assistance of a factory -authorized service
representative]:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test
service entrance and feeder conductors [and conductors feeding the following critical equipment
and services] for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger.
Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct
deficiencies determined during the scan.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice
11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4

SECTION 260533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures,
and cabinets.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation
including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
D. Samples: For and wireways, nonmetallic wireways, surface raceways and for each color and
texture specified.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their
mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality -control test reports.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

2. Allied Tube & Conduit.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company.
5. O-Z/Gedney.
6. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
F. PVC -Coated Steel Conduit: PVC -coated rigid steel conduit.
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc -coated steel.
I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.
2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Setscrew or compression.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
4. Coating for Fittings for PVC -Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints
K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corporation.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. Electri-Flex Company.
8. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
9. RACO; Hubbell.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application
C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651 B.
H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.
I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and
material.
K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D.
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250unless otherwise indicated, and
sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: As indicated.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no
holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil -resistant gasket material and fastened with
captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless -steel
screws and oil -resistant gaskets.
D. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap -on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3

E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete
system.
F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap -on covers complying with UL 5.
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Wiremold / Legrand.
C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and
manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self -extinguishing
characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Hubbell Incorporated.
b. Panduit Corp.
c. Wiremold / Legrand.
D. Tele-Power Poles:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mono -Systems, Inc.
b. Panduit Corp.
c. Wiremold / Legrand.
2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked -enamel finish Aluminum with clear anodized
finish.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,
mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required
for complete system.
2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse -Hinds.
2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell Incorporated.
6. O-Z/G ed n ey.
7. RACO; Hubbell.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4

8. Robroy Industries.
9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
11. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.
2. Type: Fully adjustable.
3. Shape: Rectangular.
4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.
1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
K. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with
gasketed cover.
L. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
M. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
N. Gangable boxes are allowed.
O. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous -hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
P. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,
finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:
1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Polymer -Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer -Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a
combination of the two.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper -resistant locking devices and having structural load
rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."
7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for
secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and
pulling -in irons installed before concrete is poured.
C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass -reinforced polyester resin, with frame and
covers of polymer concrete.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.
d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc; Christy Concrete Products
e. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.
2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
3. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray.
4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial unless otherwise indicated.
5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper -resistant locking devices and having structural load
rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6

8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for
secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and
pulling -in irons installed before concrete is poured.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull -Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance
with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.
2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing
agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by
manufacturer.
3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with
ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Raceway locations
include the following:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet -handling units.
c. Mechanical rooms.
d. Gymnasiums.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic in
damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of
conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits
and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and
number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on
Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply
with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of
floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Complete with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control
wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in
direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways
to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
5. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above
the floor.
Stub -ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub -ups not terminated in hubs or in
an enclosure.
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed
compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8

L. Coat field -cut threads on PVC -coated raceway with a corrosion -preventing conductive compound
prior to assembly.
M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to
protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less
than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
S. Surface Raceways:
1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.
2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor -type devices at intervals not exceeding
48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface
raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable
support methods.
T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
W. Expansion -Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in
each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds 10 feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of
the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that
provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run
per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion
joints.
5. Install each expansion -joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of
installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for lighting
fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers
and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to [[center] [top]
[bottom]] of box unless otherwise indicated.
Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
FF. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct -Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in
nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of
finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with
normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through the floor.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the
coupling.
b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits
penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches
from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on
terminations at equipment.
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct -buried conduits
but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.
7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install hand holes and boxes with bottom below the frost line.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,
as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm
lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve
adequate working clearances in the enclosure.
F. Field -cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut
wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to
be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 11

THIS PAGE INENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 12

SECTION 262200
LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to
this Section.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: identify center of gravity, locate, and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Source quality -control test reports.
D. Field quality -control test reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or
is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and
that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical
Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to
supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined
by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry -Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within
the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not
energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of
temperature and humidity.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor -
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of wall -mounting and structure -hanging supports with actual transformer
provided.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Acme Electric Corporation.
2. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler -Hammer Products.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Sola/Nevi-Duty.
5. Square D Co./Groupe Schneider NA; Schneider Electric.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain -oriented, non -aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Aluminum.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Cores: One leg per phase.
D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
E. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
G. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: One 5 percent tap above normal full capacity.
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 2

H. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below
normal full capacity.
I. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
J. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
K. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.
2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
L. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561
requirements for non -sinusoidal load current -handling capability to the degree defined by
designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full -load current with harmonic distortion corresponding
to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
M. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full -width copper
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and
output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
3. Shield Effectiveness:
a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads
over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
b. Common -Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz;
minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.
c. Normal -Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.
N. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
O. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.
P. Low -Sound -Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound
levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.
Q. Low -Sound -Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to
IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:
1. 9 kVA and Less: 40 dBA.
2. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA.
3. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 dBA.
4. 151 to 300 kVA: 55 dBA.
5. 301 to 500 kVA: 60 dBA.
6. 501 to 750 kVA: 62 dBA.
7. 751 to 1000 kVA: 64 dBA.
2.4 BUCK -BOOST TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: Self -cooled, two -winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring
terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST 1
and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561.
B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 3

1. Finish Color: Gray.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated -plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with
corrosion -resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
B. Factory Sound -Level Tests: Conduct sound -level tests on equipment for this Project.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient -temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5
ohms at location of transformer.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall -mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer
manufacturer.
1. Brace wall -mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems.
B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor -mounting transformers according to manufacturer's
written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report
results in writing.
C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 4

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
E. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
F. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
transformer connections.
1. Use an infrared -scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning.
Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations
after remedial action.
G. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B. Connect buck -boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus
or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 5

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 6

SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to
this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. SPD: Surge Protective Device.
B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log -log graft paper; include selectable
ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
C. Field Quality -Control Reports:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2. Time -current curves, including selectable ranges, for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
a. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
b. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:
Two spares for each panelboard.
c. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than three of each size and type.
d. Fuses for Fused Power -Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for
each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards
including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in
spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor -
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface -mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
c. Wash -Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 5 or Type 12.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim
cover.
4. Skirt for Surface -Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with
enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
6. Finishes:
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with
manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and
other components.
7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective
cover.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from
box.
4. Extra -Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus -Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
4. Feed -Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
6. Gutter -Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same
end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
7. Extra -Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra -capacity
neutral bus.
F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load
centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
H. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series -connected system with integral or
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type
of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series -connected short-circuit
rating by an NRTL.
I. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current
available at terminals.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from
the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational
after the seismic event."
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4

B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with
UL 1449 SPD Type 1.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
4. Approved equal.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: As Indicated
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-
on circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-
on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically or mechanically held, general-
purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.
1. Internal Control -Power Source: Control -power transformer, with fused primary and
secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.
2. External Control -Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
4. Approved equal.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type.
C. Mains: As indicated.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically or mechanically held, general-
purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.
1. Internal Control -Power Source: Control -power transformer, with fused primary and
secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.
2. External Control -Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.
F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
G. Column -Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box
equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5

2.5 ELECTRONIC -GRADE PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
3. Liebert Corporation.
4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
6. Approved equal.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory -installed, integral SPD; labeled by an NRTL for
compliance with UL 67 after installing SPD.
C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on thermal -magnetic circuit breakers.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on thermal -magnetic circuit breakers.
F. Buses:
1. Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.
2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.
2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
4. Approved equal.
B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting
for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -mounted,
field -adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field -replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip; and the following field -adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short -time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short -time time adjustments.
d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and Izt response.
4. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let -through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault
protection (6-mA trip).
6. Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground -fault
protection (30-mA trip).
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6

7. Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V,
single -pole configuration.
8. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge (HID)
lighting circuits.
d. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator.
e. Communication Capability: Circuit -breaker -mounted communication module with
functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of
rated voltage.
g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field -
adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.
h. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit -breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit -breaker contacts.
i. Alarm Switch: Single -pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker
trips.
j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit -breaker operation; key shall be
removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
k. Zone -Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground -fault
protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.
I. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single
unit.
m. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment for locking circuit breaker handle in off
position.
n. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment for holding circuit breaker handle in on position.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1. Fuses, and Spare -Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section
"Fuses."
2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: One normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with
switch handle operation.
2.7 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
3. Liebert Corporation.
4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
6. Or approved equal.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7

B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state, parallel -
connected, non -modular type, with sine -wave tracking suppression and filtering modules,
UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-
circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. Accessories:
a. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
b. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
c. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have
been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply
with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For panelboards, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.
5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards
with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field -adjustable, circuit -breaker trip ranges.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space
designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor
space or below slab not on grade.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.
K. Comply with NECA 1
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs
complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate
Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter
to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment:
(1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 9

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated or as specified in Section 260573
"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,
measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the
facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines
and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is
not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 10

SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch -circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio -frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.3
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1. Receptacles for Owner -Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre -marking
wall plates.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality -control test reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.7
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no less than one.
2. Floor Service Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no less than one.
3. Poke -Through, Fire -Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets installed,
but no fewer than two.
4. TVSS Receptacles: One for every 10 of each type installed, but no fewer than two of each
type.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

2.2 GENERAL WIRING -DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under
the following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
2.3 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
B. Hospital -Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL8310 (single), HBL8300 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 8301 (single), 8300H (duplex).
2. Description: Single -piece, rivetless, nickel -plated, all -brass grounding system. Nickel -plated,
brass mounting strap.
C. Isolated -Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; IG5362.
b. Leviton; 5362-IG.
c. Pass & Seymour; IG5362.
2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the
green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from
mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on
removable parts.
D. Tamper -Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; TR8300.
b. Hubbell; HBL8300SGA.
c. Leviton; 8300-SGG.
d. Pass & Seymour; TR63H.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2

2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric
Locations" Section.
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description:
1. Straight blade, feed -through type.
2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides
proper GFCI protection.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; VGF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2095.
C. Hospital -Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; VGFH2O.
b. Hubbell; HFR8300HL.
c. Leviton; 7899-HG.
d. Pass & Seymour; 2095HG.
2.5 TVSS RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 1449, with
integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal -oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp -level rating of 400
volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to
IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.
2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate
device is "active" or "no longer in service."
B. Duplex TVSS Convenience Receptacles:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5362BLS.
b. Hubbell; HBL5362SA.
c. Leviton; 5380.
2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
C. Isolated -Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; IG5362BLS.
b. Hubbell; IG5362SA.
c. Leviton; 5380-IG.
2. Description:
a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3

2.6
2.7
b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw
terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation
shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
D. Hospital -Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 8300BLS.
b. Hubbell; HBL8362SA.
c. Leviton; 8380.
2. Description:
a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
b. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
c. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Isolated -Ground, Hospital -Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; IG8300HGBLS.
b. Hubbell; IG8362SA.
c. Leviton; 8380-IG.
2. Description:
a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
b. Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd.
c. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw
terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation
shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES
A. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cooper Crouse -Hinds.
b. EGS/Appleton Electric.
c. Killark; a division of Hubbell Inc.
TWIST -LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; CWL520R.
b. Hubbell; HBL2310.
c. Leviton; 2310.
d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
B. Isolated -Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4

a. Hubbell; IG2310.
b. Leviton; 2310-IG.
2. Description:
a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw
terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation
shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
2.8 PENDANT CORD -CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description:
1. Matching, locking -type plug and receptacle body connector.
2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596.
3. Body: Nylon, with screw -open, cable -gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable
grip.
4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire -mesh type made of high -strength galvanized -steel wire
strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding
connector.
2.9 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description:
1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment
being connected.
2. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded -copper conductors, with Type SOW-Ajacket; with green -
insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.
3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.10 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Single Pole:
(1) Cooper; AH1221.
(2) Hubbell; HBL1221.
(3) Leviton; 1221-2.
(4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.
b. Two Pole:
(1) Cooper; AH1222.
(2) Hubbell; HBL1222.
(3) Leviton; 1222-2.
(4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.
c. Three Way:
(1) Cooper; AH1223.
(2) Hubbell; HBL1223.
(3) Leviton; 1223-2.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5

(4) Pass & Seymour; CS1320AC3.
d. Four Way:
(1) Cooper; AH1224.
(2) Hubbell; HBL1224.
(3) Leviton; 1224-2.
(4) Pass & Seymour; CS1320AC4.
C. Pilot -Light Switches, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.
b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V.
c. Leviton; 1221-LH1.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1 RPL7 for 277 V.
2. Description: Single pole, with neon -lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."
D. Key -Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; AH 1221 L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
2. Description: Single pole, with factory -supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
E. Single -Pole, Double -Throw, Momentary -Contact, Center -off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use
with mechanically held lighting contactors.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557.
c. Leviton; 1257.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
F. Key -Operated, Single -Pole, Double -Throw, Momentary -Contact, Center -off Switches: 120/277 V,
20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory -supplied key in lieu of switch
handle.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.
c. Leviton; 1257L.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251 L.
2.11 WALL -BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full -wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on -off switches, with
audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single -pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square -law dimming curve. On -off
switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.
D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low -end dimming; dimmer -ballast combination capable of consistent
dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2.12 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin -finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring -loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather -
resistant, die-cast aluminum or thermoplastic with lockable cover.
2.13 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush -type, dual -service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Round, solid brass with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening with two
modular, keyed, color -coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable.
2.14 POKE -THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
3. Square D/Schneider Electric.
4. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
5. Wiremold/Legrand.
B. Description:
1. Factory -fabricated and -wired assembly of below -floor junction box with multi -channeled,
through -floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly.
2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.
3. Service Outlet Assembly: Pedestal type with services indicated or Flush type with two
simplex receptacles and space for two RJ-45 jacks.
4. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.
5. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor -ceiling assembly.
6. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating of
floor.
7. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors and a
minimum of two, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data communication cables.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 7

2.15 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
2. Wiremold/Legrand.
B. Description:
1. Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory -wired multioutlet harness.
2. Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete,
matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish or PVC.
D. Multioutlet Harness:
1. Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles complying with
NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
2. Receptacle Spacing: 6 inches, 9 inches, or 12 inches.
3. Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, single circuit or two circuit, connecting
alternating receptacles.
2.16 SERVICE POLES
A. Description:
1. Factory -assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from
distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor.
2. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at
least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data
communication cabling.
3. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to
ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.
4. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard painted finish and trim combination.
5. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a
minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 3 or 5 voice and data communication cables.
6. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R units.
7. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Blank insert with bushed cable opening with two
RJ-45 Category 5e jacks.
2.17 FINISHES
A. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray or White, unless otherwise
indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
3. TVSS Devices: Blue.
4. Isolated -Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.
B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 8

B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article
300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs
that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
2. Install hospital -grade receptacles in patient -care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at
the top.
3. Mount bottom of receptacles at 16" in commercial/office environment. Mount bottom of
receptacles at 24" in industrial (water plant, wastewater plant, pump stations, etc.). Mount
counter top receptacles at 4" above counter top.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 9

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Lighting Switch Height: Mount top of switch at 48" above finished floor.
I. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
J. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped or
engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or
tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or
illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones,
and retest as specified above.
C. Test straight blade convenience outlets in patient -care areas and hospital -grade convenience
outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall
be not less than 4 oz.
D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 10

SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to
this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from
the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data
on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
6. Include time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
C. Field quality -control reports.
1. Test procedures used.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's field service report.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
2. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
three of each size and type.
2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from
single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2

1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
for equipment access doors and panels.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable
handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable
handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable
handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
E. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before
switchblades open.
6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
8. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
9. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; As indicated.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
E. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before
switchblades open.
5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; As indicated.
2.3 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy -Duty, Single -Throw Fusible Switch: 240 or 600-V ac, ampacity as indicated;
UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated
fuses; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed
position.
C. Type HD, Heavy -Duty, Single -Throw Non -fusible Switch: 240 or 600-V ac, ampacity as indicated;
UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three
padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent
inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than
specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully
inserted into the receptacle.
E. Receptacle: Polarized, three-phase, four -wire receptacle (fourth wire connected to enclosure
ground lug).
2.4 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
3. Littelfuse, Inc.
B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting
and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4

C. Switches: Three -pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse
block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed
position.
D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and
secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,
connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.
E. Accessories:
1. Oiltight key switch for key -to -test function.
2. Oiltight red ON pilot light.
3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.
4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and
closed.
5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.
6. Three -pole, double -throw, fire -safety and alarm relay; [[120-V ac] [24-V dc]] coil voltage.
7. Three -pole, double -throw, fire -alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.
2.5 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting
capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -
breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D. Adjustable, Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -mounted, field -
adjustable trip setting.
E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field -replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following
field -adjustable settings:
1. Instantaneous trip.
2. Long- and short -time pickup levels.
3. Long- and short -time time adjustments.
4. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and Izt response.
F. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let -through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal -magnetic trip element with integral limiter -style fuse
listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse
compartment door.
H. Ground -Fault, Circuit -Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations
with Class A ground -fault protection (6-mA trip).
I. Ground -Fault, Equipment -Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground -fault
protection (30-mA trip).
J. Features and Accessories:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting
loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge lighting circuits.
4. Ground -Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self -powered type with
mechanical ground -fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -
to -test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero -sequence current
transformer/sensor.
5. Communication Capability: Circuit -breaker -mounted communication module with functions
and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in Division 26
Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil -clearing contact.
7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time
delay.
8. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit -
breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit -breaker contacts.
9. Alarm Switch: One [[NO] [NC]] contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.
10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit -breaker operation; key shall be
removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
11. Zone -Selective Interlocking: Integral with [[electronic] [ground -fault]] trip unit; for interlocking
ground -fault protection function.
12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
13. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self -powered.
2.6 MOLDED -CASE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high -set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit
withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.
C. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Ground -Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote -mounted and powered type with
mechanical ground -fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -
to -test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero -sequence current
transformer/sensor.
4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil -clearing contact.
5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time
delay.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic switch
contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.
7. Alarm Switch: One NC contact that operates only when switch has tripped.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6

8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be removable
only when switch is in off position.
9. Zone -Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground -fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking ground -
fault protection function.
10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self -powered.
2.7 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R.
3. Wash -Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7 or Type 9.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 7

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker.
Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration
record for device.
4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges.
END OF SECTION
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 8

SECTION 262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CPT:
Control power transformer.
B. MCCB: Molded -case circuit breaker.
C. MCP:
Motor circuit protector.
D. N.C.:
Normally closed.
E. N.O.:
Normally open.
F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
G. SCR:
Silicon -controlled rectifier.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from
the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections,
details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.
1. Show tabulations of the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Factory -installed devices.
c. Nameplate legends.
d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs in
combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in
combination controllers.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
C. Field quality -control reports.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 1

D. Load -Current and Overload -Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and
arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full -load currents.
E. Load -Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have
been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload
protection suit actual motors to be protected.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip
settings.
3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable overload relays.
4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced -voltage
solid-state controllers.
1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than three of each size and type.
2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than two of each size and type.
3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic controller installed.
5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive
substances, and physical damage.
B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per
controller.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 2

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical
systems.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner's written permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including
conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor -
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 FULL -VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A. General Requirements for Full -Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose,
Class A.
B. Motor -Starting Switches: "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button action; marked to
show whether unit is off or on.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: As indicated.
3. Surface mounting.
4. Red pilot light.
C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button
action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: As indicated.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 3

3. Overload Relays: Inverse -time -current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping
characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor;
external reset push button; bimetallic type.
4. Surface mounting.
5. Red pilot light.
D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick -make, quick -break" toggle or push-button
action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: As indicated.
3. Overload Relays: Inverse -time -current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping
characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full -load current of
actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push
button; bimetallic type.
4. Surface mounting.
5. Red pilot light.
6. N.O. and N.C. auxiliary contact.
E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: As indicated.
3. Contactor Coils: Pressure -encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.
a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line -voltage rating,
manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double -break, silver -cadmium oxide; assembled to allow
inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses,
with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot,
indicating, and control devices.
a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.
6. Bimetallic Overload Relays:
a. Inverse -time -current characteristic.
b. Class 10, Class 20 or Class 30 tripping characteristic.
c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor
and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 4

d. Ambient compensated.
e. Automatic resetting.
7. Solid -State Overload Relay:
a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.
b. Sensors in each phase.
c. Class 10, Class 20, Class 10/20 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against
voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.
d. Class II ground -fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on
starting.
e. Analog communication module.
8. N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.
9. External overload reset push button.
F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory -assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD,
and disconnecting means.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower -rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate indicated fuses.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
4. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower -rated, nonfusible switch.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
5. MCP Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents, instantaneous -only circuit breaker with front -mounted, field -adjustable,
short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked -rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
d. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.
e. Current -limiting+ module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to
100 kA.
6. MCCB Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents; thermal -magnetic MCCB, with inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 5

b. Front -mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and
larger.
c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.
e. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.
2.2 REDUCED -VOLTAGE MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS
A. General Requirements for Reduced -Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2,
general purpose, Class A; closed -transition; adjustable time delay on transition.
B. Reduced -Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Reduced voltage, electrically held.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration:
a. Wye -Delta Controller: Four contactors, with a three-phase starting resistor/reactor bank.
b. Part -Winding Controller: Separate START and RUN contactors, field -selectable for 1/2-
or 2/3-winding start mode, with either six- or nine -lead motors; with separate overload
relays for starting and running sequences.
c. Autotransformer Reduced -Voltage Controller: Medium -duty service, with integral
overtemperature protection; taps for starting at 50, 65, and 80 percent of line voltage; two
START and one RUN contactors.
3. Contactor Coils: Pressure -encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.
a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line -voltage rating,
manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double -break, silver -cadmium oxide; assembled to allow
inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses,
with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot,
indicating, and control devices.
a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.
6. Melting Alloy Overload Relays:
a. Inverse -time -current characteristic.
b. Class 10, Class 20, or Class 30 tripping characteristic.
c.Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor
and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
7. Bimetallic Overload Relays:
a. Inverse -time -current characteristic.
b. Class 10, Class 20, or Class 30 tripping characteristic.
c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor
and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
d. Ambient compensated.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 6

e. Automatic resetting.
8. Solid -State Overload Relay:
a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.
b. Sensors in each phase.
c. Class 10, Class 20, or Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect
motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.
d. Class II ground -fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on
starting.
e. Analog communication module.
9. N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.
10. External overload reset push button.
C. Combination Reduced -Voltage Magnetic Controller: Factory -assembled combination of reduced -
voltage magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower -rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate indicated fuses.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
3. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower -rated, nonfusible switch.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
4. MCP Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents, instantaneous -only circuit breaker with front -mounted, field -adjustable,
short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked -rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
d. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.
e. Current -limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to
100 kA.
5. MCCB Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents; thermal -magnetic MCCB, with inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
b. Front -mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and
larger.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 7

c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.
e. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.
2.3 REDUCED -VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE CONTROLLERS
A. General Requirements for Reduced -Voltage Solid -State Controllers: Comply with UL 508.
B. Reduced -Voltage Solid -State Controllers: An integrated unit with power SCRs, heat sink,
microprocessor logic board, door -mounted digital display and keypad, bypass contactor, and
overload relay; suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, Design B, polyphase, medium induction
motors.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: Standard duty; nonreversible or reversible.
3. Starting Mode: Voltage ramping, Current limit, Torque control, or Torque control with voltage
boost, as indicated, and starting mode shall be field selectable.
4. Stopping Mode: Coast to stop, Adjustable torque deceleration, or Adjustable braking, and
stopping mode shall be field selectable.
5. Shorting (Bypass) Contactor: Operates automatically when full voltage is applied to motor,
and bypasses the SCRs. Solid-state controller protective features shall remain active when
the shorting contactor is in the bypass mode.
6. Shorting and Input Isolation Contactor Coils: Pressure -encapsulated type; manufacturer's
standard operating voltage, matching control power or line voltage, depending on contactor
size and line -voltage rating. Provide coil transient suppressors.
7. Logic Board: Identical for all ampere ratings and voltage classes, with environmental
protective coating.
8. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses,
with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot,
indicating, and control devices.
a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.
9. Adjustable acceleration -rate control using voltage or current ramp, and adjustable starting
torque control with up to 400 percent current limitation for 20 seconds.
10. SCR bridge shall consist of at least two SCRs per phase, providing stable and smooth
acceleration with external feedback from the motor or driven equipment.
11. Keypad, front accessible; for programming the controller parameters, functions, and features;
shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following functions:
a. Adjusting motor full -load amperes, as a percentage of the controller's rating.
b. Adjusting current limitation on starting, as a percentage of the motor full -load current
rating.
c. Adjusting linear acceleration and deceleration ramps, in seconds.
d. Initial torque, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque.
e. Adjusting torque limit, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque.
f. Adjusting maximum start time, in seconds.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 8

g. Adjusting voltage boost, as a percentage of the nominal supply voltage.
h. Selecting stopping mode, and adjusting parameters.
i. Selecting motor thermal overload protection class between 5 and 30.
j. Activating and de -activating protection modes.
k. Selecting or activating communication modes.
12. Digital display, front accessible; for showing motor, controller, and fault status; shall be
manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following:
a. Controller Condition: Ready, starting, running, stopping.
b. Motor Condition: Amperes, voltage, power factor, power, and thermal state.
c. Fault Conditions: Controller thermal fault, motor overload alarm and trip, motor
underload, overcurrent, shorted SCRs, line or phase loss, phase reversal, and line
frequency over or under normal.
13. Controller Diagnostics and Protection:
a. Microprocessor -based thermal protection system for monitoring SCR and motor thermal
characteristics, and providing controller overtemperature and motor -overload alarm and
trip; settings selectable via the keypad.
b. Protection from line -side reverse phasing; line -side and motor -side phase loss; motor
jam, stall, and underload conditions; and line frequency over or under normal.
c. Input isolation contactor that opens when the controller diagnostics detect a faulted solid-
state component or when the motor is stopped.
d. Shunt trip that opens the disconnecting means when the controller diagnostics detect a
faulted solid-state component.
14. Remote Output Features:
a. All outputs prewired to terminal blocks.
b. Form C status contacts that change state when controller is running.
c. Form C alarm contacts that change state when a fault condition occurs.
15. Optional Features:
a. Analog output for field -selectable assignment of motor operating characteristics; 0 to 10-
V do or 4 to 20-mA dc, as indicated.
b. Additional field -assignable Form C contacts, as indicated, for alarm outputs.
c. Surge suppressors in solid-state power circuits providing three-phase protection against
damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.
d. Full -voltage bypass contactor operating manually, with NORMAL/BYPASS selector
switch. Power contacts shall be totally enclosed, double break, and silver -cadmium
oxide; and Melting Alloy Overload Relays:
(1) Inverse -time -current characteristic.
(2) Class 10, Class 20, or Class 30 tripping characteristic.
(3) Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected
motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
f. Bimetallic Overload Relays:
(1) Inverse -time -current characteristic.
(2) Class 10, Class 20, or Class 30 tripping characteristic.
(3) Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected
motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 9

(4) Ambient compensated.
(5) Automatic resetting.
g. Solid -State Overload Relay:
(1) Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.
(2) Sensors in each phase.
(3) Class 10, Class 20, or Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to
(4) Class II ground -fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on
starting.
(5) Analog communication module.
h. N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.
i. External overload reset push button.
C. Combination Reduced -Voltage Solid -State Controller: Factory -assembled combination of
reduced -voltage solid-state controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower -rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate indicated fuses.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
3. MCP Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents, instantaneous -only circuit breaker with front -mounted, field -adjustable,
short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked -rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
d. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.
e. Current -limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to
100 kA.
4. MCCB Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents; thermal -magnetic MCCB, with inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
b. Front -mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and
larger.
c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.
e. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 10

5. Molded -Case Switch Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with in -line fuse block for Class J or L power
fuses (depending on ampere rating), providing an interrupting capacity to comply with
available fault currents; MCCB with fixed, high -set instantaneous trip only.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with molded -case switch handle.
d. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when molded -case switch has tripped.
2.4 MULTISPEED MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS
A. General Requirements for Multispeed Magnetic Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general
purpose, Class A.
B. Multispeed Magnetic Controllers: Two speed, full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Configuration: Nonreversing; consequent pole.
3. Contactor Coils: Pressure -encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.
a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line -voltage rating,
manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, silver -cadmium oxide; assembled to allow
inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses,
with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot,
indicating, and control devices.
a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.
6. Compelling relays shall ensure that motor will start only at low speed.
7. Accelerating timer relays shall ensure properly timed acceleration through speeds lower than
that selected.
8. Decelerating timer relays shall ensure automatically timed deceleration through each speed.
9. Antiplugging timer relays shall ensure a time delay when transferring from FORWARD to
REVERSE and back.
10. Melting Alloy Overload Relays:
a. Inverse -time -current characteristic.
b. Class 10, Class 20 or Class 30 tripping characteristic.
c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor
and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
11. Bimetallic Overload Relays:
a. Inverse -time -current characteristic.
b. Class 10, Class 20 or Class 30 tripping characteristic.
c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full -load current of actual protected motor
and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 11

d. Ambient compensated.
e. Automatic resetting.
12. Solid -State Overload Relay:
a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.
b. Sensors in each phase.
c. Class 10, Class 20, Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect
motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.
d. Class II ground -fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on
starting.
e. Analog communication module.
13. N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.
14. External overload reset push button.
C. Combination Multispeed Magnetic Controller: Factory -assembled combination of reduced -
voltage magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower -rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate indicated fuses.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
3. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower -rated, nonfusible switch.
b. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
4. MCP Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents, instantaneous -only circuit breaker with front -mounted, field -adjustable,
short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked -rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
d. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.
e. Current -limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to
100 kA.
5. MCCB Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available
fault currents; thermal -magnetic MCCB, with inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 12

b. Front -mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and
larger.
c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.
d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.
e. N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.
2.5 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
3. Wash -Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12.
6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: Type 7 or Type 9.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in
controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.
a. Push Buttons: Shielded types; momentary as indicated.
b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated.
c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
2. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; resettable.
3. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or minus
two percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide selector switches with an off position.
B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).
C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time -delay relays.
D. Phase -Failure, Phase -Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing
circuit with isolated output contacts for hard -wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage,
overvoltage, and time -delay settings.
E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4
or Type 4X enclosures (as indicated) installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces
subject to humidity and temperature swings.
F. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 3R, Type 4X, or
Type 12 enclosures (as indicated) installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to
humidity and temperature swings.
G. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to
direct and extended sun exposure.
H. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.
I. Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the load side of overload relays.
J. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; wired.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, for compliance with requirements
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 13

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Wall -Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural -steel
channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with
Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Floor -Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch nominal -thickness concrete
base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -
Place Concrete."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
E. Install fuses in each fusible -switch enclosed controller.
F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26
Section "Fuses."
G. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full -load
amperes after motors have been installed.
H. Install, connect, and fuse thermal -protector monitoring relays furnished with motor -driven
equipment.
Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the load side of overload relays. If
connected to the load side of overload relays, adjust overload heater sizes to accommodate the
reduced motor full -load currents.
Comply with NECA 1
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
3. Label each enclosure -mounted control and pilot device.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers, remote devices and facility's central control system.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect selector switches and other automatic -control selection devices where applicable.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 14

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic -control devices that
have no safety functions when switch is in manual -control position.
2. Connect selector switches with enclosed -controller circuit in both manual and automatic
positions for safety -type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high -
temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and
adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed -controller element, component, connecting
motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
3. Test continuity of each circuit.
4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor
nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Engineer before starting
the motor(s).
5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
7. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi -pole enclosed controller.
Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
multi -pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration
record for device.
9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 15

G. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken and observations after remedial action.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field -adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time -delay relays, timers, and overload -relay pickup
and trip ranges.
B. Adjust overload -relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to
the load side of the overload relays.
C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal -magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable
instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full -load ampere
ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If
tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping.
Do not exceed eight times the motor full -load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient
motors). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before
increasing settings.
D. Set the taps on reduced -voltage autotransformer controllers at 50, 65 or 80 percent.
E. Set field -adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences
in reduced -voltage solid-state controllers.
F. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to
Substantial Completion.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.
END OF SECTION
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 16

SECTION 263600
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to
this Section.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material
lists for each switch specified.
1. Single -Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch,
power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch
and bypass/isolation switch.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
C. Field quality -control test reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay -setting and calibration instructions, including
software, where applicable.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and
emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of
notification.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical
Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to
supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain all transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with NFPA 99.
H. Comply with NFPA 110.
I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary electrical service:
1. Notify Engineer no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Contactor Transfer Switches:
a. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.
b. GE Zenith Controls.
c. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.
d. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
e. Russelectric, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER -SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system
transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere
rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault -current protection, rating of switch and trip unit
combination shall exceed indicated fault -current value at installation location.
B. Solid -State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better
over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
C. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage -surge
withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall
meet or exceed voltage -impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
D. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric -
motor -operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 2

E. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -rated current
between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded -case switches or circuit breakers or insulated -case circuit -
breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load -current switching. Conventional
automatic transfer -switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.
F. Neutral Switching. Where four -pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched
simultaneously with phase poles.
G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for oversize
neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed.
Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and other units indicated,
with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within enclosure to control heater.
Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.
1. Float type rated 2 A.
2. Ammeter to display charging current.
3. Fused ac inputs and do outputs.
K. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for
communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control
panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.
L. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either
by color -code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color -
coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.
2. Power -Terminal Arrangement and Field -Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
M. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R or Type 12 (as indicated), complying
with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double -throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops
during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources
energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically
disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.
D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical
operator during manual operation.
E. Signal -Before -Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates
in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
F. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and
control panel.
G. Transfer Switches Based on Molded -Case -Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1,
UL 489, and UL 869A.
H. Automatic Closed -Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and
characteristics:
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 3

1. Fully automatic make -before -break operation.
2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power sources
not exceeding 100 ms.
3. Initiation of No -Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in -phase monitor and sensors confirming
both sources are present and acceptable.
a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator.
b. Controls ensure that closed -transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2
sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5
percent maximum voltage difference.
4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break -before -make transfer.
In -Phase Monitor: Factory -wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two
sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference
between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15
electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is
initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of
nominal voltage.
Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors
before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer.
Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch. Time
delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and
settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling motor -control circuit inrush and seal currents
are rated for actual currents to be encountered.
K. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position
arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional,
time -controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds
minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both
transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live.
L. Automatic Transfer -Switch Features:
1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase -to -ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set
for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal -source voltage sensing to delay transfer and
engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.
3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage
shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent.
Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for
pickup at 95 percent.
4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory
set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage
of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
5. Test Switch: Simulate normal -source failure.
6. Switch -Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
7. Source -Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer -switch normal- and
emergency -source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source
Available."
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 4

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single -pole, double -throw contacts for
each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer
switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal
source. Pilot light indicates override status.
10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally
open; rated 10 A at 32-V do minimum.
11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote
engine -generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.
12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set
for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine -generator controls after
retransfer of load to normal source.
13. Engine -Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable -time switch starts engine generator
and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down
engine after a preset cool -down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable
from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings
are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool -down period.
Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load
transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available.
2.4 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES
A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to load,
isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following features
for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:
1. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an
arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While
isolated, interlocks prevent transfer -switch operation, except for testing or maintenance.
2. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and
accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.
3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short -Circuit Withstand Ratings:
Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase
arrangement and number of poles.
4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic
transfer -switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.
5. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer -switch isolation can be performed by 1
person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.
6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall
describe operating instructions.
7. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front
without removing other parts or main power conductors.
C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory -installed
copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit
current.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 5

2.5 NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Operation: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate
Source." Switch shall be capable of transferring load in either direction with either or both
sources energized.
B. Operation: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate
Source." In addition, removable manual handle provides quick -make, quick -break manual -
switching action. Switch shall be capable of electrically or manually transferring load in either
direction with either or both sources energized. Control circuit disconnects from electrical
operator during manual operation.
C. Double -Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during
switching sequence.
D. Nonautomatic Transfer -Switch Accessories:
1. Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
2. Source -Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer -switch normal- and
alternate -source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Alternate Source
Available."
3. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: One set of normally closed contacts for each switch position,
rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
2.6 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM
A. Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated
transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following:
1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer -switch
controls.
2. Switch position.
3. Switch in test mode.
4. Failure of communication link.
B. Annunciator Panel: LED -lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch.
1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored.
2. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and identity of load
it serves.
3. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lamp Test: Push -to -test or lamp -test switch on front panel.
2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Functional Description: Include the following functions for indicated transfer switches:
1. Indication of sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer -
switch controls.
2. Indication of switch position.
3. Indication of switch in test mode.
4. Indication of failure of digital communication link.
5. Key -switch or user -code access to control functions of panel.
6. Control of switch -test initiation.
7. Control of switch operation in either direction.
8. Control of time -delay bypass for transfer to normal source.
B. Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or communication link shall not affect
functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure of communication link, automatic
transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained operation. Automatic transfer -
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 6

switch sensing, controlling, or operating function shall not depend on remote panel for proper
operation.
C. Remote Annunciation and Control Panel: Solid-state components. Include the following features:
1. Controls and indicating lights grouped together for each transfer switch.
2. Label each indicating light control group. Indicate transfer switch it controls, location of
switch, and load it serves.
3. Digital Communication Capability: Matched to that of transfer switches supervised.
4. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure
proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time -delay settings for
compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with
NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according
to seismic -restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Floor -Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more
than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise
indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to
Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E. Set field -adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and
communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase
raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with insulation -
resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and
procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum
resistance.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 7

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers,
covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each
switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase -to -ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
c. Verify time -delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer -switch
operations.
f. Perform contact -resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500
microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time
delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool -down and
shutdown.
Ground -Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground -fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
D. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with insulation -
resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and
procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum
resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers,
covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each
switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase -to -ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
c. Verify time -delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer -switch
operations.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 8

f. Perform contact -resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500
microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time
delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool -down and
shutdown.
Ground -Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground -fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
E. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested
component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
H. Prepare test and inspection reports.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and
connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11
months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and
that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer
to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 10

SECTION 265619
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to
this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color rendering index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
B. Product Certificates: For each type of the following:
1. Luminaire.
2. Photoelectric relay.
C. Sample warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with luminaire
installation.
B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire
installation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B. Store poles on decay -resistant -treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C. Retain factory -applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles
with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate,
erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period.
Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized
repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.
1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1

3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish,
materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less
than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of
hazard by an NRTL.
C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.
E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.
F. CRI of 80. CCT of 4100 K.
G. L70 minimum lamp life of 35,000 hours.
H. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
I. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use and in enclosed locations.
J. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.
K. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of luminaire
from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Refer to Drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion -resistant aluminum or Stainless steel. Form and support to
prevent warping and sagging.
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent
doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping
and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing
lenses.
D. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other
changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging -resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion
lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
G. Housings:
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 2

1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.
2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested
luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.
C. Factory -Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual
for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying
with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard -coat wax.
3. Class I, Clear -Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical
Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm
or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
4. Class I, Color -Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin;
Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally
colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker), complying with
AAMA 611.
a. Color: Bronze.
2.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.
1. Wind -Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis
Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.
2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires
and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole
selection strength analysis.
B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements.
Use stainless -steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion -resistant items compatible with support
components.
1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Anchor -Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D. Handhole: Oval -shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by
stainless -steel captive screws. Provide on all, except wood poles.
E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole -base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
2.6 STEEL POLES
A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig;
one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: As scheduled.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 3

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
B. Steel Mast Arms: Single -arm, Truss or Davit type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate.
Material and finish same as pole.
C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.
1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted adapter,
then bolted together with stainless -steel bolts.
2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
3. Match pole material and finish.
D. Pole -Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on
opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.
F. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at
midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support
grip.
G. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching
grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through
handhole.
H. Cable Support Grip: Wire -mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.
I. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of
pole.
J. Prime -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting.
K. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot -dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
L. Factory -Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to
remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds
and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from
uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or
with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion
protection.
3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer
and two finish coats of high -gloss, high -build polyurethane enamel.
2.7 ALUMINUM POLES
A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/13 429M, Alloy 6063-T6
with access handhole in pole wall.
B. Poles: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhole in pole
wall.
1. Shape: As Scheduled.
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
C. Pole -Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 4

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching
grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through
handhole.
E. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter
fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless -steel bolts.
1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
2. Finish: Same as luminaire.
F. Prime -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting.
G. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying
with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard -coat wax.
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical
Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018
mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally
colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with
AAMA 611.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NECA 1
B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application
and approved by manufacturer.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.
E. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and re-lamping.
3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent
of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
F. Wall -Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to a minimum 1/8 inch backing plate attached to wall structural members.
G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.
H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.
I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.
J. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric
device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.
K. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" and 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and
wiring methods.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 5

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and
their mounting provisions on the pole.
B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt templates furnished by
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in
Division 03.
C. Foundation -Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
approved by manufacturer.
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout
firmly packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated.
4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to
drain condensation from interior of pole.
D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar
metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In
concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe -wrapping plastic tape applied with
a 50 percent overlap.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
C. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards.
END OF SECTION
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 6

SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the work included in site clearing to prepare the project site for construction
operations.
1.2 CLEARING
A. Remove and dispose of trees, snags, stumps, shrubs, brush, limbs, sticks, branches, and other
vegetative growth. Remove rocks, tiles, and lumps of concrete. Remove all evidence of their presence
from the surface. Remove and dispose of trash piles; rubbish; and fencing (where indicated). Protect
structures and piping above and below ground, trees, shrubs, and vegetative growth and fencing
which are not designated for removal.
1.3 STRIPPING
A. Remove and dispose of topsoil to a depth of 3 inches, grass and grass roots, and other
objectionable material remaining after clearing from the areas designated to be stripped.
B. Retain topsoil material onsite for dressing backfill areas before planting.
1.4 GRUBBING
A. After clearing and stripping, remove and dispose of wood or root matter, including stumps, logs,
trunks, roots, or root systems greater than 1 inch in diameter or thickness to a depth of 12 inches
below the ground surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TREES AND SHRUBBERY
A. Existing trees, shrubbery, and other vegetative material may not be shown in the drawings. Inspect the
site as to the nature, location, size, and extent of vegetative material to be removed or preserved, as
specified herein. Preserve in place trees unless specifically called out to be removed or unless tree
removal is approved by Engineer.
2.2 PRESERVATION OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND OTHER PLANT MATERIAL
A. Save and protect plant materials (trees, shrubbery, and plants) beyond the limits of clearing and
grubbing from damage resulting from the work. No filling, excavating, trenching, or stockpiling of
materials will be permitted within the drip line of these plant materials. The drip line is defined as a
circle drawn by extending a line vertically to the ground from the outermost branches of a plant or
group of plants. To prevent soil compaction within the drip line area, no equipment will be permitted
within this area.
SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1

B. When trees are close together, restrict entry to area within drip line by fencing. In areas where no
fence is erected, protect the trunks of trees 2 inches or greater in diameter by encircling the trunk
entirely with boards held securely by 12-gauge wire and staples. This protection shall extend from
ground level to a height of 6 feet.
C. Cut and remove tree branches where necessary for construction. Remove branches other than those
required for a balanced appearance of any tree. Treat cuts with a tree sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CLEARING LIMITS
A. Clear, strip, and grub excavation and embankment areas associated with new structures, slabs, walks,
and roadways, and as shown on the Plans.
B. Limits of clearing, stripping, and grubbing:
1. Excavation, Excluding Trenches: 5 feet beyond tops of cut slopes.
2. Trench excavation for piping and electrical conduits: 3 feet from edge of trench.
3. Earth Fill: 5 feet beyond toe of permanent fill as indicated in the drawings.
4. Structures: 15 feet beyond footings.
5. Streets, Roadways, and Parking Areas: 10 feet from toe of fill or top of cut.
6. Sidewalks: 2 feet beyond edges.
7. Landscaped Areas: 2 feet beyond areas designated to receive landscaping.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF CLEARING AND GRUBBING DEBRIS
A. Do not burn combustible materials. Remove cleared and grubbed material from the worksite and
dispose.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF STRIPPINGS
A. Remove stripped material and dispose offsite, except topsoil.
B. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 4 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation
to remain. Fence supports to be 8 feet o.c. maximum.
1. At vegetation removal limits.
2. Around trees to remain within vegetation removal limits; locate no closer to tree than a 12-inch
radius per caliper inch of tree to remain, taken at +12 inches from finished grade.
3. Around other vegetation to remain within vegetation removal limits.
4. Do not allow any construction activities, storage of materials, or the accumulation of debris or
garbage to occur within protective fences around vegetation to remain.
C. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or
destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace trees as selected by Landscape
Architect on an inch per inch basis at no cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2

SECTION 312000
EARTH MOVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide all operations necessary to complete site clearing; stockpiling; dewatering; excavations;
embankments and back -filling; subgrade preparation; aggregate base; placement of topsoil; and finish
grading.
B. Construct and maintain all temporary drainage swales, berms and diversions; furnish, operate, and
maintain all necessary pumping and other equipment for dewatering. After above items serve their
purpose, remove them and restore site.
C. Excavation will be unclassified, and the term "excavation" shall include all material encountered
without regard to its physical properties, characteristics or composition.
1.2 LIMITS OF THE WORK
A. Earthwork shall not extend beyond the areas of excavation, embankment or other construction shown
on the drawings.
B. Contractor shall install construction fencing or other visible barrier around trees and other areas that
need to be protected from the earthwork prior moving equipment into that area.
C. Excavations for new construction shall not undercut existing footings, foundations, or surfacing.
D. Blasting with any type of explosive will not be permitted, unless shown otherwise in these
Specifications.
1.3 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
A. Shoring, sheeting, and bracing shall be provided as required to protect the work and workmen from
damage or injury by caving or sloughing.
B. Laws and ordinances regulating health and safety measures shall be practiced.
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. None required unless material gradations are requested by Owner's Representative.
C. Material Gradations.
D. Standard Proctor Curves for Site and Borrow Materials.
E. Test results for all proposed imported materials. Test results shall include the Unified Soil
Classification System designation, the Liquid Limit (ILL), and the Plasticity Index (PI) for each material.
F. The Contractor shall provide a minimum 3-gallon sample of each proposed material.
1.4 COMPACTION TESTING
A. Sample backfill materials for the density testing shall be taken according to ASTM D75.
B. Determine the density of soil in place by the sand cone method ASTM D 1556; rubber -balloon
method ASTM D2167; or nuclear method ASTM D 2922.
C. Compaction is the calculated ratio of the in -place (dry) density to the laboratory maximum (dry) density
expressed as a percentage.
D. Determine laboratory moisture -density relations of soils according to the ASTM test method identified
in the specific subsection.
E. If the Owner is responsible for compaction testing, the Contractor shall pay the costs of any retesting
of work not conforming to specifications.
F. The following table identifies the compaction required based on the location of the soil.
LOCATION
COMPACTION DENSITY
Under paved areas, sidewalks and piping
90% of ASTM D 1557 or 95% of ASTM D698
Unpaved areas
85% of ASTM D698
Inside of structures under foundations,
90% of ASTM D1557 or 95% of ASTM D698
under equipment support pads, under
slabs -on -grade and scarified existing
subgrade under fill material
Outside structures next to walls, piers,
90% of ASTM D1557 or 85% of ASTM D698
columns and any other structure exterior
members
Outside structures under equipment
95% of ASTM D1557 or 100% of ASTM D698
support foundations *
Granular fill under base slabs and building
75% relative density per ASTM D4253 and
floor slabs on grade
ASTM D4254
Structural fill for over excavations
90% of ASTM D1557 or 95% of ASTM D698
*Granular fill or flowable fill may be
substituted
1.5 FREQUENCY OF TESTING
A. Tests of the fill materials and embankments will be made at the following approximate rates or as
deemed necessary by the Owner's Representative.
1. One field density test for each 300 square yards of subgrade prior to placing fill.
2. One field density test for each 100 cubic yards of fill placed or each layer of fill for each work
area, whichever is greater.
3. One moisture -density curve for each type material used, as indicated by sieve analysis and
plasticity index.
4. Field density and moisture test may be determined by current ASTM sand cone, or nuclear
methods.
1.6 COMPACTION METHODS
A. Obtain compaction of backfill and embankment by mechanical means. Jetting or flooding is not
permitted. Compact each layer with mechanical tampers. Do not place backfill at hydraulic structures
until hydraulic testing has been completed. Do not place backfill against cantilevered walls until design
strength of concrete has been reached. Do not place backfill against walls supported at the top by floor
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2

slabs until design strength has been reached.
B. Use light vibratory or hand tamping equipment adjacent to the wall. Take particular care compacting
around pipe spools. Do not use heavy compaction equipment within a horizontal distance from the wall
equal to the height of the wall.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Topsoil obtained by stripping and suitable for finish grading where arable soil is required shall be
stockpiled for future use.
B. Material from the excavation is considered to be an acceptable backfill material provided it is free of
vegetal matter, roots, debris, frozen matter, and stones larger than 3 inches in the greatest dimension.
C. Moisture content is to be maintained at a level sufficient to obtain the specified compaction.
2.2 IMPERMEABLE MATERIAL FOR BACKFILL AND EMBANKMENTS
A. Impermeable material for backfill and embankments shall be materials classified as CL, CL/CH, CH, or
MH as defined by the Unified Soil Classification System. This material shall be free of organic matter,
roots, debris, and particles larger than 1-inch in greatest dimension. Submit documentation that
material meets this criteria.
2.3 STRUCTURAL FILL
A. Material for Low Volume Change Structural Fill below structures shall be materials classified as CL,
CL/CH, or CH, as defined by the United Soil Classification System. Material shall have a Liquid Limit of
less than 45 and a Plasticity Index of less than 20. This material shall be free of organic matter, roots,
debris, and particles larger than 1-inch in greatest dimension. Submit documentation that material
meets this criteria. Most on -site material can be used as low volume change structural fill.
B. Material for other Structural Fill below structures shall be materials classified as CL, CL/CH, or CH, as
defined by the United Soil Classification System. Material shall have a Liquid Limit of less than 60, and
a Plasticity Limit of less than 30. Submit documentation that material meets this criteria. Most on -site
material can be used as low volume change structural fill.
2.4 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL
A. Aggregates for granular bases shall be meet Kentucky DOT specifications.
B. Aggregates for granular base shall meet the following gradation:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing by Weight
1 1/2 inch
100
1 inch
95-100
1/2 inch
25-65
3/8 inch
5-55
No. 4
0-10
2.5 WATER FOR COMPACTION
A. Water shall be clean and free of acid, alkali, or organic materials and shall have a pH of 7.0 to 9.0, a
maximum chloride concentration of 500 mg/I. Provide temporary tanker trucks, equipment and
materials to convey water from the source to the point of use.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CLEARING
A. See Section 311000.
3.2 STOCKPILING OF TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be removed to a depth of one foot. The depth of topsoil may vary throughout the project.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled for use in finishing operations.
B. Protect the stockpile with erosion and sediment controls to prevent loss of material leaving the site.
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3

3.3 OPEN EXCAVATIONS AND STOCKPILES
A. Provide diversion ditches and dams upstream of disturbed areas to minimize water from entering
excavated areas. Construct and maintain all temporary drainage swales, berms and diversions until
permanent erosion and sediment controls are established.
B. Provide erosion and sediment BMPs to controls for non -vegetated surfaces.
C. When storing excess excavated material, do not obstruct surface drainage or existing waterways with
the stockpiles.
D. See Section 015713 and comply with the SWPPP.
3.4 DEWATERING
A. Furnish, operate, and maintain all necessary pumping and other equipment for dewatering at all times
during construction to remove and dispose of all water from any source from all excavations.
B. Use methods which will ensure dry excavations and preserve the final lines and grades of the
excavation. Methods used may include well points, sump pumps, suitable rock or gravel drains,
temporary pipelines, or other acceptable means. Dewater so that floor or footing concrete will not be
placed in water. Do not allow water to rise against walls or above footings and slabs.
C. Dispose of water in a manner that will not damage adjacent property or be a menace to public health.
Provide a copy of written permission from the owner of property over which water will pass, become a
nuisance, or become impounded. Water may be discharged into the public road ditches located
adjacent to the project site.
D. Excavations that may entrap snow and subject the subgrade soils to a change in the moisture content
shall not be left open during winter construction shut -down periods. Any snow that does become
entrapped in excavations shall be removed within twenty-four hours.
3.5 GENERAL EXCAVATION
A. Perform all material conditioning and excavations required. Excavation includes the removal and
selected disposal of all excess or unsuitable materials of whatever nature.
B. Excavate to full depth and width required to accommodate the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Remove all materials which become blown or washed into excavations.
C. Contractor shall select sloping or near -vertical trench and structure excavation slopes as he finds
compatible with the soil conditions. The Contractor shall select any shoring which he deems
appropriate and compatible with the soil conditions. These selections shall be exercised as a portion of
the Contractor's responsibility for safety of site operations. The Contractor is responsible for
conforming to OSHA requirements as may be applicable during structural excavating, trench
excavations, site work, and in other areas of the work.
D. Excavated material which meets required specifications may be used in embankments or backfill
when approved and accepted.
E. Remove from the site unsuitable materials such as large rocks, excessive organic materials and
excess excavation material.
3.6 ROCK EXCAVATION
A. All rock excavation shall be under one classification, which shall include solid ledge rock in its natural
location that requires systematic quarrying, drilling and/or blasting for its removal and also boulders
that exceed 1/2 cubic yard in volume.
B. When rock is encountered, strip free of earth.
C. The use of explosives shall be limited to the magnitude and location of the charge that will not cause
damage to adjacent existing construction and utilities through shock vibrations or other stress
loadings.
1. Provide adequate blanket protection to ensure that there will not be fragments of rock or other
debris flying through the air when discharging explosives.
2. Contractor to employ personnel certified by appropriate regulatory authority to execute blasting
operations if the Owner or local jurisdiction requires such certification.
3. Explosive permits shall be obtained from appropriate local and state authorities.
4. Where explosives and blasting are used, comply with all laws and ordinances of municipal, state
and Federal agencies relating to the use of explosives.
a. Use qualified personnel for blasting and take proper precautions to protect persons, property
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4

or the work from damage or injury from blast or explosion.
b. Conduct preblast survey in the company of the Owner's Representative to aid in determining
any damage caused by blasting.
c. Any damage to existing construction or other features caused by blasting operations to be
repaired and paid for by Contractor.
3.7 EMBANKMENTS
A. Place all embankments to lines and grades shown. Areas to be covered with topsoil shall be
underfilled so the finished lines conform after topsoil placement. Protect and maintain embankments
during the course of construction. Replace all materials lost due to storm damage until permanent
stabilization. Use materials obtained during excavation or imported materials. Do not use brush, sod,
or other unsuitable materials in embankments.
B. No embankment shall be constructed on frozen material, nor shall organic material be used for
embankment.
C. When an embankment is to be placed against a hillside or existing embankment whose slopes are
steeper than 4:1; the existing slope shall be continuously benched in approximately 24 inches rises as
the new fill is brought up on lifts as specified below. The material bladed out, the bottom of the area
cut into, and the embankment material being placed shall be compacted to the required density.
D. In fill sections, place material in loose lifts not exceeding 8 inches; brought to within 2% to +4% of
optimum moisture content. Bring up each lift uniformly over the entire area being filled and compact
each lift to its required density.
E. Maintain the proper moisture content in the uppermost layer. If placing of materials is interrupted and
the material dries, bring to proper moisture content before resuming by sprinkling, cultivating, and
rolling to the required compaction. Do not place or roll material during rainfall of sufficient intensity to
materially increase the moisture content. If any material placed in embankment acquires a greater
moisture content than is suitable for compaction, allow to dry or remove. If removed, recondition the
new surface before placing new material. Repair any irregularities caused by erosion by excavating,
cultivating, filling, and compacting.
3.8 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION
A. Structural excavation is the removal of all materials of whatever nature to approved structural
subgrade and as necessary for construction of structures and foundations. Approved structural
subgrade is that material which has been observed by the Engineer and upon which structural
foundations or other materials may be placed. Locate limits of excavation for structures with formed
vertical surfaces at least 5 feet from the extreme outside of the structure to the toe of the cut slope or
at a 1:1 slope as detailed on the drawings, whichever is greater.
B. Design excavations in the proximity of adjacent structures so as to protect the structures from damage
or undermining. Design and install shoring if necessary. Side slopes of excavation shall be only as
steep as is safe for material to stand. Avoid unnecessary disturbance of adjacent ground.
C. Subgrade Preparation
1. Remove all existing "fill", loose natural clays, sand, and compressible materials under proposed
structures. Provide a relatively smooth subgrade.
2. The exposed bottoms of excavations shall consist of undisturbed native material.
3. Where excavation is inadvertently carried beyond the design elevation or approved structural
subgrade, adjust the construction as directed to meet the structural requirements. Over
excavations shall be backfilled with graded structural fill compacted to the required density, or
adjust the construction as required to meet the structural requirements as approved by the
Owner's Representative.
3.9 BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES
A. Place backfill in 6-inch uniform loose lifts and compact to the required density. Larger lifts may be
utilized if it is demonstrated to the Owner's Representative that satisfactory results can be obtained.
B. Use a minimum of 1-foot impermeable backfill for the top layer to prevent surface water from
infiltrating next to walls.
3.10 SUBGRADE PREPARATION FOR DRIVE AREAS
A. Roads, drives and pads shall be graded to grades designated in Drawings.
B. Soil shall be free of organic material, trash and debris, and rocks larger than three inches in any
dimension, and shall not be frozen while construction is in progress.
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5

C. The subgrade shall be plowed or diced to a depth of 8 inches and the loosened material
compacted to the required cross-section elevation.
D. Subgrade shall be compacted to minimum of 95% of ASTM D698.
E. Compacted subgrade must support the weight of vehicles and equipment without producing ruts in the
surface. Owner's Representative may require Contractor to demonstrate subgrade adequacy by
requiring Contractor to move fully loaded equipment across compacted subgrade.
F. Should rock be encountered, it shall be removed to a depth of one foot below the top of the subgrade
and fill material placed and compacted as provided above.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Subgrade shall be repaired from action of the elements or others. Any settlement or erosion that
occurs prior to placing the aggregate base shall be repaired to the specific line, grade and
cross-section. Any subgrade that has become unacceptable shall be reworked as necessary to restore
the subgrade to shape, tolerance, density, and moisture content range for such density, immediately
prior to the placing of the aggregate base.
B. The Contractor shall protect all existing improvements from damage resulting from his subgrade
operation. Any improvement damaged shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
3.12 PLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL
A. All areas where topsoil is to be placed shall be scarified to a depth of 6" minimum by means of discing,
harrowing or culti-packing.
B. Topsoil shall be spread evenly to a depth of at least 6-inches, smooth and true to the lines and grades
as indicated on the Plans, and ready to receive seed and fertilizer. Seedbed areas shall be free of
trash, debris and rocks over 2" in size.
3.13 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
A. Excess earth material shall be transported to onsite storage area by Contractor. The Contractor shall
not dispose of any excavated material until there is sufficient material to complete all necessary project
embankments and fill areas.
B. Material not suitable for embankment, fill or backfill shall be disposed of off -site at a location
determined by the Owner's Representative. Transportation of such material and any disposal fees
shall be provided by the Contractor.
C. Material in excess of requirements for embankment, fill or backfill shall be disposed of on -site or at
locations determined by Owner's Representative. Transportation of such material and any disposal
fees shall be provided by the Contractor.
3.14 FINISH GRADING
A. Upon completion of the work, clean the entire site area affected of trash and debris, and grade the
surface smooth to drain so that no depressions, vehicle tracks, or ridges are left which could
accumulate rainwater.
END OF SECTION
EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6

SECTION 312333
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes materials and installation for trench excavation, backfilling, and compacting.
B. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, and protection of adjacent property, trees, and structures.
C. Preparation of subgrades, bedding for pipe, backfilling, and disposal of excess excavation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section 013300.
B. All specified bedding and backfill material, except earth excavated material.
C. Moisture -Density test for each backfill material.
D. Sheeting, shoring and bracing design calculations by a registered professional engineer.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe Embedment Zone - The full width of trench from both below and above the bottom of the pipe or
conduit to a horizontal level above the top of the pipe as defined by the embedment class or as shown
on the details.
B. Trench Zone - The portion of the trench from the pipe embedment zone to finished grade in unpaved
areas, and to the bottom of the drive zone in drive areas.
C. Pipe Cover - The distance from the top of the finished grade of the trench to the top of the waterline
pi pe.
D. Aggregate Pipe Base - A layer of material below the pipe embedment zone to stabilize the bottom of
the trench and provide uniform bearing of the pipe and pipe embedment.
E. Class A Excavated Material
1. Hard shale, sandstone, limestone, granite or similar materials which is encountered in monolithic
ledges greater than 8" in thickness and which, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative,
require jackhammering, use of a special headache ball or hydrohammer for removal. A toothed
bucket is not considered as special "ripping" equipment.
2. Two or more ledges with inter -lying strata of earth, clay, or gravel not more than eight (8) inches
in thickness in each strata will be classified as a solid monolithic formation from the top of the top
ledge to the bottom of the bottom ledge. Boulders that are encountered within glacial till or other
soil and are not a portion of a continuous monolithic formation shall not be considered
F. Unclassified Excavated Material - All earth or other materials that do not meet the requirements of
Class A excavated material.
1.4 COMPACTION TESTING
A. An independent geotechnical firm hired by General Contractor will test perform material testing and
field compaction testing.
B. Material testing for each backfill material shall be two moisture density tests or two relative density
tests according to the appropriate ASTM specification.
C. Minimum testing frequency for in -place field shall be:
1. One test for every 200 cubic yards of backfill for site backfill with a minimum of one test for
every full shift of compaction operation on mass earthwork.
2. One test at intervals of 500 feet along the trench.
3. One in -place field density test whenever there is a suspicion of a change in backfill material,
quality of moisture or effectiveness of compaction.
D. Sample backfill materials for the density testing shall be taken according to ASTM D75.
E. Determine the density of soil in place by the sand cone method ASTM D 1556, rubber -balloon method
ASTM D2167; or nuclear method ASTM D 2922.
F. Compaction is the calculated ratio of the in -place (dry) density to the laboratory maximum (dry) density
expressed as a percentage.
G. Determine laboratory moisture -density relations of soils according to the ASTM test method identified
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333 - 1

in the specific subsection.
H. If the Owner is responsible for compaction testing, the Contractor shall pay the costs of any retesting
of work not conforming to specifications.
The following table identifies the compaction required based on the location of the trench.
1. LOCATION/COMPACTION DENSITY
a. Under paved areas, sidewalks, and pipe crossings: 95% of ASTM D698
b. Under foundations and equipment support pads: 95% of ASTM D698
c. Unpaved areas: 85% of ASTM D698
d. Granular backfill: 75% relative density per ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE EMBEDMENT MATERIAL
A. Native earth material which is fine, loose material, free from stones 1-inch and larger, hard frozen
clods, and other material that may cause damage to the pipe, organic matter and debris that will
deteriorate and cause voids.
B. Rigid Pipe -Bedding Classes A, B, C or crushed rock, as described in ASTM C12.
C. Ductile Iron Pipe - Type 1 through Type 5 laying conditions, as described in ASTM A746.
D. PVC and other Flexible Pipe- Classes I, II, III, as described in ASTM D2321.
E. Composite Pipe - Same as Flexible Pipe except as described in ASTM D2680.
2.2 GRANULAR BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Granular material shall meet the following gradation:
1. Sieve Size 1 inch, Percent Passing By Weight: 100%
2. Sieve Size 3/4 inch, Percent Passing By Weight: 85-100%
3. Sieve Size 3/8 inch, Percent Passing By Weight: 50-80%
4. Sieve Size No. 4, Percent Passing By Weight: 35-60%
5. Sieve Size No. 40, Percent Passing By Weight: 15-30%
6. Sieve Size No. 200, Percent Passing By Weight: 5-10%
B. The granular material shall not contain clay lumps or organic matter. The fraction passing the No. 4
sieve shall have liquid limits no greater than 25 and a plasticity index no greater than 5. The material
shall meet the quality requirements of ASTM C33.
2.3 AGGREGATE PIPE BASE MATERIAL
A. The aggregate base material shall consist of crushed rock or gravel; free from dust, clay and trash; be
hard, durable, non -friable and meet the gradation as defined in ASTM C33 for No. 76 coarse
aggregate or the following gradation:
1. Sieve Size 3/4 inch; Percent Passing By Weight: 100%
2. Sieve Size No. 4; Percent Passing By Weight: 0-35%
3. Sieve Size No. 8; Percent Passing By Weight: 0-17%
4. Sieve Size No. 200; Percent Passing By Weight: 0-10%
B. Other gradations may be utilized provided all the material passes the 3/4 sieve and it can be
demonstrated that they provide adequate base support for the pipe.
C. The aggregate material shall meet the quality requirements of ASTM C33.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the Work areas shown on drawings.
B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
C. Identify by visible markings all plant life, trees, lawns, fences and other features that are to be
protected.
D. Protect benchmarks from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.
E. Existing underground installations such as water mains, gas mains, sewers, telephone lines, power
lines, and buried structures in the vicinity of the work to be done hereunder are indicated on the
drawings only to the extent such information has been made available to or discovered by the
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333 - 2

Engineer in preparing the drawings. There is no guarantee as to the accuracy or completeness of such
information, and all responsibility for the accuracy and completeness thereof is expressly disclaimed.
Generally, service connections are not indicated on the drawings.
F. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for locating all existing underground installations, including
service connections in advance of excavating or trenching by contacting the owners thereof and
prospecting. The Contractor shall use his own information and shall not rely upon any information
shown on the drawings concerning existing underground installations.
G. Where utilities are parallel to or cross the construction but do not conflict with the permanent work to
be constructed, follow the procedures given below or as indicated in the drawings. Notify the utility
owner 48 hours in advance of the crossing construction and coordinate the construction schedule
with the utility owner's requirements.
H. Determine the true location and depth of utilities and service connections which may be affected by or
affect the work. Determine the type, material, and condition of these utilities. In order to provide
sufficient lead time to resolve unforeseen conflicts, order materials and take appropriate measures to
ensure that there is no delay in
3.2 SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING OF TRENCHES
A. Sheeting and bracing, or trench boxes shall be provided where necessary to conform to 29CFR1926
Subpart P-Excavations, OSHA requirements.
B. Where it is necessary to drive sheeting below the centerline of the pipe, it shall be driven to a depth of
at least 2 feet below the flow line of the pipe, or as directed by the geotechnical engineer.
3.3 TRENCH WIDTHS
A. Trench widths shall be as shown in the drawings.
B. The width of the trench shall be ample to allow the pipe to be laid and jointed properly and to allow the
bedding and haunching to be placed and compacted to adequately support the pipe. The trench sides
shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible. When wider trenches are specified, appropriate bedding
class and pipe strength shall be used.
C. In unsupported, unstable soil the size and stiffness of the pipe, stiffness of the embedment and in -
situ soil and depth of cover shall be considered in determining the minimum trench width necessary
to adequately support the pipe
D. Ledge rock, boulders, and large stones shall be removed to provide a minimum clearance of 4-
inches below and on each side of the pipe.
E. Trench width at the top of the trench will not be limited except where width of excavation would
undercut adjacent structures and footings. In such case, width of trench shall be a minimum clearance
of the trench wall to outside pipe being a minimum of 4-inches, and that there is at least 24-inch
clearance between the top edge of the trench and the structure or footing.
3.4 MINIMUM PIPE COVER
A. Pipeline Location: Non -Paved Areas, Cover - 42 inches
B. Pipeline Location: Paved Areas, Cover - 42 inches
C. Pipeline Location: Under ditches and minor drainage courses, Cover - 4 feet
D. Pipeline Location: Under rivers and streams, Cover - 4 feet
E. Pipeline Location: State Highway, Cover - 6 feet
3.5 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Perform all excavation regardless of type, nature or condition of the material encountered to
accomplish the construction. Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown on the drawings with
allowance for pipe thickness and for pipe base or special bedding.
B. Care shall be taken not to over -excavate. If the trench is excavated below the required grade, refill any
part of the trench excavated below the grade with native material and compact to a density equal to
the rest of the trench bottom.
C. Length of open trench to be no more than amount of pipe installed in one working day. Backfilling of
the open trench to grade to be no more than 40-feet behind the installed pipe.
D. Blasting will not be permitted unless approved by Owner and appropriate jurisdictions.
E. After the required excavation has been completed, the Owner's Representative will inspect the
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333 - 3

exposed subgrade to determine the need for any additional excavation. It is the intent that additional
excavation be conducted in all areas within the influence of the pipeline where unacceptable materials
exist in the exposed subgrade. Over excavation shall include the removal of all such unacceptable
material that exists directly beneath the pipeline to a width 24-inches greater than the pipe outside
diameter and to the depth required. Refill the trench to subgrade of pipe base with native material.
Place the foundation stabilization material over the full width of the trench and compact in layers not
exceeding 6 inches deep compacted to 95 percent relative compaction and carried to the required
grade.
3.6 LOCATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. During trench excavation, place the excavated material only within the working area. Do not obstruct
any roadways or streets. Conform to federal, state, and local codes governing the safe loading of
trenches with excavated material.
B. Excavated material not used as backfill shall be disposed of off -site.
3.7 DEWATERING
A. Provide and maintain means and devices to remove and dispose of all water entering the trench
excavation during the time the trench is being prepared for the pipe laying, during the laying of the
pipe, and until the backfill has been completed.
B. Water entering the excavation or other parts of the work shall be removed until all the work has been
completed. No sanitary sewer shall be used for the disposal of trench water, unless specifically
approved by the engineer, and then only if the trench water does not ultimately arrive at existing
pumping or wastewater treatment facilities
C. Dispose of the water in a manner to prevent damage to adjacent property. Do not drain trench water
through the pipeline under construction. Do not allow groundwater to rise around the pipe until jointing
compound has set hard.
3.8 INSTALLING BURIED PIPING
A. Grade the bottom of the trench to the line and grade to which the pipe is to be laid, with allowance for
pipe thickness. Remove hard spots that would prevent a uniform thickness of bedding. Place the
specified thickness of pipe base material over the full width of trench. Grade the top of the pipe base
ahead of the pipe laying to provide firm, continuous, uniform support along the full length of pipe, and
compact to the relative compaction specified herein. Before laying each section of the pipe, check the
grade and correct any irregularities.
B. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of the entire joint. Fill the
area excavated for the joints with the bedding material specified or indicated in the drawings for use in
the pipe zone.
C. Inspect each pipe and fitting before lowering the buried pipe or fitting into the trench. Inspect the
interior and exterior protective coatings. Patch damaged areas in the field with material recommended
by the protective coating manufacturer. Clean ends of pipe thoroughly. Remove foreign matter and dirt
from inside of pipe and keep clean during and after installation.
D. Handle pipe in such a manner as to avoid damage to the pipe. Do not drop or dump pipe into trenches
under any circumstances.
E. Lay the pipe at the proper elevation and grade and properly attach to the adjacent pipe according to
the type of joint.
F. When the pipe laying is not in progress, including the noon hours, close the open ends of pipe. Do not
allow trench water, animals, or foreign material to enter the pipe.
G. Keep the trench dry until the pipe has been installed and jointed to the other pipe.
3.9 TRENCH BACKFILLING
A. Backfill according to the details for the particular type of pipe, and per the following:
1. Place the specified thickness of pipe base material over the full width of trench. Grade the top of
the pipe base ahead of the pipe laying to provide firm, uniform support along the full length of
pipe. Organic matter or clay material which may fall in an open trench during construction shall
be removed. The Contractor shall limit the amount of native material which may fall on top of the
completed pipe base until the pipe is installed.
2. Backfill shall be of a suitable material removed from excavation except where other material is
specified. Debris, frozen material, large clods or stones, organic matter, or other unstable
materials shall not be used for final backfill within 2 feet (0.6 m) of the top of the pipe. Do not bury
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333 - 4

waste material.
3. After pipe has been bedded, backfill simultaneously on both sides of the pipe, keeping the level
of backfill the same on each side. Carefully place the material around the pipe so that the pipe
barrel is completely supported and that no voids or uncompacted areas are left beneath the pipe.
Do not permit free fall of the material until at least 2 feet of cover is provided over the top of the
pipe. Use particular care in placing material on the underside of the pipe to prevent lateral
movement during subsequent backfilling.
4. Compact material placed within 12 inches of the outer surface of the pipe by hand tamping only.
5. Continue to place the backfill material in the trench until it reaches the finished grad according to
the following criteria:
a. Backfilling under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from required elevations.
b. General Backfilling: Plus 3 inches from required elevations.
3.10 BACKFILL COMPACTION METHODS
A. Compact by using mechanical compaction or hand tamping. Do not use high impact hammer -type
equipment except where the pipe manufacturer warrants in writing that such use will not damage the
pipe. Jetting will not be allowed.
B. Do not use any axle -driven or tractor -drawn compaction equipment within 5 feet of walls and
structures.
C. When existing pipe is encountered during excavation, care shall be taken to support pipe sufficiently
so pipe remains in service and to ensure safety of workers. During backfilling place bedding material in
and around the existing pipe and compact to specifications above.
3.11 PLACEMENT OF SAND -CEMENT SLURRY BACKFILL
A. Place sand -cement slurry backfill in a uniform manner that will prevent voids in or segregation of the
material. Remove foreign material that falls into the excavation or trench. Do not commence backfilling
over or place any material over the slurry cement backfill until at least four hours after placing the
sand -cement slurry.
3.12 PLACEMENT OF CLSM (CONTROLLED LOW -STRENGTH MATERIAL)
A. Provide hatching equipment to obtain the proper weights of soil, cement, water, and admixtures.
Measuring devices shall be sensitive to a 2% variation above or below the actual weights required.
Volumetric hatching may be used, provided the same accuracy required for weight hatching is
maintained.
B. Design and operate the mixers used for mixing the CLSM so that the CLSM as discharged from the
mixer is uniform in composition and consistency throughout each batch.
C. Place the CLSM such that it flows easily into all openings between the pipe and the excavated trench.
In some cases, such as trenches on a slope, a stiffer mix may be required to prevent it from flowing
down the trench. In this case, use vibration to ensure that the CLSM completely fills all spaces.
D. Lay the pipe on the soil pads and place the CLSM bedding as shown in the drawings. Place bedding
under pipe from one side and vibrate so that it flows under the pipe until it appears on the other side.
Then add CLSM to both sides of the pipe and vibrate until it completely fills the space between the
pipe and the excavated trench bottom. This operation shall follow as closely behind pipelaying
operations as possible. Place CLSM in such a way as to prevent uplift or buckling of the pipe. Deposit
CLSM as nearly as practicable in its final position. Do not disturb the pipe trench or cause foreign
material to become mixed with the cement slurry.
E. Do not place backfill above the pipe until the CLSM has reached the initial set. Place and maintain a
6-inch cover of moist backfill cover until additional backfill is placed. If the ambient temperature is 50°F
or less, place an additional 6-inch cover of backfill over the 6-inch moist backfill cover prior to the end
of the working day.
F. Whenever freezing temperatures are imminent, maintain the CLSM at a temperature of not less than
50°F for 24 hours after placement. The temperature of the mix shall be 50°F or greater at the time of
placement. Monitor the temperature by placing a thermometer in the CLSM immediately after sampling
at the placement site. When freezing weather appears imminent, make ready at the placement site
materials that may be required for protection of the CLSM. Delay placement of CLSM until adequate
provisions for protection against weather are made. Do not place CLSM bedding in pipe trenches when
the trench bottom or walls are frozen or contain frozen material. Backfill placed as cover over the
CLSM is prohibited from containing any frozen material.
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333 - 5

3.13 INSTALLING IMPERVIOUS BARRIERS
A. Construct impervious barriers in the pipe and trench zones at 300-foot intervals on slopes exceeding
30% and within 50-feet of vertical points of inflection on slopes exceeding 30%. Construct concrete
barriers such that the bottom of the collar extends at least 3 inches into the pipe base, at least 3
inches into each side of the walls of the trench, and at least 3 inches above the top of the pipe zone.
B. Install ABS dams by digging a slot approximately 3 inches deep into the pipe base, located
approximately 3 feet from the nearest pipe bell. Key the dam into the groove such that the neck of the
adapter connection pipe faces upstream. Center the dam into position and insert the edges into the
side walls of the trench. Slide a Fernco adapter over the pipe to be installed. Move the pipe through
the dam opening and assemble the pipe joint. Slip the Fernco adapter over the ABS barrier's neck and
tighten the adapter's bands. Backfill both sides of the dam such that there are no voids around the
pi pe.
3.14 PROTECTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. Underground utilities are to be protected in place and remain in service, unless otherwise specified on
the Plans or in the specifications. Compact bedding material under and around the utility so that no
voids are left. Flowable fill may be an acceptable method of bedding and backfill.
1. Where indicated in the drawings or as determined by the Owner's Representative, support
utilities by a reinforced concrete beam or support wall as shown on the utility support details in
the drawings. The primary purpose of the beam is to prevent settlement of the existing utility line
during and after construction. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of the utility during
construction and shall incorporate the beam as part of the protection.
B. Abandoned utility lines may be cut to facilitate installation of the new Works. All open ends are to be
plugged. The cut utility line shall be removed from the site.
1. Storm drains and sewers are to be plugged with an 8-inch wall of brick and mortar.
2. Waterlines are to be capped with a cast-iron cap or a 3-foot-long concrete plug.
C. Sewer services, water services, and other utility service lines are not shown on the Drawings.
Interference with these services may occur. If such situations arise, the Contractor shall move the
conflicting utilities (such as water service leads, sewer service lines, gas lines, etc.) or adjust the
pipeline vertical and/or horizontal alignment to maintain required vertical and/or horizontal separations.
All proposed modifications to the pipeline alignment shall be presented to the Owner's Representative
for review and all changes made shall conform to the recommendations of the Owner's
Representative.
D. If the utility must be removed to facilitate construction of the new Works, the utility will be
reconstructed with new materials and placed back into service. During this period, Contractor shall
provide temporary service for the disconnected utility.
E. Disruption of water service to residential and/or places of business as a result of the Contractor's
operations shall be limited to a maximum of 8 (eight) hours. In the event that disruption of a particular
service will be longer than 8 hours, the Contractor shall provide temporary potable water service which
meets the Department of Health requirements for potable water to the affected residence or place of
business for drinking purposes. In the event that disruption of a particular service will be longer than 24
hours, the Contractor shall provide temporary potable water service which meets the entire domestic
water demands of the affected residence or place of business. The Contractor shall at all times
maintain on site, the materials required for providing temporary water services.
F. Waterlines whose thrust is in the direction of the new excavation, may be affected by the construction.
Protect thrust blocks in place or shore to resist the thrust by a means approved by the water utility. If
the thrust blocks are exposed or rendered to be ineffective in the opinion of the Owner's
Representative, reconstruct them to bear against firm unexcavated soil.
END OF SECTION
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333 - 6

SECTION 333100
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, equipment, and labor necessary for material
handling, cutting, installation and jointing of various types and sizes of pipe at the locations shown
on the Drawings, or as detailed and in conformance with the specifications.
1.2 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. All work shall be fully coordinated with other work and shop drawings must be checked with each of the
various trades. Conflicts in the sequence of the work shall be coordinated through consultation with the
Engineer.
1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. Specifications of the following listed standards will be referred to hereinafter by standards abbreviation
and specification number which shall include the latest revision thereof.
1. ANSI, American National Standards Institute.
2. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
3. AWWA, American Water Works Association.
4. AASHTO American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Items submitted for approval in accordance with requirements shown on the Drawings and details shall
be of the manufacturer indicated, or an approved equal, in compliance with materials, operations,
physical assembly and performance as specified herein.
B. In addition to the correction period set forth in General Conditions, the manufacturer's standard
warranties shall be provided.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Pipe and Fittings: Certification of compliance, shop drawings.
B. Precast Concrete Structures & Appurtenances: Shop drawings, certification of compliance.
C. Coating and lining systems, non -shrink grout, polyethylene corrosion protection: Manufacturer's data
and specification sheets and certification of compliance.
D. Construction Sequence
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to prevent physical damage.
B. Protect materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage.
C. Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be handled in a manner to insure installation of the material in
an undamaged and structurally sound condition.
D. Particular care shall be taken to not harm pipe bell and spigot ends. Handling equipment and
procedures shall be in accordance with the approved manufacturer's recommendation for proper
handling of his products. Improper handling of pipe that results in damage to pipe will be grounds for
rejection of the pipe for installation.
1.7 CONNECT TO EXISTING LINES
A. Work shall be so scheduled and timed as to cause the least possible interference with the operation of
the existing system.
B. Adequate facilities for disposal of fluids which may be released during the connecting operations shall
be available.
C. Contractor shall provide the necessary pumps and temporary piping and associated accessories as
required for pumping of wastewater around areas of construction so as to not impede the collection
and treatment of the wastewater.
D. Sewage and water contaminated with sewage shall be conveyed to sanitary sewers.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 1

1.8 BYPASS PUMPING
A. Where flow control is required to perform a specified repair, replacement, or connection to an existing
sewer pipe or manhole, plugging or blocking shall be used wherever possible.
B. If plugging or blocking is not feasible or at the Contractor's discretion, Contractor shall provide the
necessary pumps and temporary piping and associated accessories as required for pumping of
wastewater around areas of construction so as to not impede the collection and treatment of the
wastewater. Backup pumping capability will be required.
C. The design, installation, and operation of the temporary pumping system shall be the Contractor's
responsibility. The temporary pumping system shall comply with the requirements of all codes and
regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. Contractor shall be responsible for any spillage of raw sewage
that results in civil or criminal charges from any local, state, or federal agency and will bear all costs for
these charges and any restoration required.
D. It is essential to the operation of the existing sewerage system that there be no interruption in the flow
of sewage throughout the duration of the Project. Contractor shall provide, maintain, and operate all
temporary facilities such as plugs, pumping equipment (both primary and backup units as required),
conduits, all necessary power or fuel source, and all other labor and equipment necessary to handle
the sewage by-pass flow.
E. Contractor shall provide all necessary means to safely convey the sewage past the work area.
Contractor shall not stop or impede the sewer flows under any circumstances.
F. Contractor shall maintain sewage flow around the work area in a manner that will not cause
surcharging of sewers, damage to sewers, and that will protect public and private property from
damage and flooding.
G. Contractor shall protect water resources, wetlands, and other natural resources.
H. Contractor shall insure that the flow diversion pumping system is properly operated and maintained
and shall provide responsible personnel to oversee the diversion pumping system at all times.
I. Work shall be so scheduled and timed as to cause the least possible interference with the operation of
the existing sewer collection and treatment system.
J. Sewage and water contaminated with sewage shall be conveyed to sanitary sewers.
K. Bypass pumping shall be considered subsidiary to all other bid items.
1.9 WRAP OF BEDDING MATERIAL WITH GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
A. A layer of medium weight non -woven geotextile fabric shall be placed between the pipe zone backfill
and the intermediate zone backfill to reduce fines migration into the pipe zone. Filter fabric shall be
laid -out and overlapped according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year after FINAL ACCEPTANCE,
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) SEWER PIPE
A. SDR 35 PVC sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D3034. SCH. 40 and SCH 80 PVC Pipe (Class
12454-B) shall conform to ASTM D1784 and D1785. All pipe joints shall be rubber gasketed bell and
spigot. Pipe shall be made from PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B, 12454-C, or
13343-C having a minimum tensile modulus of 500,000 psi, as defined in ASTM D1784. Nominal
laying length shall be 13 feet for 8" through 18" and 19 1/2 feet for 21-inch through 27-inch sizes.
B. PVC pipe joints shall be bell and spigot design conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3212.
C. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Solvent weldor non -gasket friction joints are not
acceptable.
D. PVC fittings shall be manufactured from the same material as the pipe and meet the requirements of
ASTM D3034 for 4" through 15" and ASTM F679 - PS46 for 18" through 27". Fittings shall be so
designed so that deflection under load is equal to or less than that of the connecting PVC pipe.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 2

2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Ductile iron pipe, where indicated on the Drawings or required, shall be as specified herein.
B. All ductile iron pipe shall be push on or mechanical joint and shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. The wall thickness and outside diameter of the pipe shall conform to
Tables 51.4 and 51.5 of AWWA C151. All ductile iron pipe shall be Class 51, except as noted
otherwise.
C. Fittings for use with the ductile iron pipe specified herein, shall be ductile iron. Cast ductile iron fittings
shall be pressure rated for at least 250 psi. All fittings with mechanical joints and push on joints shall
conform to AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 and ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11, except that Buna-N gaskets
shall be used for the joint. The fitting manufacturer shall furnish the proper gaskets, nuts, bolts, glands,
for each type of joint. Compact fittings are not acceptable. All fittings shall be American made with
uniform flange/gland thickness.
D. The interior of all ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with polyethylene or coated with Protecto
401 Ceramic Epoxy or Coropipe II WasteLiner as manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc.
E. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be checked for dry film thickness (DFT) in accordance with the
SSPCA-PA2. Each pipe and fitting shall be marked with the date of application of the lining system
and with its numerical sequence of application on that date. The pipe supplier shall furnish a certificate
stating that the lining applicator has complied with all specification requirements relative to the
material, its application and inspection.
F. Surface preparation, number of coats, application of the lining material and field touch-up shall be in
strict accordance with the lining material manufacturer's recommendations. During the installation of
the pipe, the lining manufacturer shall provide the services of a field engineer to instruct and
demonstrate to the Contractor's personnel the procedure for the field touch-up of the lining where field
cuts and taps were required.
G. Holiday inspection shall be conducted using test equipment described in AWWA C 210, Section
5.3.3.1. In accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendation, holiday testing maybe
conducted any time after the coating has reached sufficient cure.
H. Polyethylene: Inside coatings of all ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be of virgin polyethylene with
nominal thickness of 40 mils (35 mils minimum) complying with ANSI/ASTM D 1248.
1. The polyethylene shall be bonded to the interior of the pipe by heat. All surfaces to be lined shall
be blast cleaned comparable to the requirements of SSPC-SP6 or NACE no. 3.
2. All pipe and fittings shall be lined with a minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils, except for the
gasket groove and spigot end up to 6-inches back from the end of the spigot which shall be lined
with 10 mils of the material.
3. The coating thickness on sealing areas in the bell socket interior and on the spigot end of the
pipe exterior shall be 8 mils nominal with a maximum of 10 mils. Thicker coatings in these areas
are acceptable if it is demonstrated that joint dimensions are within allowable tolerances after
coating.
4. Repairs and touchup shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
repair and touchup procedures. All field cut ends shall be repaired, sealed and fully cured prior to
installation.
5. Polyethylene Lining Testing - Factory tests. All ductile iron pipe and fittings with polyethylene
linings shall be subjected to a 10,000-volt spark test prior to shipment. This test shall be utilized
to seek any pinholes in the lining after the lining has cooled. Any pipe section or fitting that fails
the non-destructive test shall be rejected.
Epoxy Coating: Inside coatings of all ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be an amine cured novalac
epoxy containing at least 20% by volume of ceramic quartz pigment. The coating shall be Protecto 401
Ceramic Epoxy as manufactured by the Protecto Division of Vulcan Painters, Inc. The coating shall be
a nominal 40 mils DFT thickness, with a minimum of 30 mils DFT thickness.
The epoxy coating shall be installed and tested in strict accordance with AWWA C 116/ANSI
A21.16 and as supplemented in these specifications.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 3

Polyurethane Coating: Inside coatings of all ductile iron pipe and fittings shall receive a two -component
polyurethane coating system The lining material shall consist of a ceramic modified polyisocyanate
resin and polyol resin mixed in a 1:1 ratio at the time of application. The material shall be Corropipe II
WasteLiner(CM) as manufactured by the Madison Chemical Industries, Inc. The lining material shall
be an ASTM D 16 Type V system. The coating shall be a minimum of 40 mils DFT thickness.
1. All surfaces to be coated or lined shall be cleaned to a near white metal finish (SSPC-SP 10) as
applied to ductile iron pipe and fittings. All surfaces shall be completely dry, free of moisture,
dust, grease or any other deleterious substances at the time the coating or lining is applied.
2. The coating thickness on the sealing areas in the bell socket interior and on the spigot end of the
pipe exterior shall be 8 mils DFT nominal with a maximum of 10 mils DFT. Thicker coatings in
these areas are acceptable if it is demonstrated that joint dimensions are within allowable
tolerances after coating.
3. Field joints, repair and touch up material shall be GP II (E) Touch -Up as manufactured by
Madison Chemical Industries, Inc. This work shall be performed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures. All field cut ends and touch ups shall be repaired,
sealed and properly cured prior to installation.
K. Exterior Coating: An asphaltic coating shall be applied to the exterior of all ductile iron pipe and fittings
intended for buried service and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. The exterior of all piping
in the wet well shall be coated as specified in the Painting Section. All ductile iron pipe and fittings
intended for interior use and for use above grade shall receive a prime coat of universal primer as
specified in the Painting Section.
L. An asphaltic coating shall be applied to the exterior of all ductile iron pipe and fittings intended for
buried service and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.
M. Corrosion Protection:
The exterior of all buried ductile iron piping shall be protected from corrosion by a seamless linear
low -density polyethylene (LLDPE) tube conforming to ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 with a minimum
thickness of 8 mils.
2. The tube shall have markings placed at two -foot intervals and include the manufacturer's name
and/or trade mark, the year of manufacture, the standard designation ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5,
the minimum film thickness and material type, the application range of pipe nominal diameters for
the film, and a warning notice: "Warning - Corrosion Protection - Repair any Damage."
3. Corrosion protection supplied in 48-inch wide flat sheets shall be used to cover irregular shaped
valves, fittings and appurtenances not protected by the tube form of polyethylene wrap.
4. Securing tape shall be 2-inch wide by ten (10) mil thickness and supplied by the pipe
manufacturers.
2.3 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
A. Geotextile wrap of bedding material shall be with filter fabric US 205NW or equivalent and meet the
following specifications:
1. Apparent Opening Size (AOS): #80 U.S. Standard Sieve Size per ASTM D4751.
2. Grab Tensile/Elongation: 205 Ibs/50% per ASTM D4632.
3. Puncture Strength: 130 lb minimum, average roll value per ASTM D4833.
2.4 MANHOLES, CONCRETE ADDITIVES FOR MANHOLES, MANHOLE COATINGS AND NON -SHRINK
GROUT FOR MANHOLES
A. Precast reinforced concrete manholes, concrete additives for manholes, manhole coatings and non -
shrink grout for Sanitary Sewer Systems shall be as specified in Section 330516.
2.5 EXPANSION PIPE PLUG
A. Expansion pipe plugs 4" - 18" diameter shall be Hand-Tite Pipe Plug as manufactured by R.C. Graham
Co.
2.6 TRACER WIRE
A. All gravity sewer pipes and new sections of laterals shall be installed with tracer wire to facilitate future
location of the pipe.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 4

B. Locator wire shall be #12 gauge solid copper wire with PE-45 insulation as manufactured by Kris -Tech
Wire Company or an approved equal. Alternative manufacturer wire must be specified as locator or
tracer wire and shall not be conductor wire for other purposes.
C. Locator wire shall be installed in such a manner to keep slices to an absolute minimum.
D. All connections or splices shall be made with a Splice Kit equal to 3M-DBR-Part Number —
054007-09964 or approved equal.
E. Wire shall be taped as shown on the Construction Plan details.
F. Wire shall be installed along all lines and outside manhole structures, lampholes, and cleanouts as
shown on the Construction Plan details and shall have enough slack to extend to 48" above ground.
G. Contractor must prove continuity of locator wire after installation is complete. Owner's Representative
must be present during continuity testing.
H. Locator wire installation, including signal loss, shall be warranted for one year.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
A. Trenching and backfilling shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of Section 312333.
3.2 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Pipe shall be protected during handling against impact shocks and free fall and the pipe interior shall
be free of extraneous material.
B. Pipe Handling: Pipe, manholes and appurtenances shall be handled in a manner to insure installation
of the material in an undamaged and structurally sound condition. Particular care shall be taken to not
harm pipe coatings. Handling equipment and procedures shall be in accordance with the approved
manufacturer's recommendation for proper handling of its products. Improper handling of pipe that
results in damage to pipe or coatings will be grounds for rejection of the pipe for installation. The
Engineer will be the final judge as to the acceptability of any material on the project. Cutting of pipe is
discouraged. The Contractor is urged to plan his job to minimize the necessity for cutting. Prior to
installation each pipe shall be inspected for defects and cracks. All defective, unsound or damaged
pipe shall be rejected. The interior of all pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and kept clean
thereafter. All joints surfaces shall be kept absolutely clean during the jointing process. Pipelines and
runs intended to be straight shall be laid straight and to grade. Grade changes and alignment
deflections shall be made as shown on the drawings.
C. Laying Pipe: Pipe shall not be laid in wet trench. At times when the laying of the pipe is not in progress,
the open ends of the pipe shall be closed in such a manner that water due to rainfall or infiltration
cannot enter. All joints shall be completed. Except where necessary for making connections with other
lines, closures, or as authorized by the Engineer, pipe shall be laid with the bells facing upstream.
D. Aligning Pipe: Tangent runs intended to be straight shall be laid straight. Horizontal and vertical
deflections shall be by angular divergence of the axis of adjacent pipe at the joint in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Shorter lengths of pipe may be used to increase the number of
available joints.
3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Bedding Pipe: Pipe shall be placed in bedding material as specified in Section 312333 TRENCHING
AND BACKFILLING.
B. Laying Pipe: Lay pipe upgrade starting at the low point and with spigot end of pipe pointing
downstream with bell holes excavated as required. Inspect each length and reject damaged or
defective lengths. All pipe shall be laid with ends abutting and true to line and grade and shall be fitted
and matched so that when laid together they will form a smooth and uniform invert. As the work
progresses, the interior of the pipe shall be cleared of all superfluous materials.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 5

C. Pipe jointing shall be accomplished as follows:
1. All surfaces of the portions of the pipe to be joined shall be clean and dry. Lubricants and primers
shall be used as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. The joints shall then be placed, fitted,
joined and adjusted so as to obtain a water -tight joint. Where possible the proper seating of the
gasketed joints shall be visually inspected prior to placement of the next section of pipe. Pipe or
piped joints found to be defective shall be removed from the trench, marked as defective and
returned to the manufacturer.
D. The downstream end of new line extensions shall be plugged in a positive manner by use of inflatable
plugs or other means acceptable to the Engineer until construction, cleaning, and testing is completed
and the new construction is accepted by the Engineer.
E. Service (Wye) Connections. Install fittings for service connections in all types of pipe at locations and
in the manner designated by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
F. Riser Pipes shall be constructed of approved sewer pipe and fittings as specified herein and as
detailed on the Drawings. Each riser pipe shall be plugged with an Engineer approved plugging device.
G. House service lines shall be constructed of approved sewer pipe and fittings as specified herein and
as detailed on the Drawings. Connections between new and old work shall be made by means of
suitable adapters approved by the Engineer.
H. Sewer lines and stubs indicated on the Drawings to be plugged for future connection, shall be plugged
with an Engineer approved plugging device. The plugging device shall be corrosion resistant, designed
for long term burial and prevent infiltration for the duration of its use. It shall allow easy removal for
future connection with no damage to the existing line or stub. The plug shall be as manufactured by
Hand-Tite, Inc. or approved equal.
3.4 SEPARATION OF WATER MAINS AND SEWERS
A. Gravity Sanitary Sewers. When potable water pipes and gravity sanitary sewers are laid parallel to
each other, the horizontal distance between them shall be not less than 10 ft (3.0 m). The distance
shall be measured from edge to edge. The laying of water pipes and sanitary sewers shall be in
separate trenches with undisturbed earth between them. When a water pipe and a sanitary sewer
cross and the sewer is 2 ft (0.6 m) or more (clear space) below the water pipe, no special
requirements or limitations are provided herein. At all other crossings, the sanitary sewer is to be
constructed of one of the following materials (or approved equal) and pressure tested to assure water
tightness.
1. Ductile iron pipe confirming to ASTM A536 or ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 with minimum
thickness class 50, and gasketed, push -on, or mechanical joints in conformance with
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.
2. PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D3034 with minimum wall thickness of SDR41, ASTM F679,
ASTM F789, or ASTM F794, with gasketed push -on joints in conformance with ASTM D3212.
3. Reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C76 with gasketed joints in conformance with
ASTM C361 or ASTM C443.
B. Joints in the sewer pipe shall be located as far as practical from the intersected water main.
C. Where a water main is laid across or through an area where there is an existing sanitary sewer, which
is not constructed of one of the above specified materials and is 2 ft (0.6m) or less below the water
pipe, the existing sewer shall be encased in concrete with a minimum of 6 in (15 cm) thickness for a
10 ft (3.0 m) distance on each side of the crossing or the crossed section of sewer replaced to meet
the above specified construction requirements.
D. Pressure Sewer Lines. When force mains run parallel to water lines, the separation distance shall be
as far as practical, but at least a 10 ft (3.0m) horizontal separation shall be maintained. There shall be
at least a 2 ft (0.6 m) vertical separation at crossings with the water main crossing above the sewer
force main.
3.5 MANHOLES - GENERAL
A. Excavation and backfill around manholes shall be in accordance with the applicable paragraphs in
Section 312333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING. Install manholes on an 8-inch layer of gravel
bedding used for sewer pipe bedding. Bedding shall extend a minimum of 6-inches beyond the outer
edge of the base
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 6

B. Handle with care to avoid damage to joint ends of each section. Damaged sections may be subject to
rejection at the discretion of the Engineer. All manhole construction shall be watertight. The invert,
walls and steps shall be cleaned of excess grout and laitance.
C. Floors of the manholes shall be shaped and smoothed so that flow channels will be formed such that
the manhole will be self-cleaning and free of areas where solids may be deposited. The floors shall
have a slope of one (1) inch per foot on areas outside of the flow channels.
D. Connection to existing sewer mains shall be done in an approved manner. Cutting into existing sewer
shall be done in such a manner as to prevent damage to sewer not being removed. New invert
channel(s) shall be constructed as required and in accordance with the requirements herein and as
shown on the Drawings.
E. Precast manholes with T-lock liner shall be spark tested in strict accordance with the manufacturers
recommended test procedures by a certified technician and witnessed by the Owner's representative.
3.6 MANHOLES - PRECAST CONCRETE
A. Manholes, wetwell and valve vault shall be constructed of precast reinforced manhole sections,
concentric or eccentric reducer cone section and flat tops as detailed.
B. All precast structures shall be set plumb and level on a 8-inch thick (minimum) layer of compacted 1/"
gravel.
C. All section joints shall be set and sealed with an approved joint sealant.
3.7 MANHOLE CASTINGS
A. All castings and frames shall be placed in the positions indicated on the Drawings.
B. Manhole Castings shall be set on a full mortar bed or sealed with a troweled -on butyl rubber mastic
sealant, Press -Seal Gasket Corporation "Trowelable EZ-Stik #3". In situations where the exterior walls
of the manhole will be exposed to weather or where bolt down covers are required, the manhole
casting shall be bolted to the precast cone section or flat slab top using 3/4" diameter stainless steel
threaded rod, nuts and washers epoxy anchored into the concrete.
C. Castings and frames shall be set true to line and to correct elevations.
3.8 CONNECTION TO MANHOLES.
A. Connections to new manholes shall utilize flexible connections. Flexible connections allow for limited
differential settlement to occur between the pipe and manhole. The uniform compaction of the bedding
material under the pipe and up to the spring line or top of the pipe as detailed is essential to the control
of this differential settlement. Resilient connectors shall be used with all flexible connections. A flexible
preformed mastic sealant shall be installed around the bottom half of the exterior pipe surface between
the resilient connector and the invert. This flexible sealant shall be installed to separate the pipe from
the invert to maintain the flexibility of the pipe/manhole connection. Pipes installed with flexible
connections shall not have concrete encasement at the outside of the manhole.
B. Connection to Existing Structures shall be done in such a manner as to prevent damage to existing
structures. Hole for installation of pipe shall be approximately 4 inches larger in diameter than the
outside diameter of the pipe to be installed. Annular space around the pipe or resilient connector, as
required, shall be filled solid with non -shrink grout. New invert channels shall be constructed as
required and shall conform with the requirements herein. For installing a new manhole on an existing
pipe, a clamp -on resilient connector shall be installed on the pipe prior to grouting into the manhole
wall.
3.9 NON -SHRINK GROUT
A. All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing and other means of execution
for prepackaged grouts shall be done in strict accordance with the instructions and recommendations
of the manufacturer.
B. Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for each application, so as to
assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 7

C. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete.
3.10 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. General:
1. After all installations are complete, including all backfill and compaction, all piping and
appurtenances shall be cleaned of foreign materials. Flushing of foreign materials from a newly
completed section of interceptor sewer into section already in service will not be allowed. If
ductile iron pipe is utilized the Contractor shall take care not to damage the internal linings. If
lining is damaged during either installation or cleaning it shall be repaired in strict accordance
with and approved by the pipe manufacturer's technical field service personnel.
2. Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, potable water, and equipment necessary to perform
leakage and deflection tests as specified herein. The methods and equipment used to make the
test shall be mutually determined by the Engineer and Contractor before any testing is started.
For the purpose of testing, a section of the line shall be considered as the length of line between
manholes. Any section that fails the test shall be repaired and retested by the Contractor until the
leakage and/or deflection limits is within the allowable limits. Water used for exfiltration testing
shall not be allowed to be disposed of through the completed sewer line. The Contractor shall
provide the required pumps to dispose of test water to the nearest storm sewer or waterway.
3. If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and
inspection and tests repeated. Repairs to piping and appurtenances shall be made with new
material at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. All visible leaks shall be repaired.
B. Gravity Lines:
1. Lines shall be checked for alignment by lamping and visual inspection and deflection by mandrel
testing. The pipe between manholes shall not be more than 1/4 of the pipe diameter out of
alignment.
2. Deflection limits for flexible sewer pipe shall not exceed five (5) percent of the nominal diameter
of the pipe. Deflection limits shall be verified by passing a mandrel through the section of sewer
line not less than 30 days after completion of the installation.
3. Perform deflection test using a properly sized mandrel without mechanical pulling devices.
4. Under no circumstances shall the mandrel test be performed prior to the completion of all
compaction operations required for surface preparation, regardless of the time of completion of
the pipe installation.
5. The sewer mandrel shall be fabricated with a diameter not less than 95 percent of base or
average diameter of the pipe as determined by the ASTM standard to which the pipe is
manufactured. The mandrel shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory. The current
certification shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to using the mandrel.
6. The Contractor shall provide video verification of the sewer main on all lines 30 days after
substantial completion.
7. Air Test:
a. In addition to the visual inspection, the Contractor shall perform a low pressure air test on all
pipe installed.
b. Testing methods for PVC pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM F1417.
c. Testing methods for concrete pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C
924.
d. Testing methods for vitrified clay pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM
C828.
e. For making the low pressure air tests, the Contractor shall use equipment specifically
designed and manufactured for the purpose of testing sewer pipelines using low pressure
air. The equipment shall be provided with an air regulator valve or pressure relief valve set
so that the internal air pressure in the pipeline cannot exceed 9 psig. All air used shall pass
through a single control panel.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 8

f. Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the pipe
to be tested. Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal test pressures without requiring external
bracing or blocking.
g. The Contractor shall be extremely cautious when testing with low pressure air. It is extremely
important that the various plugs be installed in such a way as to prevent blowouts. Inasmuch
as a force of 250 Ibf (112N) is exerted on an 8-inch (230 mm) plug by an internal pipe
pressure of 5 psi (34 kPa), it should be realized that sudden expulsion of a poorly installed
plug or of a plug that is partially deflated before the pipe pressure is release can be
dangerous.
h. NO ONE shall be allowed in the manholes during testing.
i. The section of pipe between successive manholes shall be sealed with suitable plugs. Do
not overpressure the line. Do not exceed 9.0 psig. One of the plugs shall have an orifice
through which to pass air into the section of pipe being tested. The air supply source (air
compressor) shall have a 9 psig pressure relief valve. The air supply line shall have a
positive on -off valve and suitable means for readily disconnecting it at the control panel. A
second orifice in the plug shall be used for constantly reading the internal pressure of the
pipe. This orifice shall be continuously connected to a pressure gauge having a range of
from 0 to 10 psi. The gauge shall have minimum divisions of 0.10 psi and shall have an
accuracy of ± 0.04 psi.
j. The line under test shall be slowly pressurized to approximately 4 psi. Regulate the air
supply so that the pressure is maintained between 3.5 and 4.0 psig for at least 2 minutes.
The air temperature should stabilize in equilibrium with the temperature of the pipe walls.
Disconnect the air supply and decrease the pressure to exactly 3.5 psi before starting the
test.
k. Determine the time required for the pressure to drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi, and compare
this interval to the required time to decide if the rate of air loss is within the allowable. Tables
1 and 2 show the minimum holding times for PVC pipe listed by diameter. If the pressure
drops 1.0 psig before the appropriate time shown in Table 1 has elapsed, the air loss rate
shall be considered excessive and the pipe section has failed the test. For testing of long
sections or sections of larger diameter pipes, or both, a timed -pressure drop of 0.5 psig shall
be used in lieu of the 1.0 psig drop as shown in Table 2.
I. Upon completion of the test, open the bleeder valve and allow all air to escape. Plugs should
not be removed until air pressure in the test section has been reduced to atmospheric
pressure.
8. An infiltration/exfiltration test may be performed with prior approval by the Engineer.
a. Infiltration Test: An infiltration test shall be performed when the crown of the sewer line is
below the ground water table. The amount of water leaking into the sewer shall be measured
by the use of appropriately sized weirs designed specifically for this purpose and approved
by the Engineer. The allowable leakage shall not be more than 50 gallons per day, per mile
of pipe, per inch nominal diameter. The section of pipe to be tested shall be pumped dry
before the start of the test.
b. Exfiltration Test: In areas where the crown of the pipe is above the ground water level, an
exfiltration test shall be performed. The section of sewer to be tested shall be filled with
water so that the water table in the upstream manhole is at least 4 feet above the flowline or
2 feet above the top of the pipe, whichever is greater. The amount of water added during the
test period to maintain the water level shall be measured and it shall not exceed a rate of 50
gallons per day, per mile of pipe, per inch of nominal diameter. PVC joints shall be repaired
by removal and replacement of the pipe section or pipe joint as directed by the Engineer.
D.I.P. joints found to be defective shall be repaired by disassembly of the pipe joint,
replacement of the joint and or pipe gasket and reassembly of pipe section utilizing a ductile
iron mechanical joint long sleeve with internal pipe filler. Bell clamps will not be an
acceptable method of joint repair.
C. Manholes:
1. Manholes structure shall be either vacuum or hydrostatically tested. Vacuum or hydrostatic
testing is recommended prior to backfilling, where feasible, to assist in locating leaks. The final
test and acceptance shall be based only on a test after the manhole is backfilled and the cast
manhole ring is in place. Existing manholes where new connections are made will not be required
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 9

to be vacuum or hydrostatically tested. These manholes shall be visually inspected for water
tightness with any leakage noted and corrected prior to manhole acceptance.
2. Vacuum Test - A vacuum test shall be performed on all new manholes. Plug all manhole
entrances and exits other than the manhole top access using suitably sized and rated pneumatic
or mechanical pipeline plugs. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and warnings for proper
and safe installation of such plugs, taking care to securely brace the plugs and the pipe. Attach
the vacuum test device to the cast manhole ring and draw a vacuum to 10" of mercury. With the
valve at the vacuum line connection closed and the vacuum pump off, measure the time required
for the vacuum to drop to 9" of mercury. The manhole passes the test if the time is greater than
60 seconds for a 48" diameter manhole, 75 seconds for a 60" diameter manhole, and 90
seconds for a 72" diameter manhole. If the manhole fails the test, the Contractor shall locate the
leak and make proper repairs with non -shrink grout. The manhole shall be retested until
acceptable test results are obtained.
3. Hydrostatic Test - Manholes may be tested using internal or external hydrostatic pressure with
prior approval by the Engineer. External hydrostatic testing shall only be used where the
groundwater level is at least 4 feet above the invert of the manhole. In all other cases, the internal
hydrostatic test procedures must be followed. Sewers connected to the manhole shall be
adequately plugged. For the internal hydrostatic test, the manhole shall be filled with water to the
top or to a maximum depth of 25-feet above the invert. Water gain or loss shall not exceed 1.14
gallons per day per vertical foot of manhole for either external or internal hydrostatic testing.
Infiltration and exfiltration shall be determined after 24 hours of hydrostatic testing by determining
the gain or loss of water in the manhole. Contractor shall be responsible for retrieving any plugs
or material accidentally washed down a sewer.
3.11 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Protective coating for D.I. pipe shall be provided by the use of 8 mil polyethylene loose fitting tubing.
The wrapping shall be bunched up at each end to provide for overlap to adjoining pipe by 1 foot. The
wrapping on the adjacent pipe is pulled over the bell and secured with three circumferential turns of
polyethylene adhesive tape. The resulting loose wrap on the barrel of the pipe shall be pulled snugly
around the barrel and taped at 3 foot intervals. The Contractor shall use care in backfilling as to avoid
tearing and shall repair all holes in the wrapping.
B. Polyethylene encasement materials and installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C105/A21.5.
3.12 BYPASS PUMPING
A. Where plugging is used, the Contractor shall monitor upstream manholes for excessive surcharge
conditions. The Contractor shall take immediate action and utilize all means necessary to quickly
alleviate the surcharge conditions.
B. Contractor is responsible for locating any existing utilities in the area Contractor selects to locate the
diversion pipelines. The diversion pipelines shall be located to minimize any disturbance to existing
utilities, traffic, and the Contractor shall obtain approval of the pipeline locations from the Owner and
Engineer prior to installation.
C. Plugging or blocking of sewage flows shall incorporate primary and secondary plugging devices.
Plugging devices shall be braced and/or designed such that they are capable of retaining the
maximum head that could be produced at the plug location during maximum surcharging of the sewer
system. When plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance and acceptance of work, the
plugs or blocks shall be removed in a manner that permits the sewage flow to slowly return to normal,
to prevent surcharging or causing other major disturbances downstream.
D. When working inside manholes, Contractor shall exercise caution and comply with OSHA
requirements when working in the presence of sewer gases, combustible oxygen -deficient
atmospheres, and confined spaces.
E. Contractor shall protect the discharge lines from damage in the areas of backhoe operations.
Damaged, leaking or defective discharge lines shall be immediately replaced.
F. Contractor shall confine the discharge pipelines to the limits of Work as defined by the contract
documents during bypassing operations.
END OF SECTION
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 333100 - 10

SECTION 400500
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes the general requirements for selecting piping materials; selecting the
associated bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanges for the various piping services in the project; and
miscellaneous piping items.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Provide data sheets for each type of piping and submit affidavits of compliance with referenced
standards (e.g. AWWA, ANSI, ASTM, etc.).
C. Submit verification of NSF 61 Certification for pipe and fittings.
D. Submit affidavit of compliance with referenced standards (e.g., AWWA, ANSI, ASTM, etc.).
E. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for bolts and nuts, including coatings if specified. Provide
recertification by an independent domestic testing laboratory for materials originating outside of the
United States.
F. Submit manufacturer's data sheet for gaskets supplied showing dimensions and bolting
recommendations.
G. Submit manufacturer's data sheet for flange insulating kits.
H. Submit manufacturer's data sheet for insulating unions, showing recommended installation
procedures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS OF BURIED AND EXPOSED PIPING
A. Buried piping is piping buried in the soil, commencing at the wall or beneath the slab of a structure.
Where a coating is specified, provide the coating up to the structure wall. Piping encased in concrete
is considered to be buried. Do not coat encased pipe.
B. Exposed piping is piping in any of the following conditions or locations:
1. Above ground.
2. Inside buildings, vaults, or other structures.
3. In underground concrete trenches or galleries.
1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Sizes and locations are indicated on the
Drawings. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been
indicated on the Drawings.
B. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid structural, mechanical, or
other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed.
1. Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change in the design concept or
a change to the Contract Price or Contract Time.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS SELECTION AND ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
A. The drawings list the material and specification for each piping service in the project. The same pipe
material shall be used for all pipe sizes in all locations for the given piping service. Do not intermix
piping materials unless shown on the Drawings. Stainless steel pipe may be used as an alternate to
ductile iron pipe in "exposed piping" locations.
2.2 THREAD FORMING FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS
A. Form threads by means of rolling, not cutting or grinding.
2.3 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR PVC, STAINLESS STEEL, STEEL, AND DUCTILE IRON
PIPING
A. Bolts and nuts for all buried flanges and all flanges located indoors; outdoors; above ground; and in
vaults and structures shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8 Class
2, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8, for nuts unless indicated otherwise. Fit shall be Class 2A and
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500 - 1

2B per ASME B1.1 when connecting cast iron valves having body bolt holes.
B. Bolts and nuts used in flange insulation kits shall conform to the same requirements as described in
the paragraph contained herein; or ASTM A193 (Grade 137). Nuts shall conform to ASTM A194 (Grade
2H).
C. Form threads for stainless steel bolts by means of rolling, not cutting or grinding.
D. Provide washers for each nut and bolt head. Washers shall be of the same material as the nuts.
2.4 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
A. Lubricant shall be chloride free and shall be RAMCO TG-50, Anti -Seize by RAMCO, Specialty
Lubricants Corporation Huskya Lube O'Seal, or equal.
2.5 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS IN WATER SERVICE
A. Gaskets shall be full face, 1/8-inch thick, cloth -inserted rubber, with a Shore "A" hardness of 75 to 85.
Gaskets shall be suitable for a water pressure of 200 psi at a temperature of 180°F. Gaskets shall
have "nominal" pipe size inside diameters not the inside diameters per ASME B16.21. Products:
Garlock Style 19 or equal.
2.6 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR DUCTILE IRON AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS
IN AIR SERVICE
A. Gaskets shall be full face, 1/8-inch thick, cloth -inserted rubber, with a Shore "A" hardness of 60.
Gaskets shall be suitable for air pressure of 150 psi at a temperature of 300°F. Gaskets shall
have "nominal" pipe size inside diameters not the inside diameters per ASME B16.21. Products:
Garlock Style 8314 or equal.
2.7 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR STEEL AND DUCTILE -IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS IN RAW
SEWAGE, SLUDGE, AND SCUM SERVICE
A. Gaskets shall be full face, 1/8-inch thick, Buna-N having a hardness of 55 to 65 durometer. Gaskets
shall be suitable for a water pressure of 200 psi at a temperature of 250°F. Gaskets shall have
"nominal" pipe size inside diameters not the inside diameters per ASME B16.21. Provide Garlock Style
9122 or equal.
2.8 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR PVC AND CPVC PIPING
A. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full faced, 1/8-inch thick, having a hardness of 50 to 70 durometer
Gasket material for other than sodium hypochlorite service shall be EPR. Gasket material for sodium
hypochlorite service shall be Viton ETP.
2.9 FLANGE INSULATION KITS
A. Flange insulation kits shall consist of insulating gasket, an insulating stud sleeve for each bolt,
insulating washers for each bolt, and a steel washer between each insulating washer and the nut. The
sleeves shall be one piece, integral with the insulating washer. Gaskets shall be full face. Provide
double sleeve and washer sets for each bolt.
B. Gasket material shall be phenolic, 1/8-inch thick. The flange insulating gasket shall be full diameter of
the flange with a nitrile 0-ring on each side of the gasket. Dielectric strength shall not be less than 500
volts per mil and a compressive strength of not less than 24,000-psi.
C. Insulating flange bolt sleeves shall be high -density polyethylene or spiral -wrapped mylar. Dielectric
strength shall not be less than 1,200 volts per mil.
D. Insulating flange bolt washers shall be high -strength phenolic a minimum thickness of 1/8-inch.
Dielectric strength shall not be less than 500 volts per mil and a compressive strength of not less than
25,000-psi.
E. Steel flange bolt washers for placement over the insulating washers shall be a minimum thickness of
1/8-inch and be cadmium plated.
F. Flange insulation kits shall be as manufactured by Central Plastics Company, Advance Product
Systems, or equal.
2.10 INSULATING UNIONS
A. Insulating unions shall consist of a molded nylon sealing sleeve mounted in a three-piece
malleable -iron (ASTM A47 or A197) body. Ends shall be threaded (ASME B1.20.1) when connecting to
steel piping and copper solder joint when connecting to copper piping. Minimum working pressure shall
be 150-psi. Unions shall be as manufactured by Central Plastics Company, Capital Insulation, or equal.
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500 - 2

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLING PIPE SPOOLS IN CONCRETE
A. Install pipes in walls and slabs before placing concrete. See Section 400762.
3.2 RAISED FACE AND FLAT FACE FLANGES
A. Use a flat -faced carbon steel, or alloy flange when mating with a flat -faced cast or ductile iron flanges.
B. High pressure rated flanges as required to mate with equipment when equipment flange is of
high-pressure rating than required for piping.
C. Where a raised face flange connects to a flat -faced flange, remove the raised face of the flange.
3.3 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
A. Set piping plumb and at the horizontal and vertical location shown on the Drawings. Provide pipe
hangers and supports to maintain alignment, as detailed in the drawings and as specified in Section
400764.
B. Install pipe without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any adjacent connecting valves or
equipment.
C. Pipe penetrations through walls, slabs, and floors shall be as detailed on the Drawings or as allowed
for alternate configurations as specified herein.
D. Install pipe spools in walls and slabs before placing concrete.
E. Inspection for Defects: Before installation, inspect pipe and appurtenances for defects and, when
applicable, tap the pipe with a light hammer to detect cracks. Reject defective, damaged, or unsound
pipe and appurtenances.
F. Cutting: Cut pipe, when necessary, in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe,
interior lining, and exterior coating. Perform cutting with an approved mechanical cutter, using a wheel
cutter when applicable and practicable.
G. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.
H. Beveling: Grind smooth and bevel cut ends and rough edges using methods recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer.
I. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe. Clean flanges by
wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Lubricate bolts and tighten nuts uniformly and
progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or
replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be
watertight.
J. Provide a flange insulation kit at all flanges between dissimilar metals whether shown on the Drawings
or not.
K. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system.
3.4 INSTALLING FLANGED PIPING
A. Set pipe with the flange bolt holes straddling the pipe horizontal and vertical centerline. Install pipe
without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any adjacent connecting valves or equipment.
Before bolting up, align flange faces to the design plane within 1/16 inch per foot measured across any
diameter. Align flange bolt holes within 1/8-inch maximum offset.
B. Inspection for Defects: Before installation, inspect pipe and appurtenances for defects and, when
applicable, tap the pipe with a light hammer to detect cracks. Reject defective, damaged, or unsound
pipe and appurtenances.
C. Inspect each gasket to verify that it is the correct size, material, and type for the specified service and
that it is clean and undamaged. Examine bolts or studs, nuts, and washers for defects such as burrs
or cracks and rust and replace as needed.
D. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire
brushing, lubricate carbon steel bolts with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and
progressively.
E. Bolt lengths shall extend completely through their nuts. Any that fail to do so shall be considered
acceptably engaged if the lack of complete engagement is not more than one thread.
F. Do not use more than one gasket between contact faces in assembling a flanged joint.
G. Tighten the bolts to the manufacturer's specifications, using the recommended cross bolt pattern in
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500 - 3

multiple steps of increasing torque, until the final torque requirements are achieved. Do not over
torque.
H. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or replace the
gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight.
I. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system.
3.5 INSTALLING BLIND FLANGES
A. At outlets not indicated to be connected to valves or to other pipes and to complete the installed
pipeline hydrostatic test, provide blind flanges with bolts, nuts, and gaskets.
B. Coat the inside face of blind flanges per Section 099000, System No. 12.
3.6 INSTALLING GROOVED -END PIPING
A. Install grooved -end pipe and fittings in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations
and the following.
B. Clean loose scale, rust, oil, grease, and dirt from the pipe or fitting groove before installing coupling.
Apply the coupling manufacturer's gasket lubricant to the gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends, and
housing interiors.
C. Fasten coupling alternately and evenly until coupling halves are seated. Use torques as recommended
by the coupling manufacturer.
D. Provide separate hangers and supports at both sides of flexible joints; see Section 400764.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
A. Prior to assembly, coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF SCHEDULE 80 PVC PIPING
A. Cut pipe ends square and remove all burrs, chips, and filings before joining pipe or fittings. Bevel
solvent welded pipe ends as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
B. Wipe away loose dirt and moisture from the ID and OD of the pipe end and the ID of the fitting before
applying solvent cement. Do not apply solvent cement to wet surfaces.
C. Make up solvent welded joints per ASTM D2855.
D. Allow at least eight (8) hours of drying time before moving solvent welded joints or subjecting the joints
to an internal or external loads or pressures.
E. Tighten bolts on PVC flanges by tightening the nuts diametrically opposite each other using a torque
wrench. Complete tightening shall be accomplished in stages.
F. Cut threaded ends to the dimensions of ASME B1.20.1. Ends shall be square cut. Follow the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations regarding pipe hold-down methods, saw cutting blade size, and saw
cutting speed. Pipe or tubing cutters shall be specifically designed for use on PVC pipe.
G. If a hold-down vise is used when the pipe is cut, insert a rubber sheet between the vise jaws and the
pipe to protect from scratching the pipe.
H. Thread cutting dies shall be clean and sharp and shall not be used to cut materials other than plastic.
I. Apply Teflon thread compound or Teflon tape lubricant to threads before screwing on the fitting.
Provide unions on exposed piping 3-inches and smaller as follows:
1. Provide a union 6 to 12-inches downstream of valves.
2. Upstream and downstream of equipment which may need to be removed for maintenance.
3. Where shown in the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500 - 4

SECTION 400515
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the cleaning and hydrostatic, pneumatic, and leakage testing of pressure
piping for pumping stations, wastewater treatment plants; general water piping systems; and raw
sewage force mains.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
B. Valves, General: 400524.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit test bulkhead locations and design calculations, pipe attachment details, and methods to
prevent excessive pipe wall stresses.
C. Submit six copies of the test records to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the testing.
1.4 TEST PRESSURES
A. Test pressures for the various services and types of piping are shown in:
1. Subsection on "Test Pressure and Test Fluids" in Part 3.
1.5 TESTING RECORDS
A. Provide records of each piping installation during the testing. These records shall include:
1. Date and times of test.
2. Identification of pipeline, or pipeline section tested or retested.
3. Identification of pipeline material.
4. Identification of pipe specification.
5. Test fluid.
6. Test pressure at low point in process, pipeline, or pipeline section.
7. Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or corrections made.
8. Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured conformed to the specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VENTS AND DRAINS FOR ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Install vents on the high points of aboveground piping, whether shown in the drawings or not. Install
drains on low points of aboveground piping, whether shown in the drawings or not. Provide a valve at
each vent or drain point. Valves shall be 3/4 inch for piping 3 inches and larger and 1/2 inch for piping
smaller than 3 inches.
1. Valves shall be as specified in Section 400563 and suited for the application unless otherwise
shown in the drawings.
2.2 MANUAL AIR -RELEASE VALVES FOR BURIED PIPING
A. Provide temporary manual air -release valves at test bulkheads for pipeline test. Construct the pipe
outlet in the same manner as for a permanent air valve and after use, seal with a blind flange, pipe
cap, or plug and coat the same as the adjacent pipe.
2.3 TEST BULKHEADS
A. Design and fabricate test bulkheads per Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Materials shall comply with Part UCS of said code. Design pressure shall be at least 2.0 times the
specified test pressure for the section of pipe containing the bulkhead. Limit stresses to 70 percent of
yield strength of the bulkhead material at the bulkhead design pressure. Include air -release and water
drainage connections.
2.4 TESTING FLUID
A. Testing fluid shall be water unless a pneumatic test is shown in the following subsections.
B. For lubricating oil; hydraulic oil; fuel oil; and gasoline piping, use potable water for
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 400515 - 1

hydrostatic testing and flushing.
C. For potable water pipelines, obtain and use only potable water for hydrostatic testing.
D. Submit request for use of water from waterlines of water utility 48 hours in advance.
E. The Contractor may obtain the water from the water utility water utility's rate of charges.
2.5 TESTING EQUIPMENT
A. Provide calibrated pressure gauges, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, compressors, and meters to perform
the hydrostatic and pneumatic testing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING PREPARATION
A. Pipes shall be in place, backfilled, and anchored before commencing pressure testing.
B. Conduct pressure tests on exposed and aboveground piping after the piping has been installed and
attached to the pipe supports, hangers, anchors, expansion joints, valves, and meters.
C. For buried piping, the pipe may be partially backfilled, and the joints left exposed for inspection
during an initial leakage test. Perform the final pressure test, however, after completely backfilling
and compacting the trench.
D. Provide any temporary piping needed to carry the test fluid to the piping that is to be tested. After the
test has been completed and demonstrated to comply with the specifications, disconnect and remove
temporary piping. Do not remove exposed vent and drain valves at the high and low points in the
tested piping; remove any temporary buried valves and cap the associated outlets. Plug taps or
connections to the existing piping from which the test fluid was obtained.
E. Provide temporary drain lines needed to carry testing fluid away from the pipe being tested. Remove
such temporary drain lines after completing the pressure testing. Pipes may remain full after testing.
F. Prior to starting the test, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Before conducting hydrostatic tests, flush pipes with water to remove dirt and debris. For pneumatic
tests, blow air through the pipes. Maintain a flushing velocity of at least 3 fps for water testing and at
least 2,000 fpm for pneumatic testing. Flush pipes for time period as given by the formula: T=(2L)/3,
in which "T" is flushing time (seconds) and "L" is pipe length (feet).
B. For pipelines 24 inches or larger in diameter, acceptable alternatives to flushing are use of
high-pressure water jet, sweeping, or scrubbing. Water, sediment, dirt, and foreign material
accumulated during this cleaning operation shall be discharged, vacuumed, or otherwise removed
from the pipe.
3.3 TESTING AND DISINFECTION SEQUENCE FOR POTABLE WATER PIPING
A. Perform required disinfection after hydrostatic testing, except when pipeline being tested is connected
to a potable waterline.
B. Locate and install test bulkheads, valves, connections to existing pipelines, and other appurtenances
in a manner to provide an air gap separation between existing potable water pipelines and the pipeline
being tested. Disinfect water and pipeline being tested before hydrostatic testing when connected to a
potable waterline.
3.4 LENGTH OF TEST SECTION FOR BURIED PIPING
A. The maximum length of test section for buried pipe of 12 inches or smaller in diameter is 1 mile; for
buried pipe larger than 12 inches, 1 mile. Provide intermediate test bulkheads where the pipeline
length exceeds these limits.
3.5 INITIAL PIPELINE FILLING FOR HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Maximum rate of filling shall not cause water velocity in pipeline to exceed 1 fps. Filling may be
facilitated by removing automatic air valves and releasing air manually.
3.6 TESTING NEW PIPE WHICH CONNECTS TO EXISTING PIPE
A. Prior to testing new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines, isolate the new line from
the existing line by means of test bulkheads, pipe caps, spectacle flanges, or blind flanges. After
successfully testing the new line, remove test bulkheads, caps, or flanges and connect to the existing
piping.
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 400515 - 2

3.7 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
A. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air while filling the pipe with water. Venting
during system filling may also be provided by temporarily loosening flanges.
B. Subject the piping system to the test pressure indicated. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum
of two hours. Examine joints, fittings, valves, and connections for leaks. The piping system shall
show zero leakage or weeping. Correct leaks and retest until zero leakage is obtained.
C. Where the test pressure is not indicated, test each pressure piping system at 150 percent of the
operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi test pressure. The required test period is
two hours. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage observed,
or pressure drop exceeds 5 percent of test pressure.
D. Test hot and cold water piping systems subject to the Uniform Plumbing Code per Section 609
latest edition of the code. Piping subject to this testing requirement is listed below.
3.8 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF BURIED PIPING
A. Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust blocks or encasement, do not perform the
pressure test until at least 10 days after placing the concrete. When testing mortar -lined or PVC
piping, fill the pipe to be tested with water and allow it to soak for at least 48 hours to absorb water
before conducting the pressure test.
B. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a positive displacement hydraulic force pump.
C. Maintain the test pressure for the following duration by restoring it whenever it falls an amount of 5 psi:
1. Pipe Diameter 18 inches and Less: 2 hours.
2. Pipe Diameter 20 to 36 inches: 8 hours.
3. Pipe Diameter Greater than 36 inches: 24 hours.
D. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added to maintain the
pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage
volume is defined by the formula: L=(HNDxSquare Root[P])/C. Where L=Allowable leakage (gallons),
H=Specified test period (hours), N=Number of rubber-gasketed joints in the pipe tested (use zero for
welded or flanged pipe), D=Diameter of the pipe (inches), P=Specified test pressure (psig), and
C=7,400.
E. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added to maintain the
pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage
volume is defined by the formula: L=(HSDxSquare Root[P])/C. Where L=Allowable leakage (gallons),
H=Specified test period (hours), S=length of pipe tested (feet), D=Diameter of the pipe (inches),
P=Specified test pressure (psig), and C=148,000.
F. Test piping subject to the Uniform Fire Code requirements per NFPA 24. Test such piping
hydrostatically at not less than 200-psi pressure for two hours or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum
static pressure when the maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. The amount of leakage in
piping shall be measured at the specified test pressure by pumping from a calibrated container. The
amount of leakage at the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints
irrespective of pipe diameter. The piping subject to this testing requirement is listed below shown in
the drawings.
G. The allowable leakage for buried piping having threaded, brazed, or welded (including solvent welded)
joints shall be zero.
H. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed in the above criteria.
3.9 PNEUMATIC TESTING
A. Perform pneumatic testing using dry air or nitrogen. Perform tests only after the piping has been
completely installed including supports, hangers, and anchors. Protect test personnel and Owner's
operating personnel. Secure piping to be tested to prevent the pipe from moving and to prevent
damage to adjacent piping and equipment. Remove or isolate from the piping any appurtenant
instruments or devices that could be damaged by the test prior to applying the test.
B. Apply an initial pneumatic leakage test of 25 psig to the piping system prior to final leak testing.
Examine for leakage, detected by soap bubbles, at joints and connections. After correcting visible
leaks, gradually increase the pressure in the system to not more than one-half of the test pressure.
Then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one -tenth of the test pressure until the required
test pressure has been reached. Continuously maintain the pneumatic test pressure for a minimum
time of four hours and for such additional time as may be necessary to conduct a soap bubble
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 400515 - 3

examination for leakage. The piping system shall show no leakage. Correct any visible leakage and
retest.
C. Test piping systems subject to the Uniform Plumbing Code per Section 1214 of the
latest edition of the code. Piping subject to this testing requirement is listed below.
3.10 REPETITION OF TEST
A. If the actual leakage exceeds the allowable, locate and correct the faulty work and repeat the test.
Restore the work and all damage resulting from the leak and its repair. Eliminate visible leakage.
3.11 BULKHEAD AND TEST FACILITY REMOVAL
A. After a satisfactory test, remove the testing fluid, remove test bulkheads and other test
facilities, and restore the pipe coatings.
3.12 TEST PRESSURE AND TEST FLUIDS
A. Testing and design pressures (psia) for different types of process piping shall be as listed below.
1. Gravity Sewer, Gravity Process Lines:
a. Low Pressure Air (See Section 333100).
2. Process Air:
a. 8 psig test pressure. (Design operating pressures 4 — 6.5 psig)
END OF SECTION
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 400515 - 4

SECTION 400524
VALVES, GENERAL
PART GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall provide all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and labor necessary for
furnishing, epoxy coating, installing, adjusting, and testing of all valves and appurtenant work,
complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where
buried valves are shown, the Contractor shall furnish and install valve boxes to grade, with
covers, extensions, and position indicators.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve operators specified in the various
Sections of these Specifications except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
Valves and operators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors, limit
switches, and controls specified in other sections of these Specifications.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawing. Shop drawings of all valves and operators including associated wiring diagrams
and electrical data, shall be furnished as specified in Section entitled "Shop Drawings, Project
Data and Samples".
B. Valve Labeling. The Contractor shall submit a schedule of valves to be labeled indicating in each
case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valve Testing. Unless otherwise specified, each valve body shall be tested under a test pressure
equal to twice its design water -working pressure.
B. Bronze Parts. Unless otherwise specified, all interior bronze parts of valves shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM B 62, or, where not subject to dezincification, to ASTM B 584.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES
A. General: The Contractor shall furnish all valves, gates, valve -operating units, stem extensions, and
other accessories as shown or specified. All valves and gates shall be new and of current
manufacture.
B. Shut-off valves mounted higher than 6-feet above working level shall be provided with chain
operators. All valves shall have a minimum design pressure rating of 150 psi and capable of a
test pressure of 300 psi. For service applications with pressures in excess of 150 psi, valves
shall have a minimum pressure rating in excess of the service application working pressure.
C. Cast iron parts of valves shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 126. Flanged ends shall be flat -
faced and have bolt circle and bolt patterns conforming to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125, unless
otherwise specified hereinafter.
D. All castings shall be clean and sound, without defects of any kind and no plugging, welding or
repairing of defects will be permitted. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal conforming to
ANSI B18.2. Gaskets shall be full face and made of natural or synthetic elastomers in
conformance with ANSI B16.21 suitable for the service characteristics, especially chemical
compatibility, and temperature. Nonferrous alloys of various types shall be used for parts of
valves as specified. Where no definite specification is given, the material shall be the recognized
acceptable standard for that particular application.
E. All buried valves shall be provided with cast-iron valve boxes unless otherwise indicated. The
boxes shall be asphalt varnished, or enameled cast iron, adjustable to grade, and installed
perpendicularly, centered around, and covering the upper portions of the valve or valve operator,
or the pipe. The top of each valve box shall be placed flush with finish grade unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings. Valve boxes shall be as specified elsewhere in this section.
F. All buried valves and other valves located below the concrete operating deck or level, specified or
noted to be key operated, shall have an operator to finish grade or deck level, a 2-inch square
AWWA operating nut, and cover or box and cover, as may be required.
G. Protective Coating: Except where otherwise specified, ferrous surface except stainless steel in
the interior passages of all valves 4-inch and larger, as well as the exterior surfaces of all
submerged valves, shall receive a fusion -bonded epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550.
Flange faces of valves shall not be epoxy coated. The Contractor, through the valve
manufacturer, shall certify in writing that such coating has been applied and tested in the
VALVES, GENERAL 400524 - 1

manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with these Specifications.
H. Valve Operators: Where shown, certain valves shall be furnished with operators, provided by the
valve or gate manufacturer. All operators of a given type shall be furnished by the same
manufacturer. All valve operators, regardless of type, shall be installed, adjusted, and tested by
the valve manufacturer at the manufacturing plant.
I. All operators, unless otherwise specified, shall turn counterclockwise to open. Operators shall
have the open direction clearly and permanently marked. All valve operators, manual, motor and
pneumatic, shall be provided with the valve by the valve manufacturer. The Contractor, through
the valve manufacturer, shall be solely responsible for the selection of the proper operator to
meet the operating conditions specified herein. Field calibration and testing of the operators and
valves to ensure a proper installation and an operating system shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
J. Unless otherwise specified, all manual operators shall have levers or handwheels. Where buried,
the valves shall have extensions with square nuts or floor stands. Tee wrenches for buried
valves and hydrants shall be provided at a rate of one (1) per five (5) valves/hydrants. Valves
mounted higher than 7'6" above floor or operating level shall have chain operators. Unless
otherwise shown or specified, valves of sizes 4-inch and larger shall have gear -assisted
operators.
K. Operation of valves shall be designed so that the effort required to operate the handwheel, lever
or chain shall not exceed 40 pounds applied at the extremity of the wheel or lever. The
handwheels on valves 14 inches and smaller shall not be less than 8 inches in diameter, and on
valves larger than 14 inches, the handwheel shall not be less than 12 inches in diameter.
L. Chainwheel operator shall be fabricated of malleable iron and pocketed type chainwheels with
chain guards and guides. Chainwheel operators shall be marked with an arrow and the word
"open" indicating direction to open. The operators shall have galvanized smooth welded link type
chain. Chain that is crimped or has links with exposed ends shall not be acceptable.
M. Floor Stands: Floor stands shall be cast iron, non -rising stem type with lockable hand wheel
operator, valve position indicator and steel extension stem. Hand wheel shall be lockable in the
full closed position. The floor stand shall be furnished with an armored padlock and six keys. Lock
shall be as manufactured by Master, Schlage or equal. Floor stand shall be standard pattern type
as manufactured by Clow Corporation, or equal.
N. Valve Labeling: A label shall be provided on all shut-off valves. The label shall be of 1/16-inch
plastic or stainless steel, minimum 2 inches by 4 inches in size, and shall be permanently
attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve or as indicated by the Engineer.
O. Position Indicators: All shut-off valves, 6-inch and larger, shall have operators with position
indicators. Where buried, these valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing
position indicators, and valve extensions, as required. The valve indicator shall be hermetically
sealed for installation inside a cast iron valve box and shall show valve disc position, direction of
rotation and number of turns from fully opened to full closed.
P. Extension Stems: Extension stems and stem guides shall be furnished and installed where
specified, indicated on the drawings, or otherwise required for proper valve operation. Extension
stems shall be of solid steel and shall be not smaller in diameter than the stem of the valve
actuator shaft. Extension stems shall be connected to the valve actuator by means of a Lovejoy
"Type D" single universal joint with grease -filled protective rubber boot and S.S. fasteners. All
stem connections shall be pinned.
Q. At least two stem guides shall be furnished with each valve requiring stem guides. Stem guides
shall be of cast iron construction, bronze bushed and adjustable in two directions. Stem guide
spacing shall not exceed 100 times the stem diameter or 10 feet, whichever is smaller. The top
stem guide shall be designed to carry the weight of the extension stem. The extension stem shall
have a collar; the collar shall be pinned to the stem and shall bear against the stem thrust guide.
R. Extension stems shall be provided for all buried valves when the valve actuator is greater than 4
feet below finished grade and/or as required for position indicators. Each extension stem for a
buried valve shall extend to within 6 inches of the ground surface, shall be provided with spacers
which will center the stem in the valve box, and shall be equipped with a wrench nut.
VALVES, GENERAL 400524 - 2

2.2 VALVE BOXES
A. Each valve buried to a depth of 4 feet or less shall be provided with a slide type valve box. Valve
boxes shall be cast iron, extension sleeve type, suitable for the depth of cover required by the
drawings. Not more than one extension will be allowed with each slide type valve box. Valve
boxes shall be not less than 5 inches in inside diameter, shall have a minimum thickness at any
point of 3/16 inch, and shall be provided with suitable cast iron bases and covers.
B. Each valve buried to a depth greater than 4 feet shall be provided with a valve box consisting of a
cast iron cover and a 6-inch cast iron pipe section. The cover shall be a Clay & Bailey "No. 2193"
or Tyler "Series 6890-A". The pipe shaft shall be sized to extend from the valve to 5 inches inside
the valve box cover. Covers shall have cast thereon designation of the service for which the
valve is used.
C. All parts of valve boxes, bases, and covers shall be shop coated by dipping in asphalt varnish.
D. Top sections and covers for valve boxes which are to be provided with position indicators shall be
designed for proper installation of the position indicator and accessories.
E. Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be placed directly over the
valve it serves, with the top of the box brought flush with the finished grade. After being placed in
proper position, earth shall be filled in around each valve box and thoroughly tamped on each
side of the box.
F. The covers shall be marked "WATER", "SEWER", "GAS", depending on service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General: All valves, operating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as shown and specified.
All gates shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use.
Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe.
B. Access: All valves shall be installed to provide easy access for operation, removal, and
maintenance and to avoid conflicts between valve operators and structural members or handrails.
C. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are specified,
it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly assemble and install these various items
so that all systems are compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated
items shall be clearly noted on shop drawing submittals.
END OF SECTION
VALVES, GENERAL 400524 - 3

SECTION 400566
BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes materials, testing, and installation of butterfly valves and accessories in process
air, water and wastewater applications.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
C. Pressure Testing of Piping: 400515.
D. Valves, General: 400524.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and detailed construction sheets showing all valve parts. Describe
each part by material of construction, specification (such as AISI, ASTM, SAE, or CDA), and grade or
type. Identify each valve by tag number to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain.
C. Show valve dimensions including laying lengths. Show port sizes. Show dimensions and orientation of
valve actuators, as installed on the valves.
D. Show location of internal stops for gear actuators. State differential pressure and fluid velocity used to
size actuators. For worm -gear actuators, state the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm
and state the handwheel diameter.
E. Show valve linings and coatings. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature.
F. Show the clear diameter or size of the port. Show the actual area of the port as a percentage of the
area as calculated for the nominal valve size.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year after FINAL ACCEPTANCE
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Valves and the required actuators are identified by tag numbers on the drawings and in the Valve
Schedule. See the Valve Schedule in Valves, General Section 400524.
B. Valves shall be installed complete with flange gaskets, nuts and bolts, operating handwheels or levers,
chainwheels, extension stems, floor stands, gear actuators, operating nuts, chains, and wrenches
required for operation.
C. Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast or molded onto the
valve body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate. Valves shall open by turning
counterclockwise.
D. Bolts, nuts and gaskets for flanged valves shall be as described in Section 400500.
E. Lining and coating shall be as described in Section 099000.
F. Packing, O-Rings and gaskets shall be Teflon, Kevlar aramid fiber, acrylic or aramid fiber, Buna-N or
EPDM.
G. Valve end connections for exposed valves shall be wafer or flanged, as indicated in Valve Schedule.
Contractor shall verify compatibility of valve ends, including class and drilling flanges with the
connecting pipe.
H. Buried valve end connections shall be mechanical joint of push on joint unless otherwise shown in the
drawings or in the Valve Schedule.
BUTTERFLY VALVES 400566-1

2.2 VALVES
A. BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR PROCESS AIR SERVICE (MSS SP-67).
1. Comply with MSS SP-67.
2. Materials:
a. Valve Bodies:
i. Wafer body: Cast iron ASTM A126, Class B.
ii. Lug Body: Ductile iron, ASTM A395.
b. Valve Shaft or Stem:
i. Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316
c. Valve Disc:
i. Ductile iron, ASTM A395, nickel plated, or
ii. Aluminum Bronze, ASTM B148 Alloy 954
d. Valve Seat:
i. Water and air below 180 Deg F
1. Buna-N
ii. Water and air 180 to 250 Deg F
1. EPDM
iii. Valve seat shall be a full body seat isolating stem and body from flow.
3. Design Requirements:
a. Exposed and submerged valves 3 IN through 20 IN.
i. Body type: Wafer
ii. Working pressure: Rated for 150 psi.
iii. Equip with fully taped anchor lugs drilled per ASME B16.5.
B. BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER APPLICATIONS:
4. Comply with AWWA C504.
5. Materials:
a. Acceptable Materials for Valve Bodies:
i. Cast iron ASTM A126, Class B.
ii. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 40
iii. Ductile iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12
iv. Alloy Cast Iron ASTM A436, Type 1 and Type 2
v. Alloy Cast Iron ASTM A439, Type D2.
b. Valve Shaft or Stem:
i. Stainless steel, 18-8, Type 304
c. Acceptable Materials for Valve Disc:
i. ASTM A436, Type 1 alloy cast iron.
ii. ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron
iii. Bronze in accordance with AWWA C504
iv. Aluminum Bronze, ASTM B148 Alloy 954
d. Valve Seat:
i. Water below 180 Deg F
1. Buna-N
ii. Valve seat shall be a full body seat isolating stem and body from flow.
6. Design Requirements:
a. Exposed and submerged valves 3 IN through 20 IN.
i. Body type: Short body flanged or wafer, as indicated
ii. Working pressure: Rated for 150 psi (Class 150B per AWWA).
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish hand actuator integral with valve.
BUTTERFLY VALVES 400566-2

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 JOINTS
A. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe run to
which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean
bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil and graphite, and tighten bolts uniformly and
progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or
replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be
watertight.
B. Clean threaded joints with wire brush and by swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to
the pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight.
C. Install lug type valves with separate hex head machine bolts at each bolt hole and each flange (two
bolts per valve bolt hole).
D. Install grooved end couplings for valves in accordance with grooved coupling supplier
recommendations.
3.2 INSTALLING EXPOSED VALVES
A. Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, install valves in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline
elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above the floor with their operating stems vertical. Install valves in
horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above
the floor with their operating stems horizontal.
B. Install valves on vertical runs of pipe that are next to walls with their stems horizontal, away from the
wall. Valves on vertical runs of pipe that are not located next to walls shall be installed with their stems
horizontal, oriented to facilitate valve operation.
C. Valve operator locations have been shown arbitrarily on the Drawings. Contractor shall verify the
location of the operator to comply with above requirements, and to allow access for installation,
operation, and maintenance.
3.3 INSTALLING BURIED VALVES
A. Connect the valve, coat the retainer glands, install the tape wrapping or polyethylene encasement,
and place and compact the backfill to the height of the valve stem.
B. Place block pads under the extension pipe to maintain the valve box vertical during backfilling and
repaving and to prevent the extension pipe from contacting the valve bonnet.
C. Mount the upper slip pipe of the extension in mid -position and secure with backfill around the
extension pipe. Pour the concrete ring allowing a depression so the valve box cap will be flush with the
pavement surface.
3.4 FIELD COATING BURIED VALVES
A. Coat flanges of buried valves and the retaining hardware of the adjacent piping, and the bolts and
nuts of retaining hardware and mechanical joints, per Section 099000.
B. Wrap buried metal valves 6 inches and larger with polyethylene sheet.
C. Wrap buried metal valves 6 inches and larger in two layers of polyethylene conforming to AWWA
C105, 8 mils in thickness each. Pass the two sheets of polyethylene under the valve and the coated
flanges or joints with the connecting pipe and draw the sheets around the valve body, the valve
bonnet, and the connecting pipe. Secure the sheets with plastic adhesive tape about the valve stem
below the operating nut and about the barrel of the connecting pipe to prevent the entrance of soil.
Fold overlaps twice and tape. Backfill the valve with care to avoid damaging the polyethylene.
3.5 MOUNTING GEAR ACTUATORS
A. The valve manufacturer shall select and mount the gear actuator and accessories on each valve and
stroke the valve from fully open to fully closed prior to shipment.
3.6 VALVE FIELD TESTING
A. Operate manual valves through three full cycles of opening and closing. Valves shall operate from full
open to full close without sticking or binding. Do not backfill buried valves until after verifying that
BUTTERFLY VALVES 400566-3

valves operate from full open to full closed. If valves stick or bind, or do not operate from full open to
full closed, repair or replace the valve and repeat the tests.
B. Gear actuators shall operate valves from full open to full close through three cycles without binding or
sticking. The pull required to operate handwheel- or chainwheel-operated valves shall not exceed 80
pounds. The torque required to operate valves having 2-inch AWWA nuts shall not exceed 150 ft-lbs.
If actuators stick or bind or if pulling forces and torques exceed the values stated previously, repair or
replace the actuators and repeat the tests. Operators shall be fully lubricated in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations prior to operating.
END OF SECTION
BUTTERFLY VALVES 400566-4

SECTION 400567
CHECK VALVES FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes materials, testing, and installation of check valves and accessories in process air
applications.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
C. Pressure Testing of Piping: 400515.
D. Valve Schedule: 400521.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and detailed construction sheets showing all valve parts. Describe
each part by material of construction, specification (such as AISI, ASTM, SAE, or CDA), and grade or
type. Identify each valve by tag number to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain.
C. Show valve dimensions including laying lengths. Show port sizes. Show dimensions and orientation of
valve appurtenances, as installed on the valves.
D. Show valve linings and coatings. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature.
E. Show the clear diameter or size of the port. Show the actual area of the port as a percentage of the
area as calculated for the nominal valve size.
F. Provide additional O&M data per Section 017823.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year after FINAL ACCEPTANCE
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Valves are identified by tag numbers on the drawings and in the Valve Schedule. See the Valve
Schedule Section 400521.
B. Bolts, nuts and gaskets for flanged valves shall be as described in Section 400500.
C. Lining and coating shall be as described in Section 099000.
D. Valve end connections for exposed valves shall be flanged unless shown otherwise. Contractor shall
verify compatibility of valve ends, including class and drilling flanges with the connecting pipe.
2.2 VALVES
A. CHECK VALVES FOR STRAINER FEED PUMP STATIONS (NOT USED)
1. Supply rubber flapper type check valve for raw sewage applications. Check valve shall be
Swing -Flex by Val Matic, APCO CRF series, or equal.
2. Standards and Approvals: Valves shall be designed, manufactured, tested and certified to
ANSI/AWWA C508 standard.
3. Connections shall be flanges with drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125.
4. Materials: The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile
iron or ASTM A126 Class B Gray Iron for 30" and larger valves.
5. Pressure rating: Valve shall withstand up to 250 psi of operating pressure.
6. Options: Coating shall be applied to interior and exterior with an NSF/ANSI 61 approved fusion
bonded epoxy coating.
CHECK VALVES FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS 400565-1

B. CHECK VALVES FOR RAW SEWAGE PUMPING APPLICATIONS (NOT USED)
7. Supply rubber flapper type check valve for raw sewage applications. Check valve shall be
Swing -Flex by Val Matic, APCO CRF series, or equal.
8. Standards and Approvals: Valves shall be designed, manufactured, tested and certified to
ANSI/AWWA C508 standard.
9. Connections shall be flanges with drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125.
10. Materials: The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile
iron or ASTM A126 Class B Gray Iron for 30-in and larger valves.
11. Pressure rating: Valve shall withstand up to 250 psi of operating pressure.
12. Options: Coating shall be applied to interior and exterior with an NSF/ANSI 61 approved fusion
bonded epoxy coating.
C. CHECK VALVE FOR DUCKBILL CHECK APPLICATIONS, WHERE SHOWN (NOT USED)
1. Supply duckbill check valve by Red Valve or Onyx to meet specific application requirements. In
line or flanged valve types will be accepted.
D. CHECK VALVES FOR PROCESS AIR APPLICATIONS
1. Note: Blower supplier will supply check valve with each blower supplied, shipped loose (along
with pressure relief valves) for installation by Contractor. No additional process air check valves
required for Contractor supply.
2. Supply double disk type wafer body check valves for process air applications. Check valve shall
be Dual -Disc Check Valve by Val Matic, Double Door Check Valve by APCO, Duo-Chek Style G
or H by Crane or Equal.
3. Standards and Approvals: ASME pressure class 125.
4. Connections shall be wafer body, retainered wafer or retainerless wafer.
5. Materials: The valve body shall be carbon steel (with factory applied coating).
6. Seal: EPDM.
7. Coating shall be applied to interior and exterior per Specification Section 099000.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLING EXPOSED VALVES
A. Install check valves in the orientation shown in the drawings with provisions to allow for access as
required.
END OF SECTION
CHECK VALVES FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS 400565-2

SECTION 400722
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes materials and installation of:
1. flexible gasketed sleeve -type compression pipe couplings for steel; and ductile -iron pipe
2. thermal expansion compensators and expansion joints 4 inches in diameter and smaller for
steel, PVC; CPVC; and copper pipe.
3. flexible expansion joints; expansion loops; or restrained flange adapters and couplings
for connecting different pipe materials.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
C. Piping Schedule: 400501.
D. Pressure Testing of Piping: 400515.
E. Wall Pipes, Seep Rings, and Penetrations: 400762.
F. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 400764.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data on flexible pipe couplings, thermal expansion compensators;
restrained flange adapters; expansion loops; and expansion joints. Show manufacturer's model or
figure number for each type of coupling or joint for each type of pipe material for which couplings and
joints are used. Show coatings.
C. Submit manufacturer's recommended torques to which the coupling bolts shall be tightened for the
flexible gasketed sleeve -type compression pipe couplings.
D. Show materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show dimensions.
E. Show number, size, and material of construction of tie rods and lugs for each thrust harness on the
project.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year after FINAL ACCEPTANCE,
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COUPLING SYSTEM DESIGN AND COMPONENT UNIT RESPONSIBILITY
A. The coupling manufacturer shall furnish the gaskets, bolts, nuts, glands, end rings, and hardware for
pipe couplings of all types and shall design these components as an integral system. Design the
gaskets for the coupling and appropriately size to provide a watertight seal at the design pressure and
temperature. Ship gaskets, bolts, nuts, glands, end rings, and hardware for pipe couplings with the
pipe coupling and clearly label indicating the origin of the material, including place and date of
manufacture. Package the manufacturer's printed installation instructions with each pipe coupling.
2.2 STEEL FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Steel couplings shall have center sleeves and end rings made of carbon; Steel couplings shall have
center sleeves and end rings made of Type 304 stainless; or Steel couplings shall have center
sleeves and end rings made of Type 316 stainless steel conforming to AWWA C219, Section 4.
Minimum center sleeve length shall be 5 inches for pipe sizes 3/4 inch through 4-1/2 inches, 7 inches
for pipe sizes 5 inches through 24 inches, and 10 inches for pipe sizes larger than 24 inches.
B. Sleeve bolts in exposed service shall be carbon, Type 304 stainless; or Type 316 stainless steel per
AWWA C219, Section 4. Sleeve bolts in buried or submerged service shall be Type 304 stainless; or
Type 316 stainless steel per AWWA C219, Section 4.
C. Steel end rings shall be cast, forged, or hot rolled in one piece. Do not use rings fabricated from two or
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 1

more shapes.
D. Wall thickness of sleeve shall be at least that specified for the size of pipe in which the coupling is to
be used.
2.3 DUCTILE -IRON FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Couplings shall have center sleeves and end rings made of ductile iron conforming to AWWA C219,
Section 4.
B. Sleeve bolts in exposed service shall be carbon; Type 304 stainless; or Type 316 stainless steel per
AWWA C219, Section 4. Sleeve bolts in buried or submerged service shall be Type 304 stainless or
Type 316 stainless steel per AWWA C219, Section 4.
2.4 JOINT HARNESSES
A. Tie bolts or studs shall be as shown in the following table. Bolt or stud material shall conform to ASTM
A193, Grade B7. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A194, Grade 2H. Lug material shall conform to ASTM
A36, ASTM A283, Grade B, C, or D, or ASTM A285, Grade C. Lug dimensions for steel pipe shall be
as shown in AWWA Manual M11 (2004 edition), Figure 13-20, using the number and size of lugs as
tabulated below.
B. Lugs for steel pipe shall be Type P for pipes 6 through 10 inches and Type RR for pipes 12 inches
and larger.; or Lug or ear dimensions for ductile -iron pipe shall be as shown in the drawings.
C. Manufactured lugs shall incorporate a three -hole design that utilizes two flange bolts to hold each lug
in place for each tie -rod. Lug shall be A36 steel or 316 stainless steel. Manufactured lugs shall be
Romac Series 490, or equal.
D. Select number and size of bolts based on the test pressure shown in Section 4005010. Stagger bolts
equally around pipe circumference. Where odd number is tabulated, place odd bolt at top. For test
pressures less than or equal to 150 psi, use the 150-psi design in the table above. For test pressures
between 150 and 300 psi, use the 300-psi design in the table above.
E. Provide washer for each nut. Washer material shall be the same as the nuts. Minimum washer
thickness shall be 1/8 inch.
2.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS FOR PLAIN -END STEEL PIPE
A. Couplings shall be steel, Dresser Style 38, Smith -Blair Type 411, Baker Series 200, or equal.
2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS FOR PLAIN -END DUCTILE -IRON PIPE
A. Couplings for pipe 12 inches and smaller shall be cast iron, Dresser Style 253 or 253 long sleeve,
Smith -Blair Type 441, Baker Series 228, or equal.
B. Couplings for pipe larger than 12 inches shall be cast iron or steel, Dresser Style 38 or 153,
Smith -Blair Style 411, Baker Series 228, or equal.
2.7 TRANSITION COUPLINGS
A. Couplings for connecting different pipes having different outside diameters shall be steel: Dresser
Style 62 or 162, Smith -Blair Series 413, Baker Series 212 or 220, or equal.
B. Couplings shall have an internal full circumference ring pipe stop at the midpoint of the coupling.
Inside diameter of coupling pipe stop shall equal inside diameter of smaller diameter pipe.
2.8 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. Adapters for steel pipe shall be steel: Dresser Style 128, Smith -Blair Type 913, or equal. Flange ends
shall match the flange of the connecting pipe; see detail piping specifications.
2.9 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS FOR CAST- AND DUCTILE -IRON PIPE
A. Adapters for cast- and ductile -iron pipe 12 inches and smaller shall be cast iron: Dresser Style 127,
Smith -Blair Series 912, or equal.
B. Adapters for cast- and ductile -iron pipe larger than 12 inches shall be steel: Dresser Style 128,
Smith -Blair Type 913, or equal.
C. Flange ends shall match the flange of the connecting pipe.
2.10 RESTRAINED FLANGE ADAPTER FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Restrained flange adapter shall be made of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.
B. Flange bolt circle of the adapter shall be compatible with Class 125 flanges per AWWA C115.
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 2

C. Restraint for the flange adapter shall consist of a plurality of individually actuated gripping wedges.
D. Restrained flange adapter shall be Series 2100 Megaflange as produced by EBAA Iron, Inc., or
approved equal.
E. Restrained flange adapters shall only be used specifically where shown on the Contract Documents or
with written approval from the Engineer for additional locations.
2.11 DISMANTLING JOINTS
A. The dismantling joint shall consist of a flanged steel spigot piece, a flanged sleeve, a center ring
welded onto the sleeve, and a follower ring containing a gasket through which the spigot piece slides
into the sleeve. The joint shall accommodate up to 2 inches of longitudinal movement. The longitudinal
adjustability shall be provided by a telescopic action of a flanged spigot and associated sleeve, which
inserts into the spigot. A system of tie bolts or rods shall connect the center ring of the sleeve or the
end flange on the sleeve to the end flange on the spigot piece. Provide washers and nuts on the tie
bolts on both sides of the center ring or sleeve and flange and the spigot end flange to allow for
adjustment of the extension length for the sleeve.
B. The minimum design pressure shall be the same as the adjacent piping.
Design stresses shall not exceed 40% of the yield strength of the materials. Minimum factory test
pressure shall be 150% of the design pressure.
C. The gasket shall be compressed by a separate bolting and gland system, independent of the tie bolts.
Gasket shall be isoprene, Buna-N or EPDM.
D. Fabrication, assembly, and erection shall complywith Section 400513.
E. Dismantling joints shall have a spigot piece made of steel conforming to ASTM A36, A53 (Type E or
S), or A283, Grade C having a minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and a flange adapter and follower
ring made of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.
F. Sleeve and follower ring bolts shall have a minimum yield strength of 105,000 psi, a minimum tensile
strength of 125,000 psi, and shall conform to ASTM A193, Grade B7.
G. Steel flanges, center ring and gasket follower ring, shall be cast, forged, or hot rolled in one piece.
Do not use flanges or rings fabricated from two or more shapes. Flanges shall conform to ANSI
Classes 125 and 150.
H. Wall thickness of spigot piece and sleeve shall be at least that specified for the size of pipe in which
the coupling is to be used.
I. Flanges: See Section 40051300.
J. Manufacturers: Romac Industries Style DJ400 or equal.
2.12 SEGMENTED RESTRAINED SLEEVE COUPLINGS AND FLANGED ADAPTER COUPLINGS FOR
CARBON AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
A. The coupling shall be of the split or segmented sleeve type with a double arch cross-section, which
closes around plain steel pipe ends. The design pressure and wall thickness of the body shall be at
least that specified for the size of pipe on which the coupling is to be used. Provide welded steel
restraint rings on the pipe ends for end restraint. As the coupling closes, it shall confine an elastomeric
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 3

gasket on each pipe end to create a radial seal. The axial seal shall be affected at the closure plates
as bolts pull the coupling snug round the pipe. Provide shoulders on each end of the couplings.
Flanged adapter couplings shall incorporate a flange on one end (instead of an end ring and shoulder)
to match the flange on the connecting pipe or valve. Products: Victaulic "Depend-O-Lok" Model F x F
Type 2 for sleeve couplings or Victaulic "Depend-O-Lok" Model F x F flanged adapter coupling for
flanged adapter couplings.
B. Carbon steel piping includes steel pipe lined with cement mortar, polyurethane or epoxy.
C. Body, flange, and closure plates for couplings used with carbon steel pipe in exposed service shall be
carbon steel per ASTM A36, Type 304 or 304L stainless steel per ASTM A240 or A 666; or Type 316
or 316L stainless steel per ASTM A240 or A666.
D. Body, flange, and closure plates for couplings used with carbon steel pipe in buried service shall be.
Type 304 or 304L stainless steel per ASTM A240 or A666; or Type 316 or 316L stainless steel per
ASTM A240 or A666.
E. End restraint rings for couplings used with carbon steel pipe shall be carbon steel per ASTM A108,
Grade 1020; Type 304 or 304L stainless steel per ASTM A276; or Type 316 or 316L stainless steel per
ASTM A276. Provide end restraint rings on each of the connecting pipes. The end rings shall be
welded to the pipe ends using a welding procedure complying with the ASME Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX. Weld the end restraint rings to the pipe before applying the lining and coating (if any is
specified) to the pipe. The welded end restraint rings shall have at least the pressure rating of the pipe
to which the coupling is attached.
F. Fasteners for couplings used with carbon steel pipe in exposed service shall be
Type 304 stainless steel per ASTM A276, F593, or F738 with stainless steel nuts per ASTM F594
or F836; carbon steel per ASTM A325, with carbon steel nuts and washers per ASTM A563; or
Type 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276, F593, or F738 with stainless steel nuts per ASTM F594
or F836
G. Fasteners for couplings used with carbon steel pipe in buried service shall be
Type 304 stainless steel per ASTM A276, F593, or F738 with stainless steel nuts per ASTM F594 or
F836; or Type 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276, F593, or F738 with stainless steel nuts per ASTM
F594 or F836.
H. Coupling body, flange, and closure plates for couplings used with stainless steel pipe shall be Type
304 or 304L stainless steel per ASTM A240 or A666; or Type 316 or 316L stainless steel per ASTM
A240 or A666.
I. End restraint rings for couplings used with stainless steel pipe shall be Type 304 or 304L stainless
steel per ASTM A276; or Type 316 or 316L stainless steel per ASTM A276. Provide end restraint rings
on each of the connecting pipes. The end rings shall be welded to the pipe ends using a welding
procedure complying with the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. The welded end restraint
rings shall have at least the pressure rating of the pipe to which the coupling is attached.
J. Fasteners for couplings used with stainless steel pipe shall be Type 304 stainless steel per ASTM
A276, F593, or F738 with stainless steel nuts per ASTM F594 or F836; or Type 316 stainless steel per
ASTM A276, F593, or F738 with stainless steel nuts per ASTM F594 or F836.
K. Gaskets shall be isoprene, Buna-N; or EPDM conforming to ASTM D2000 for water and sewage
service and having a temperature range of -20°F to +180°F.
L. Provide joint sealant between the pipe ends for piping 24 inches and larger after the sleeve coupling is
installed: Sikaflex 2C with Sikaflex 429 primer.
2.13 TYPE 1 EXPANSION JOINTS: FOR COPPER PIPE
A. Expansion joints for copper pipe shall be all bronze: Metraflex Model HPMF expansion compensator,
Hyspan Model 8509 or 8510 expansion compensator, or equal. Expansion compensators shall have
antitorque devices to protect the bellows. Minimum working pressure shall be 175 psig.
2.14 TYPE 2 EXPANSION JOINTS: FOR STEEL PIPE 4 INCHES AND SMALLER
A. Expansion joints for steel pipe 4 inches and smaller shall be carbon steel: Hyspan Model 8503 or 8504
expansion compensators, Metraflex Model HP expansion compensator, or equal. Expansion
compensators shall have antitorque devices to protect the bellows. Minimum working pressure shall
be 150 psi.
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 4

2.15 TYPE 3 EXPANSION JOINTS: TEFLON BELLOWS TYPE
A. Expansion joints shall be Teflon bellows type having three convolutions, ductile -iron flanges, Monel
reinforcing ring, and a Teflon facing on the flanges. Minimum working pressure shall be 110 psi.
Provide thrust harnesses. Flanges shall be Class 125, ASME B16.1. Products: Peabody -Dore Style
E-1608-B, Resistoflex No. R6905, or equal.
2.16 TYPE 4 EXPANSION JOINTS: SPHERICAL EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Spherical design expansion joints shall be chlorobutyl with polyester fiber reinforcing and be provided
with steel retaining rings and Type 304 stainless steel gusset plates and control rods. Expansion joints
shall have flat -face flanges integral with the body to match 125/150-pound flanges. Expansion joints
for hot water service shall be rated at a minimum of 150 psig at 212°F.
Joint Size
Flange to Flange Length
(inches)
Minimum Pressure Rating
(150°) (psi)
4-8
6
225
10-12
8
225
14-20
10-12
125
B. Expansion joints shall be manufactured by Metraflex Metrasphere, Proco Series 240, or equal.
2.17 TYPE 5 EXPANSION JOINTS: SINGLE; DOUBLE; OR TRIPLE ARCH RUBBER TYPE (24
INCHES AND SMALLER)
A. Expansion joints shall be rubber, single; double; or triple arch type, with integral flat -face ANSI Class
125/150 flanges.
1. Cover Elastomer: Butyl; Neoprene; or Chlorobutyl.
2. Tube Elastomer: Butyl; Neoprene; Chlorobutyl; Teflon®; Hypalon®; or Nitrile.
3. Arch Type: Open or Filled>>.
4. Fluid: Potable water; Raw water; Raw sewage; or sludge.
5. Fluid Temperature Range: 40°F to 105°F.
6. Ambient Temperature Range: 30' F to 120°F.
B. Minimum working pressure shall be 150 psi for joints 12 inches and smaller, 120 psi for 14- and
16-inch joints, 110 psi for 18- and 20-inch joints, and 100 psi for 24-inch joints. Provide steel thrust
plates, retaining rings, and control rods. Products: Proco Style 220, General Rubber Style 1075, or
equal.
2.18 TYPE 6 EXPANSION JOINTS: FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Each flexible expansion joint shall consist of two ball joints and two or three expansion sleeves.
Each expansion sleeve shall allow an expansion capability of at least 4 inches. Material of construction
shall be ductile iron conforming to the material requirements of AWWA C153. Minimum deflection
shall be 15 degrees in both vertical and horizontal planes. Minimum pressure rating of the flexible
coupling joint assembly shall be 350 psi. Provide stop collars on the sleeves to restrain the lateral
travel. Provide synthetic rubber gaskets in sleeves and balls. Ends of assembly shall be flanged or
mechanical joint to match the connecting piping.
B. Coat exposed, buried and submerged assemblies per Section 099000. Color of finish coat
shall match the connecting piping or be the same as the connecting piping.
C. Flexible expansion joints shall be EBAA Iron, Inc., "Flex -Tend"; Romac Industries "FlexiJoint"; or
equal.
2.19 TYPE 7: ELASTOMERIC COUPLING
A. Provide elastomeric couplings suitable for the pipe types and sizes to be connected. Elastomeric
coupling shall consist of an elastomeric plastic sleeve and Type 304 or 305 stainless steel pipe
clamps. Provide a minimum of two clamps for pipes up to 15 inches in outer diameter. Provide a
minimum of four clamps on a sleeve 10 inches long for pipes larger in diameter than 15 inches.
2.20 TYPE 8 COUPLINGS: FOR CONNECTING VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE TO PLASTIC OR DUCTILE -IRON
PIPE
A. Couplings shall consist of a styrene butadiene (SBR) or neoprene rubber body with stainless steel
bands, housings, and clamps. The clamping device for couplings 10 inches and larger shall be
cold -rolled steel or stainless steel. Products: Calder Couplings for pipes 3 through 8 inches and
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 5

Ceramicweld Coupling for pipes 10 through 42 inches.
2.21 TYPE 9: EXPANSION LOOPS FOR COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
A. Expansion loops shall consist of two flexible sections of Type 300 stainless steel hose and braid, two
90-degree elbows, and one 180-degree return with drain valve. Fittings shall be Schedule 40 carbon
steel with male NPT connections. Expansion loops shall provide a minimum of 1-1/2 inches of axial
movement in all directions and shall have a minimum pressure rating of 455 psi at 70°F. Install pipe
guides within four pipe diameters of each side of the loop, as recommended by the expansion loop
supplier. Manufacturers: Flexicraft, Metraflex, or equal.
2.22 TYPE 10: FLEXIBLE HOSE CONNECTORS 3 INCHES AND SMALLER
A. A. Flexible hose connectors 3 inches and smaller shall be of the corrugated metal hose type with
an external braid. Connectors shall have a minimum pressure rating of 300 psi at a temperature of
150°F. Corrugation tubing material shall be Type 316 stainless steel with Type 316 or 321
stainless steel braid material. End connections shall be ground joint female union with ANSI/ASME
B1.20.1 NPT threads; Class 150 flat -faced flanges. Length shall be 12-24 inches unless otherwise
indicated. Flexible connectors shall be American BOA, Flexonics, Metraflex, or equal.
2.23 TYPE 11: FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INTERNAL JOINT
A. Rubber Joint Liner: EPDM.
B. Bands, Shims, and Setscrews:
1. Stainless steel bands, spacers, shims, and setscrews for securing rubber membrane across
piping joints shall be Type 316 per ASTM A240.
2. Welding: Perform welding with coated electrode 316L, AWS Class A5.4, AC-DC-16, with tensile
strength of 70,000 psi.
C. Liquid Joint Lubrication:
1. Liquid joint lubricant to assist in installation of the rubber joint seal and bands shall be a nontoxic
vegetable -based lubricating gel.
2. Required Properties:
a. Shall not deteriorate or decompose while in storage for a minimum of two years.
b. Shall have a soft pasty consistency suitable for use intended from 0°F to 120°F.
c. Shall not have any deteriorating effect on natural or synthetic rubber gaskets.
d. Shall not impart taste or odor to water.
e. Shall have no objectionable odor.
f. Shall be nontoxic and does not support the growth of bacteria.
g. pH: 9.6 minimum and 11 maximum (pH meter).
h. Method of Test: ASTM D562.
i. Shall not contain any petroleum -based oils or grease.
j. Shall not contain any materials considered toxic.
D. Filling Materials for Gaps Between Joints: The filling material shall be an injected elastomeric joint
filler.
E. Epoxy:
1. Coating Appearance: Smooth, white, thixotropic liquid.
2. Gel Appearance: Smooth, white mastic of stiff consistency.
3. Service Temperature Range: 50°F to 200°F.
F. Thread Sealing Compound:
1. Thread sealing compound shall be a nontoxic paste type with Teflon.
2. Teflon Components Required Properties --Physical Data:
a. Flash Point: 410°F closed cup.
b. Specific Gravity: 1.4 to 1.42.
c. Viscosity: 200,000 to 275,000 centipoises.
d. Temperature Range: -50°F to 500°F.
e. Pressure Application: Maximum 10,000 psi.
G. Products:
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 6

Description
Method
Result
Flexural strength
ASTM D790
6,000 psi
Flexural modulus
ASTM D790
550,000 psi
Compressive strength,
yield
ASTM D695
4,275 psi
Tensile strength
ASTM D638
3,700 psi
Tensile ultimate elongation
ASTM D638
1.4%
Hardness, Shore D
ASTM D2583
85
Hardness, Pencil
ASTM D3363
6H
Impact, IZOD
ASTM D256
0.19 ft-lb/inch of notch
Temperature resistance
Steel, unprimed
250OF
Temperature resistance
Concrete
250OF
Solids content
--------
100%
Solvents present
-------
None
2.24 TYPE 12 EXPANSION JOINTS: METAL BELLOWS PUMP CONNECTION JOINTS 1-1/2 THROUGH 24
INCHES
A. Provide multiple bellows, annular, flanged expansion joint constructed from single or multiple metal
laminations. Provide flow liner. Provide thrust restraining rod system. Minimum pressure rating shall
be 275 psi at a temperature of 200°F. Flanges shall be Class 150 per ASME B16.5. Provide fixed,
flat -face flanges. Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Item
Material
Specification
Bellows or flow liner
Stainless steel
ASTM A240 or A666, Type
304 or 321
Flanges
Steel
ASTM A285, Grade C
B. Products: Hyspan Model 5501 R or Keflex Type 151-TR or equal.
2.25 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES FOR EXPANSION JOINTS AND EXPANSION COMPENSATORS (TYPES
1, 2, AND 3)
A. For copper pipes, use Hyspan Series 9500 Copper Tube Alignment Guides, Metraflex Style I, B-Line,
Anvil International, or equal.
B. For bellows -type expansion joints and expansion loops in steel, PVC, and CPVC pipe, use
Hyspan Series 9500 Pipe Alignment Guide, Metraflex Style I, B-Line, Anvil International, or
equal.
2.26 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
A. See Section 400500.
2.27 THREADED CAPS FOR PROTECTION OF NUTS AND BOLT THREADS
A. See Section 400500.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS, SEGMENTED SLEEVE COUPLINGS, AND
EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from pipe ends. Clean gaskets in flexible pipe couplings before installing.
B. Install expansion joints per manufacturer's recommendations, so that 50% of total travel is available
for expansion and 50% is available for contraction.
C. Lubricate bolt threads with graphite and oil prior to installation.
D. Install threaded nut and bolt thread protection caps after completing the bolt, nut, and gasket
installation. Install on exposed; buried; and submerged flexible pipe couplings, transition couplings,
flanged coupling adapters, dismantling joints, and segmented restrained sleeve couplings.
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 7

3.2 INSTALLATION OF TYPE 11 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INTERNAL JOINT
A. Store the membranes in a cool, dry environment away from direct sunlight. Do not remove the rubber
joint seals from the plastic bags prior to use. Store seals in a cool, dry environment and do not remove
from their plastic bags until required for use. Do not allow them to remain in direct sunlight.
B. Surface Preparation of Joint Area: Prepare the area of pipe either side of the joint where the actual lip
seals make contact with the pipe to a finish that will allow the lip seals to bed consistently and so
provide a permanent seal.
C. Surface Lubrication: Immediately prior to fitting the seal, clean the area with a dry brush and coat with
lubricant that is a nontoxic vegetable soap compatible with the composition of the flexible joint seal.
Apply the lubricant using a paintbrush over the ground area. Do not pick up dust deposits from the
unground surface into the lubricant and therefore onto the ground surface.
D. Positioning the Seal: Prior to placing the seal, coat the area of pipe which will be covered with the seal
with an epoxy coating and allow to partially set up prior to seal installation. Check the seal for damage.
Check that the test unit is tight before fitting the seal in place. Place the flexible joint seal in position
bridging the joint gap, guided by the marks. Position the seal accurately on the ground areas. The test
unit in the seal should be located at either 9 o'clock or 3 o'clock position. Position the seal parallel to
the joint gap.
E. Positioning Retaining Bands: Place two stainless steel radiused shims, 6 inches long and 3/64-inch-
thick, underneath the wedge area in the grooves, to provide a bridge that will transmit the radial load
evenly to the flexible joint seal, as the bands are expanded. Then place the stainless steel bands in the
grooves provided in the seal. Temporarily lock both bands in position.
F. Expanding the Seal into Position: Use the hydraulic expanding device to apply a set pressure to the
retaining bands of the flexible joint seal.
1. When positioning the expander in line with the retaining band, ensure that the band remains in
the groove of the flexible joint seal and does not become moved or dislodged. Ensure the
expander is positioned correctly on the band.
2. The expander is expanded which radially transmits a load against the retaining band and flexible
joint seal. Hold this pressure for at least two minutes. The range of pressure registered on the
expander shall be 4,000 psi minimum and 5,000 psi maximum.
3. A space is provided at bottom dead center position of the expander that exposes the
grooved -end cleats of the retaining band. Fit a radiused locking wedge piece between the
exposed gap of the expanded band ends. Select a size of wedge having a slight interference fit
between the band ends, and tap the wedge (leading edge first) into position, locking in the
compression of the flexible joint seal. The radius of the wedge shall equal the radius of the pipe.
4. Release the hydraulic pressure from the expander and repeat the procedure on the second
retaining band of the seal.
5. Repeat this entire operation (i.e., re -expanded) not before 30 minutes have elapsed after the first
expansion. This allows for any seal relaxation that may take place and usually a slightly larger
wedge can be fitted. The load forces transmitted by the expander have been determined from
test data and should not be altered by changing the pressure used to activate the expander.
G. Testing the Seal, Test 1: Apply two individual pressure tests to the seal before closing the pipeline.
Apply the first test after each section has been completed and not before 30 minutes have elapsed
after the final fitting of the seal. Apply a pressure of 10 psig. Because of the excessive ballooning to
the center membrane of the seal (that will occur at this higher pressure), lock a restraining device
called a "test band" in its expanding position during testing. If the pressure test indicates leakage,
determine the cause and repeat from Step E.
H. Testing the Seal, Test 2: In the second test, introduce 5 psig through the valve in the flexible joint seal.
Sustain this pressure while applying a soap and water test to the outer edge and entire body of the
seal. Inspect for leakage. If pressure test indicates leakage, determine the cause and repeat from Step
E.
Testing Valve Assembly: After the final test of 5 psig, seal the test valve of the flexible joint seal with a
countersunk hex head completion plug using a nontoxic thread -sealing compound on the threads.
Remove installation hardware, test band, and pressure gauges from the pipe.
3.3 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat buried flexible pipe couplings (including joint harness assemblies), transition couplings,
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 8

segmented sleeve couplings, and flanged coupling adapters per Section 099000. Coat buried bolt
threads, tie bolt threads, and nuts per Section 099000. Then wrap the buried couplings with
polyethylene wrap.
B. Coat flexible pipe couplings (including joint harness assemblies), transition couplings, segmented
sleeve couplings, and flanged coupling adapters located indoors, in vaults and structures, and above
ground with the same coating system as specified for the adjacent pipe. If the adjacent pipe is not
coated, coat couplings per Section 099000. Apply prime coat at factory.
C. Line carbon steel and iron flexible pipe couplings and segmented sleeve couplings per Section
099000.
D. Alternatively, line and coat carbon steel and iron flexible pipe couplings and segmented sleeve
couplings with fusion -bonded epoxy.
E. Wrap Types 7 and 8 couplings with polyethylene.
F. Coat couplings, expansion joints; expansion compensators; and alignment guides located above
ground or in vaults and structures [with the same coating system as specified for the adjacent pipe. If
the adjacent pipe is not coated, coat couplings per Section 099000. Color shall match the color of the
connecting pipe.
3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Hydrostatically test flexible pipe couplings, expansion joints, segmented sleeve couplings, and
expansion compensators in place with the pipe being tested. Test in accordance with Section 400515.
3.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR EXPANSION JOINTS AND EXPANSION COMPENSATORS
(TYPES 1, 2, AND 3)
A. At each expansion compensator or bellows -type expansion joint located on horizontal piping runs,
provide a pipe alignment guide within four pipe diameters of each end of the expansion joint or
compensator. Provide a second pipe alignment guide within 14 pipe diameters of each end of the
expansion joint or compensator.
B. Mount pipe alignment guides on wall brackets or steel channels as manufactured by Anvil
International, B-Line, or equal.
END OF SECTION
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
400722 - 10

SECTION 400762
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes materials, installation, and testing of steel, cast-iron, and ductile -iron wall pipes
and sleeves (including wall collars and seepage rings) and penetrations.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Precast Concrete Utility Structures: 330516.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit detail drawings for fabricated steel or cast-iron wall and floor pipes and sleeves, wall flanges,
seep rings, and sealing materials. Show dimensions and wall thicknesses.
C. Show flange sizes and the appropriate ANSI or AWWA flange dimensional standard where flanged
end wall pipes or penetrations are used.
D. Show grooved -end dimensions and AWWA grooved -end dimensional standard where grooved -end
wall pipes or penetrations are used.
E. List coating systems to be applied, manufacturer, and dry thickness of coatings. Call out coatings
where coatings are to be applied.
F. List materials of construction, with ASTM material reference and grade.
G. Submit manufacturer's instructions for installing rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices.
H. Submit six copies of the results of the leakage test for cast-iron sleeves having shrink -fit steel collars
or collar halves bottomed in a groove and steel sleeves having welded steel collars.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year after FINAL ACCEPTANCE
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Use cast-iron, ductile -iron, or fabricated steel wall sleeves when containing rubber annular hydrostatic
sealing devices through which piping passes.
B. Use only cast-iron or ductile -iron wall pipes when connecting to cast-iron and ductile -iron pipe. Use
only fabricated steel or stainless steel wall pipes when connecting to steel or stainless steel pipe,
respectively.
C. Cast-iron flanges shall conform to ASME 1316.1, Class 125 or 250, to match the flange on the
connecting pipe.
D. Steel flanges shall conform to AWWA C207, Class D. Class 300 steel flanges 48 inches and smaller
shall conform to AWWA C207, Class F. Class 300 flanges larger than 48 inches shall conform to the
dimensions of ASME 1316.1 Class 250 flanges. Flanges shall be flat face. Flanges shall match the
flange on the connecting pipe.
E. See Section 400500 for flange bolts and gaskets.
2.2 CAST-IRON OR DUCTILE -IRON WALL PIPES AND SLEEVES
A. Provide cast- or ductile -iron wall pipes with ends as shown in the drawings for connection to adjacent
cast-iron and ductile -iron pipe or for containing pipes where they pass through concrete walls, ceilings,
and floor slabs. Provide seepage ring on wall pipes and sleeves passing through concrete walls and
slabs that are to be watertight. Locate collars such that the collar is at the center of the wall or floor
slab, unless otherwise shown in the drawings.
B. Wall pipes and sleeves shall be of the following types:
1. Pipe or sleeve with integrally cast seep ring.
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS 400762 - 1

2. Pipe or sleeve with shrink -fit steel collar attached.
3. Pipe or sleeve with steel collar halves bottomed in a groove provided in the pipe or sleeve.
4. Pipe or sleeve with ductile iron collar welded continuously around pipe (360 degrees) on both
sides of collar. Welding shall be done in pipe manufacturer's shop by a qualified welder.
C. Minimum wall thickness for pipes and sleeves having integrally cast seep rings shall be as follows:
1. Pipe or Sleeve Size 3 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.48 inches.
2. Pipe or Sleeve Size 4 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.52 inches.
3. Pipe or Sleeve Size 6 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.55 inches.
4. Pipe or Sleeve Size 8 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.60 inches.
5. Pipe or Sleeve Size 10 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.68 inches.
6. Pipe or Sleeve Size 12 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.75 inches.
7. Pipe or Sleeve Size 14 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.66 inches.
8. Pipe or Sleeve Size 16 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.70 inches.
9. Pipe or Sleeve Size 18 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.75 inches.
10. Pipe or Sleeve Size 20 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.80 inches.
11. Pipe or Sleeve Size 24 inches: Minimum Wall Thickness 0.89 inches.
D. Minimum wall thickness of pipes or sleeves having shrink -fit collars shall be special Class 52. Cut
shrink -fit collars from a 1/4-inch-thick steel ring. Attach the collar to a cast-iron or ductile -iron pipe or
sleeve by heating the steel collar and allowing it to shrink over the pipe at the necessary location.
Provide an epoxy bond (Keysite 740 or 742 or Scotchkote 302) between the pipe and collar. Sandblast
the area of the pipe to be epoxy coated per SSPC SP-10.
E. Wall pipes or sleeves having steel collar halves bottomed in a groove shall be ductile iron Special
Class 54 minimum unless otherwise shown. Wall flanges shall consist of 1/4-inch-thick steel seep ring
halves for pipes through 24-inch and 3/8-inch-thick halves for pipe 30 inches and larger, bottomed in a
groove provided on the pipe. The pipe groove shall be machine cut to a depth of 1/16 to 5/64 inch to
provide a press fit for the seep ring. Seep ring halves shall be welded together after fit into groove but
shall not be welded to pipe. Seep rings shall be sealed completely around the pipe with silicon sealant
manufactured by Dow -Corning No. 790, General Electric Silpruf, or equal.
F. The material used in cast- or ductile -iron wall flanges, wall sleeves, and wall penetrations shall
conform to ASTM A395, A436, A536, A48 (Class 35), or A126 (Class B).
G. Pressure test at least one of each size of cast-iron pipes or sleeves having shrink -fit steel collars or
collar halves installed in a groove in the pipe at the place of fabrication to demonstrate watertightness
of the seal between the collar and the sleeve. The test shall be at a pressure of 20 psig for four hours'
duration and shall show zero leakage.
2.3 FABRICATED STEEL WALL PIPES AND SLEEVES
A. Provide fabricated steel wall pipes and sleeves with ends as shown in the drawings for connection to
adjacent steel pipes, or for containing pipes, where they pass through concrete walls. Provide seepage
ring or wall flange on wall pipes and sleeves passing through concrete walls and slabs that are to be
watertight. Wall thickness shall be the same as the pipe wall thickness when connecting to steel pipe.
Minimum wall thickness for sleeves containing pipes shall be standard weight per ASME 1336.10 for
sleeves 72 inches and smaller and 1/2 inch for sleeves greater than 72 inches through 96 inches.
B. Wall flanges shall be in the form of a steel wall collar welded to the steel sleeve or penetration. Cut
welded wall collars from a 1/4-inch steel ring. Attach the collar to a steel wall pipe or sleeve with full
circle, 3/16-inch fillet welds. Welding procedures shall be in accordance with ASME 1331.3, Chapter V.
C. Steel pipe used in fabricating wall sleeves containing pipes shall comply with ASTM A53 (Type E or S),
Grade B; ASTM A135, Grade B; ASTM A139, Grade B; or API 5L or 5LX. Wall pipes connecting to
steel pipe shall be of the same material as the connecting pipe. Wall collar material shall comply with
ASTM A36, A105, A181, or A182.
D. Stainless steel pipe used in fabricating wall pipes shall be of the same material as the connecting pipe.
Wall collar material shall comply with ASTM A240.
E. Pressure test at least one of each size of fabricated steel wall sleeve or penetration and collar
assemblies at the place of fabrication to demonstrate watertightness of the seal between the collar and
the sleeve. The test shall be at a pressure of 20 psig for four hours' duration and shall show zero
leakage.
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS 400762 - 2

2.4 RUBBER ANNULAR HYDROSTATIC SEALING DEVICES
A. Rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be of the modular mechanical type, utilizing
interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
sleeve and the passing pipe. Assemble links to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe, with a
pressure plate under each bolthead and nut.
B. Materials of construction shall be as follows:
1. Pressure plate: Delrin plastic; carbon steel; Type 304 stainless steel; Type 316 stainless steel;
or Reinforced nylon polymer.
2. Bolts and nuts for links: Type 303 or 316 stainless steel; or Zinc phosphated carbon steel.
3. Sealing element: EPDM or Nitrile rubber.
C. The size of the wall sleeve needed to accommodate the passing pipe shall be as recommended by the
rubber annular seal manufacturer.
D. Provide centering blocks in 25 percent of the sealing elements on pipelines larger than 12 inches in
diameter.
E. The rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be Link Seal as manufactured by Thunderline
Corporation; Innerlynx as manufactured by Advance Products & Systems, Inc.; or equal.
2.5 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS FOR FLANGED -END WALL PIPES
A. See Section 400500.
2.6 POLYETHYLENE FOAM FILLER FOR PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Packing foam shall be an extruded closed -cell polyethylene foam rod, such as Minicel backer rod,
manufactured by Industrial Systems Department, Plastic Products Group of Hercules, Inc.,
Middletown, Delaware; Ethafoam, as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Michigan; or
equal. The rod shall be 1/2 inch larger in diameter than the annular space.
2.7 POLYURETHANE SEALANT FOR PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Sealant shall be multipart, polyurethane sealant, to cure at ambient temperature, for continuous
immersion in water. Install as recommended by the manufacturer. Products: SIKA Sikaflex 2C or
equal.
2.8 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Line and coat sleeves and pipes except stainless steel with fusion -bonded epoxy per Section
099000 or Engineer approved fusion bonded epoxy coating system.
B. Coat penetrations and sleeves exposed, above ground, or in vaults and structures in accordance with
Section 099000 or Engineer approved fusion -bonded epoxy coating system.
C. Coat submerged sleeves and penetrations per Section 099000, System No. 12 or Engineer approved
fusion bonded epoxy coating system.
D. Coat buried sleeves and penetrations per Section 099000, System No. 10 or Engineer approved
fusion bonded epoxy coating system.
E. Do not coat stainless steel sleeves and penetrations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LOCATION OF PIPES AND SLEEVES
A. Provide a wall or floor pipe where shown in the drawings and wherever piping passes through walls or
floors of tanks or channels in which the water surface is above the pipe penetration.
B. Provide a floor sleeve where shown in the drawings and wherever plastic pipe, steel, or stainless steel
pipe 3 inches and smaller or stainless steel or copper tubing passes through a floor or slab. Provide a
rubber annular sealing device in the annular space between the sleeve and the passing pipe or tubing.
C. Provide wall sleeves where shown in the drawings and wherever plastic, steel or stainless steel pipe 3
inches and smaller, or stainless steel or copper tubing passes through a wall. Provide a single rubber
annular seal when the wall is 8 inches thick or less. Provide two rubber annular seals (one at each end
of the sleeve) when the wall is more than 8 inches thick. Pack the annular space with polyethylene
foam filler and fill the ends of the penetration with 2 inches of elastomeric sealant on both sides of the
structure.
D. Where wall sleeves are installed in which water or soil is on one or both sides of the channel or wall,
provide two rubber annular seals (one at each end of the sleeve).
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS 400762 - 3

E. Where pipes pass through walls or slabs and no sleeves or wall or floor pipe with seep ring is
provided, pack the annular space with polyethylene foam filler and fill the ends of the penetration with
2 inches of elastomeric sealant on both sides of the structure.
3.2 INSTALLATION IN EXISTING CONCRETE WALLS AND SLABS
A. Core drill holes 1 to 2 inches larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the wall flange or collar.
Install wall pipe and collar assembly axially aligned with the piping to which it will be connected or will
contain. Pack the void space between the sleeve and concrete with polyethylene foam filler and fill the
ends of the penetration with 2 inches of elastomeric sealant on both sides of the structure.
3.3 INSTALLATION IN NEW CONCRETE WALLS AND SLABS
A. Install wall pipes and sleeves in walls before placing concrete. Do not allow any portion of the pipe or
sleeve to touch any of the reinforcing steel. Install wall pipe or sleeve and collar assembly axially
aligned with the piping to which it will be attached or will contain. Provide supports to prevent the pipe
or sleeve from displacing or deforming while the concrete is being poured and is curing.
3.4 INSTALLATION IN DRY FLOORS AND SLABS
A. Install pipe sleeves and spools in concrete floors and slabs which do not have water over them such
that the sleeve or pipe extends from the bottom of the floor or slab to an elevation sufficient to make
pipe and fitting connections; unless shown otherwise in the drawings.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF WALL PIPES HAVING FLANGED END CONNECTIONS
A. Check alignment before grouting in place or pouring concrete. Realign if the sleeve is not properly
aligned.
B. Install flanged end wall sleeves or penetrations with bolt holes of the end flanges straddling the
horizontal and vertical centerlines of the sleeve.
3.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF WELDERS
A. Welder qualifications shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF RUBBER ANNULAR HYDROSTATIC SEALING DEVICES
A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.8 FIELD TESTING
A. Check each wall penetration for leakage at the time the hydraulic structure is tested for leakage; see
Section 033000. Penetrations shall show zero leakage.
END OF SECTION
WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS 400762 - 4

SECTION 402040 DUCTILE -IRON PROCESS PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes materials, testing, and installation of ductile -iron process pipe and fittings 12-
inches and smaller.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Trenching and Backfilling: 312333.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
D. Pressure Testing of Piping: 400515.
E. Wall Pipes, Seep Rings, and Penetrations: 400762.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 013300.
B. Provide an affidavit of compliance with standards referenced in this specification, e.g., AWWA C151.
Submit copy of report of pressure tests for qualifying the designs of all sizes and types of AWWA
C153 fittings that are being used in the project. The pressure test shall demonstrate that the minimum
safety factor described in AWWA C153, Section 5.5 is met.
C. Submit piping layout profile drawings showing location and dimensions of pipe and fittings; submit after
equipment and valve submittals have been reviewed and marked "Resubmittal not required." Include
laying lengths of valves, meters, in -line pumps, and other equipment determining piping dimensions.
Label or number each fitting or piece of pipe. Piping having identical design pressure class, laying
lengths, and bell -and -spigot dimensions that is to be placed in long straight reaches of alignment may
have the same identifying label or number.
D. Provide the following information:
1. Mortar lining thickness.
2. Wall thickness.
3. Outside coating.
4. Material test data for this project.
5. Show deflections at push -on and mechanical joints.
6. Submit joint and fitting details and manufacturer's data sheets.
E. Submit calculations and test data proving that the proposed restrained joint arrangement can transmit
the required forces with a minimum safety factor of 1.5.
F. Submit certificate that cement for mortar lining complies with ASTM C150, designating type.
G. Submit test report on physical properties of rubber compound used in the gaskets.
H. Submit drawing or manufacturer's data sheet showing flange facing, including design of facing
serrations.
I. Submit weld procedure specification, procedure qualification record, and welder's qualifications prior to
any welding to ductile -iron pipe.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year following FINAL ACCEPTANCE;
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
A. Pipe shall be cast ductile iron, conforming to AWWA C151.
B. All pipe shall be manufactured in the United States. The Material Supplier and/or Contractor shall
furnish data certified by the Manufacturer that all pipe is of domestic manufacture.
2.2 PIPE MARKING
A. Plainly mark each length of straight pipe and each fitting at the bell end to identify the design pressure
class, the ductile -iron wall thickness, the date of manufacture, and the proper location of the pipe item
by reference to the layout schedule. Mark the spigot end of restrained joint pipe to show clearly the
DUCTILE -IRON PROCESS PIPE 402040 - 1

required depth of insertion into the bell.
2.3 PIPE WALL THICKNESS
A. Minimum wall thicknesses for pipe having grooved -end joints shall be as follows:
1. Pipe Size 4 to 16-Inch: Thickness Class 53
2. Pipe Size 18-Inch: Thickness Class 54
3. Pipe Size 20-Inch: Thickness Class 55
4. Pipe Size 24 to 36-Inch: Thickness Class 56
5. Pipe Size 42-Inch and Larger: Thickness Class 53.
B. Minimum wall thickness for pipe having push -on or mechanical joints, restrained joints, plain ends, or
cast flange ends shall be Thickness Class 50 unless otherwise shown in the drawings.
C. Minimum wall thickness for pipe having threaded flanges shall be Special Class 53 or Pressure Class
350.
D. Minimum pipe wall thickness required for corporation stops and tapped outlets shall be in accordance
with Table A.1 of AWWA C151 for three full threads for design pressures up to 250 psi and four full
threads for design pressures over 250 to 350 psi. Provide threaded weld -on boss for tapped outlets
where indicated in the drawings.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. Fittings 48 inches and smaller shall conform to AWWA C110 with a minimum pressure rating of 250
psi. Flanges shall be flat faced.
B. Mechanical joint fittings conforming to AWWA C153 may be used in lieu of AWWA C110 fittings.
Mechanical joint ductile -iron fittings 18 through 48 inches conforming to AWWA C110 (except for
laying length) with a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi may also be used.
C. Grooved -end fittings shall conform to AWWA C110 with grooved ends conforming to AWWA C606,
radius cut rigid joints. Fitting material shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 30; ASTM A126, Class B; or
ASTM A536, Grade 65-42-10. Wall thickness of ductile -iron (ASTM A536) fittings shall conform to
AWWA C110 or C153; wall thickness of cast-iron fittings shall conform to AWWA C110. Fittings and
couplings shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
D. Material for fittings with welded -on bosses shall have a Charpy notch impact value of minimum 10
ft-lbs under the conditions defined in AWWA C151. Test completed welds by the liquid penetrant
method per ASTM E165.
2.5 FLANGES
A. Flanges shall be solid back, Class 125 per AWWA C115, or Class 250, flat faced per ASME B16.1
with serrated facings. Flanges on pipe shall be either cast or threaded. Material shall be ductile iron.
B. Flanged pipe and fittings shall be shop fabricated, not field fabricated. Assembly of flange on pipe
outside of manufacturer's shop is unacceptable. Threaded flanges shall comply with AWWA C115.
Flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened in the shop, then machined flat and
perpendicular to the pipe barrel. Flanges shall be back -faced parallel to the face of flange. Prior to
assembly of the flange onto the pipe, apply a thread compound to the threads to provide a leak -free
connection. There shall be zero leakage through the threads at a hydrostatic test pressure of 250 psi
without the use of the gasket.
C. Flanged pipe for gas service shall be in accordance with AWWA C115 and ANSI A21.52. In addition to
pipe marking specified in AWWA C115 and ANSI A21.52, conspicuously stamp each flanged pipe with
words "AIR TESTED".
D. Material for blind flanges shall be ductile iron or as indicated on the Drawings.
2.6 PIPE LINING
A. Line pipe interior and fittinas with cement mortar per AWWA C104/A21.4. except as otherwise
described herein or as otherwise shown. Lining thickness shall be the double thickness listed in
AWWA C104, Section 4.7. Cement for lining material shall conform to ASTM C150, Type It.
B. Line fittings per Section 099000.
C. The inside coating of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lining to a
minimum thickness of 40 mils in raw sewage, primary effluent, primary sludge, anaerobically digested
sludge, and other corrosive environments. The epoxy coating shall be installed and tested in strict
accordance with AWWA C 116/ANSI A21.16 and as supplemented in these specifications.
DUCTILE -IRON PROCESS PIPE 402040 - 2

D. Where specifically called for in these specifications or shown on the drawings, the inside
coating of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be VITCO SG-14 glass lining (porcelain enamel) to a
minimum thickness of 10 mils.
1. The glass lining applied to pipe and fittings shall be hard, smooth, continuous vitreous material
which is formulated to prevent the adherence of grease in sludge and scum lines, and to resist
the adherence of crystalline metal salt deposits (Struvite and Vivionite) to sludge and centrate
lines.
2. The glass portion of the lining, the frit(s) used in the formulation, as supplied from the
manufacturer, shall have a density of 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter as measured by
ASTM D-792.
3. The finished lining shall be able to withstand a strain of 0.001 inch/inch of the base metal without
visible damage to the glass and it shall have a minimum hardness of 5 on the Moh's hardness
scale.
4. The lining shall be capable of withstanding an instantaneous thermal shock from ambient +
350 degrees F to ambient without visible crazing, blistering or spalling.
5. The lining shall be resistant to corrosion by an HCI solution adjusted to a pH of 3 at 125 degrees
F and a NaOH solution adjusted to a pH of 10 at 125 degrees F. Demonstration of this shall be
by a weight loss of not more than 3 milligrams per square inch when exposed for 30 minutes.
6. There shall be negligible visible loss of surface gloss to the lining after immersing a cut
production sample in an 8 percent by weight sulfuric acid solution at 148 degrees F for a period
of 10 minutes.
7. The lining shall be of a light, bright color to allow visual detection of defects more easily.
E. Line blind flanges per Section 099000.
F. Pipe and fittings for process air service shall be unlined (and supplied with EPDM gaskets).
G. Cement -mortar for pointing interior joints shall consist of one part cement to one and one-half parts of
washed plaster sand conforming to ASTM C35, mixed with the minimum amount of water which will
permit placing the mortar.
H. Maintain a moist environment inside the lined pipe and fittings by sealing the ends with polyethylene
sheet.
I. Loose areas of cement -mortar lining are not acceptable. Remove and reconstruct lining in areas
where quality is defective, such as sand pockets, voids over sanded areas, blisters, drummy areas,
cracked areas, and thin spots. Longitudinal cracks in excess of 1/32 inch in width or where crack
extends to metal shall be repaired with epoxy. Repair all cracks larger than 1/16 inch with epoxy.
2.7 GROOVED -END COUPLINGS
A. Grooved -end pipe couplings shall be ductile iron, ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12). Gaskets shall be
halogenated butyl rubber or EPDM or Buna-N and shall conform to ASTM D2000.
B. Bolts in exposed service shall conform to ASTM A183, 110,000-psi tensile strength or ASTM A193,
Grade B8, Class 2. Bolts in buried or submerged service shall be ASTM A193, Grade B8, Class 2.
C. Couplings for pipe 24 inches and smaller shall conform to AWWA C606 for flexible radius ductile -iron
pipe, except where rigid radius couplings are required to connect to fittings. Couplings for pipe sizes
30 and 36 inches shall be in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's published literature for
tolerances and dimensions for flexible and rigid radius cut joints. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 31,
Gustin-Bacon No. 500, or equal.
D. Grooved -end adapter flanges for piping 24 inches and smaller having an operating pressure of 150 psi
and less shall be Victaulic Style 341 or 342 or equal. Flange dimensions shall conform to ASME
B16.1, Class 125.
E. Grooved -end transition couplings for connecting ductile -iron pipe 12 inches and smaller to steel pipe
shall be Victaulic Style 307 or equal.
2.8 GASKETS FOR FLANGES
A. See Section 400500.
2.9 GASKETS FOR MECHANICAL, PUSH -ON, AND RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. Synthetic or natural rubber in accordance with AWWA C111.
B. Gasket materials shall be selected by pipe manufacturer and shall be suitable for service and
maximum operating temperature of piping system.
DUCTILE -IRON PROCESS PIPE 402040 - 3

2.10 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
A. See Section 400500.
2.11 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR MECHANICAL AND RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. Bolts, nuts and washers for mechanical and restrained joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Standard
C111/A21.11 and shall be cadmium plated meeting SAE AMS-QQ-P-416, Type 1, Class 2
(Cor-Ten, Cor-Blue, or approved equal) or Type 304 or 316 stainless steel tee head bolts and hex nuts
with Teflon coated nuts.
2.12 OUTLETS AND NOZZLES
A. Provide outlets 2-inches and using a tapping saddle, using a threaded weld -on boss; or as indicated in
the Drawings.
B. For outlets larger than 2 inches use a tee with a flanged outlet.
C. For outlets larger than 2 inches in buried piping, use a tee with a restrained joint outlet.
2.13 JOINTS
A. Joints in aboveground or submerged piping or piping located in vaults and structures shall be
grooved end or flanged.
B. Joints in buried piping shall be of the restrained; push -on; or mechanical -joint type per AWWA C111
except where flanged joints are required to connect to valves, meters, and other equipment. Provide
unrestrained buried joints except where restrained joints are specifically shown in the drawings.
C. Restrained joints for piping 6 inches and larger shall be American Cast Iron Pipe "Lok-Ring" or
"Flex -Ring," U.S. Pipe "TR-Flex," or equal. Weldments for restrained joints shall be tested by the liquid
penetrant method per ASTM E165. Restrained joints for field closures shall be "Megalug" by EBAA
Iron.
D. Restrained joints in 4-inch-diameter buried piping shall be American Cast Iron Pipe Company
"Fast -Grip," U.S. Pipe Field-lok gasket within Tyton joint pipe and fittings, or equal. Joint restraint shall
be certified to four times rated pressure of 200 psi by Factory Mutual.
E. Where thrust restraint is called for in the drawings, provide pipe with restrained joints capable of
transmitting 1.5 times the thrust, as calculated by the following equation:
2.14 MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM USING FOLLOWER RING AND WEDGES
A. The restraining mechanism shall consist of a follower gland having a seal gasket and individually
actuated wedges that increase their resistance to pullout as pressure or external forces increase. The
system manufacturer shall provide all the components (follower ring, wedges, and gaskets) for the
restraining device. The device shall be capable of full mechanical joint deflection during assembly, and
the flexibility of the joint shall be maintained after burial. The joint restraint ring and its wedging
components shall be constructed of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 60-42-10. The
wedges shall be ductile iron, heat -treated to a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. Dimensions of the
gland shall be such that it can be used with mechanical joint bells conforming to AWWA C111 and
AWWA C153. The design shall use torque limiting twist -off nuts to provide actuation of the restraining
wedges. The mechanical joint restraint shall be available in the size range of 3 through 48 inches.
Minimum rated pressure shall be 350 psi for sizes 16 inches and smaller and 250 psi in sizes 18
inches and larger. Products: Megalug Series 1100 as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc., or equal.
2.15 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE WELDMENTS
A. All welding to ductile -iron pipe, such as for bosses, joint restraint, and joint bond cables, shall be done
at the place of manufacture of the pipe. Perform welding by skilled welders experienced in the method
and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the standard qualification procedures of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding Qualifications.
B. Welds shall be of uniform composition, neat, smooth, full strength, and ductile. Completely grind out
porosity and cracks, trapped welding flux, and other defects in the welds in such a manner that will
permit proper and complete repair by welding.
C. Completed welds shall be inspected at the place of manufacture by the liquid penetrant method.
Conform to the requirements specified in ASTM E165, Method A, Type I or Type II. The materials
used shall be water washable and nonflammable.
DUCTILE -IRON PROCESS PIPE 402040 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY, UNLOADING, AND TEMPORARY STORAGE OF PIPE AT SITE
A. Limit onsite pipe storage to a maximum of one week.
B. Use unloading and installation procedures that avoid cracking of the lining. If necessary, use plastic
sheet bulkheads to close pipe ends and keep cement -mortar lining moist.
C. Deliver the pipe alongside the pipelaying access road over which the pipe trailer -tractors can travel
under their own power. Place the pipe in the order in which it is to be installed and secure it from
rolling.
D. Do not move pipe by inserting any devices or pieces of equipment into the pipe barrel. Field repair
linings damaged by unloading or installation procedures.
3.2 SANITATION OF PIPE INTERIOR
A. During laying operations, do not place tools, clothing, or other materials in the pipe.
B. When pipelaying is not in progress, close the ends of the installed pipe by a child- and vermin -proof
plug.
3.3 INSTALLING FLANGED PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Install in accordance with Sections 400500. Cut the bore of the gaskets such that the gaskets do
not protrude into the pipe when the flange bolts are tightened.
3.4 INSTALLING GROOVED -END PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 INSTALLING BURIED PIPING
A. Install in accordance with AWWA C600 and as specified herein.
B. When installing piping in trenches, do not deviate more than 1-inch from line or'/ -inch from grade.
Measure for grade at the pipe invert.
C. Provide thrust blocks at fittings where indicated and from Engineer approved submittals.
D. Inspection for Defects: Before installation, inspect pipe and appurtenances for defects and, when
applicable, tap the pipe with a light hammer to detect cracks. Reject defective, damaged, or unsound
pipe and appurtenances.
E. Push -On Joints: Bevel and lubricate spigot end of pipe to facilitate assembly without damage to
gasket. Taper of bevel shall be approximately 30 degrees with centerline of pipe and approximately
'/-inch back.
F. Push -On Joints: Use lubricant that is non -toxic, does not support the growth of bacteria, has no
deteriorating effects on the gasket material, and imparts no taste or odor to water in pipe. Assure the
gasket groove is thoroughly clean. For cold weather installation, warm gasket prior to placement in
bell.
G. Cutting: Cut pipe, when necessary, in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe,
interior lining, and exterior coating. Perform cutting with an approved mechanical cutter, using a wheel
cutter when applicable and practicable.
H. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.
Depth of Cover: The depth of cover over water mains from the top of the pipe to the ground surface
shall be sufficient to prevent freezing. The minimum depth shall be 42", or otherwise as shown on the
Drawings.
Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system.
K. If effective sealing is not obtained, disassemble, thoroughly clean, and reassemble the joint.
L. Assemble restrained joints per manufacturer's instructions.
M. Do not exceed the joint deflection angles recommended by the Manufacturer.
3.6 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
A. See Sections 400500
B. Support exposed pipe in accordance with Section 400764.
DUCTILE -IRON PROCESS PIPE 402040 - 5

3.7 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat pipe located above ground and in vaults and structures per Section 099000 or apply prime
coat in the shop before transporting pipe to the jobsite. As an alternate to the specified prime coat,
pipe, supplier/manufacturer may utilize Tnemec Series N140, or equal, as the prime coat and apply
intermediate and finish coats in the field before installing the pipe, then touch up after installation.
B. Provide asphaltic coating on buried pipe exterior per AWWA C151.
C. Coat buried piping per Section 099000, System No. 10.
D. Coat buried flanges and buried mechanical and restrained joint bolts, nuts, and glands per Section
099000, System No. 10.
E. Coat submerged pipe per Section 099000, System No. 12 or with Engineer approved fusion -
bonded epoxy coating system.
F. Line and coat exposed grooved -end couplings the same as the pipe exterior coating or with an
Engineer approved fusion -bonded epoxy.
G. Line and coat submerged and buried grooved -end couplings per Section 099000, System No. 12; or
with Engineer approved fusion -bonded epoxy system.
3.8 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT OF BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Wrap buried pipe, fittings, grooved -end couplings, and joints with a minimum of 8-mil low -density
polyethylene wrap conforming to AWWA C105.
B. Polyethylene encasement for ductile -iron pipe shall be supplied as a flat tube meeting the dimensions
of Table 1 in AWWA C105 and shall be supplied by the ductile -iron pipe manufacturer.
3.9 CLEANING PIPE
A. After interior joints have been pointed and mortar has hardened, sweep pipe clean of all dirt and
debris. If hardened mud exists in the pipe, remove with the use of pressurized water hoses.
3.10 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Test pressures are shown in Section 400515. Test in accordance with Section 400515.
3.11 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
A. Provide detectable warning tape. Warning and identification shall read "CAUTION BURIED WATER
PIPING BELOW" or similar wording.
END OF SECTION
DUCTILE -IRON PROCESS PIPE 402040 - 6

SECTION 402076
CARBON AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes materials and installation of carbon steel pipe and fittings 26 inches and
smaller conforming to ASTM A53 and stainless steel pipe and fittings 30 inches in diameter and
smaller conforming to ASTM A312. Seller shall supply piping having a maximum design
pressure appropriate for the intended application.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 013300
B. Submit materials list showing material of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference and grade. Submit
manufacturer's certificate of compliance with referenced standards. Show piping service
C. Manufacturer's catalog data marked to indicate materials being furnished.
D. Weight and support requirements.
E. Certificate of compliance, signed by the Manufacturer, stating that the equipment offered is in full
compliance with the specifications.
F. Welder certification documents.
G. Pickling and passivating procedure.
H. For piping 6-inches and larger, submit detailed piping layout drawings showing location and
dimensions of pipe, fittings, taps, and outlets in full detail, location of pipe hangers and supports,
large-scale details of all special castings, and locations and types of restraint to prevent joints from
pulling apart. Include laying lengths of flanges, gaskets, valves, meters, inline pumps, and other
equipment determining piping dimensions. FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO PREPARTION
OF LAYOUT DRAWINGS. DO NOT FABRICATE PIPE UNTIL SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN RETURENED
STAMPED "RESUBMITTAL IS NOT REQUIRED" OR "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." Label or
number each fitting or piece of pipe and provide the following information for each item:
1. Material of construction, with ASTM reference and grade.
2. Wall thickness of stainless steel cylinder.
3. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance with referenced pipe standards.
4. Show weld sizes and dimensions of grooved -end collars, flanges, reinforcing collars, wrapper
plates, and crotch plates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications
1. Piping systems welding shall be by welders qualified and certified under provisions of AWS to
weld austenitic chromium -nickel stainless steel and carbon steel pipe and tubing meeting
requirements of ASME Section VIII, Division 1 and ANSI B31.3.
2. Welders shall be certified by an independent, acceptable testing agency not more than 12
months prior to commencing work.
3. Perform certification with machines and electrodes similar to those used in the work.
4. Certify welders at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for two (2) years after final acceptance by
the Owner, including all parts, labor, and expenses.
B. Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor shall conduct a 23-month warranty inspection of the
pipe to ensure that it is free from defects, pitting, and corrosion. All defective areas shall be repaired
according to manufacturer's recommendations or replaced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
A. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A312, Grade TP 316L.
B. Seller shall determine pipe sizes and wall thicknesses applicable to the application it will be used and

shall conform to ASME B36.19.
2.2 CARBON STEEL PIPE
A. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Type F, Grade A.
B. Seller shall determine pipe sizes and wall thicknesses applicable to the application it will be used and
shall conform to ASME B36.10.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Fittings 3 inches and smaller shall be socket welded, conforming to ASME B16.9 and ASME
B16.11. Seller shall determine fitting class applicable to the application it will be used.
1. Material for socket welded fittings shall conform to ASTM A403, Class WP316L or ASTM
A182, Grade F316L.
B. Fittings for aboveground or exposed pipe larger than 3 inches through 24 inches shall be
butt -welded, conforming to ASTM A403, Class WP, same material and wall thickness as the pipe,
conforming to ASME B16.9. Elbows shall be long radius unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
C. Fittings for pipe larger than 24 inches shall conform to ASME B16.9. Material shall be the same as the
pi pe.
2.4 PICKLING, PASSIVATING, AND FINAL CLEANING
A. After fabrication, mechanically clean/descale the welded surface, to remove all thick visible oxide scale
with wire brushes and/or non-metallic devices. Brushes shall be stainless steel and used only on
stainless steel.
B. After descaling is completed, all pipe and fittings shall be immersed in a pickling solution to remove all
weld heat tinted layers from the surface of the stainless steel, ensure removal of all free iron, weld
scale, and other impurities and to insure the establishment of a passive surface prior to passivation.
Pickling solution shall be a nitric -hydrofluoric bath at the proper temperature and length of time per
ASTM A380. Perform a complete neutralizing operation by immersion in a trisodium phosphate rinse
followed by a clean water rinse.
1. Chemical clean shall completely remove the surface contamination but will not significantly affect
the stainless steel itself.
2. After final cleaning, wet surfaces with water and inspect for rust spots after 24-hours. Reclean if
there is any evidence of rusting.
3. Contractor may submit alternate pickling and passivating procedure other than the full immersion
bath for review by the Engineer. Alternate pickling and passivating procedure shall be in
accordance with ASTM A380. Submittal of alternate procedure does not ensure approval.
C. After descaling and pickling, the stainless steel piping/fabrication shall be fully passivated to enhance
the corrosion resistance of the stainless steel, through forming a chemically inactive surface when
exposed to air or oxidizing agent. Passivation shall be completed per ASTM A380, and A967.
2.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Include the "Hydrostatic Test" and "Flattening Test" requirements described in ASTM A999. A
nondestructive electric test per ASTM A999 may be substituted for the hydrostatic test.
2.6 EXTERIOR AESTHETIC FINISH
A. Where shown in the Drawings, or Piping Schedule, exterior finish for piping 12 inches and larger shall
be equivalent to a No. 4 per ASTM A480. As an alternative, provide a bright electropolished finish per
ASTM B912. The electropolished surface shall pass the test for visual defects per ASTM B912,
paragraph 5.1.
2.7 UNIONS
A. Unions shall WOG forged stainless steel, class determined by seller and appropriate for the application
it is used, with dimensions conforming to MSS SP-83.
Ends shall be socket -welded type.
1. Material shall conform to ASTM A182, Grade F316L for socket -welded type unions.
2.8 JOINTS
A. Joints for pipes 3 inches and smaller shall be socket welded, same material as specified for
fittings, class determined by seller and appropriate for the application it is used, conforming to
ASME B16.11.

B. Joints for buried or submerged pipe larger than 3 inches shall be butt-welded.Joints for
aboveground or exposed pipe larger than 3 inches shall be butt -welded.
D. Where piping connects to wall pipes, meters, valves, or other equipment, the pipe ends shall match
the ends of the wall pipes, meters, valves, or equipment, unless indicated otherwise.
2.9 OUTLETS AND NOZZLES
A. Outlets of size 3 inches and smaller in piping 4 inches and larger shall be of the Thredolet type, per
MSS SP-97, Figure 13-23. Outlets class shall be selected by the seller and appropriate for the
application it is used, conforming to ASTM A182, Grade F316L or ASTM A403, Grade WP316L.
B. For outlets 3-inches and smaller in piping smaller than 4-inches, use a tee with threaded outlet.
C. For outlets larger than 3-inches, use a tee with a flanged outlet. Side outlets are not considered
equivalent to fabricated tees and shall not be used without written permission.
2.10 THREAD LUBRICANT
A. Use Teflon thread lubricating compound or Teflon tape.
2.11 FLANGES
A. Provide weld -neck flanges (conforming to ASME B16.5) for piping 3 inches and smaller to connect to
flanged valves, fittings, or equipment. Provide weld -neck or Van Stone flanges (per ASTM F2015) for
piping larger than 3 inches. Flanges shall be Class 150 per ASME B16.5. Flanges shall match the
connecting flanges on the adjacent fitting, valve, or piece of equipment. Flanges shall be flat face.
B. Material for weld -neck flanges shall conform to ASTM A182, Grade F316L
C. Material for Van Stone flanges shall be as follows
1. Exposed Applications: Carbon steel; ASTM A216, Grade WGA or WGB; Stainless steel; ASTM
A351, Grade CF8; or Stainless steel; ASTM A351, Grade CFBM.
2. Submerged or Buried Applications: Stainless steel; ASTM A351, Grade CFBM
2.12 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
A. Bolts and nuts for Class 125 or 150 flanges located indoors; outdoors above ground; and in vaults and
structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade B, hot -dipped galvanized per ASTM F2329.
B. Bolts and nuts for all buried flanges and all flanges located indoors; outdoors; above ground; and in
vaults and structures shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class
2, for bolts, and ASTM A194, Grade 8M, for nuts unless indicated otherwise. Fit shall be Class 2A
and 2B per ASME B1.1 when connecting cast iron valves having body bolt holes.
C. Hex head machine bolts for use with lugged valves shall comply with ASTM A193, Grade B7.
D. Bolts for ASME B16.5 and B16.47 Class 300 flanges located indoors; outdoors; above ground;
and in vaults and structures shall conform to ASTM A193, Grade B7, with nuts conforming to
ASTM A194, Grade 2H.
E. Bolts and nuts for buried or submerged Class 300 flanges and Class 300 flanges located outdoors
above ground or in vaults and structures shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM
A193, Grade BBM, Class 2, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M, for nuts.
F. Bolts for piping in sodium hypochlorite service shall be titanium, per ASTM F467, Grade Tit, Ti2, or
Ti7. Nuts shall conform to ASTM F467, same material as the bolts.
G. Bolts and nuts used in flange insulation kits shall conform to the same requirements as described in
the paragraph contained herein; or ASTM A193 (Grade B7). Nuts shall conform to ASTM A194 (Grade
2H).
H. Form threads for stainless steel bolts by means of rolling, not cutting or grinding.
I. Provide washers for each nut and bolt head. Washers shall be of the same material as the nuts.
2.13 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
A. Lubricant shall be chloride free and shall be RAMCO TG-50, Anti -Seize by RAMCO, Specialty
Lubricants Corporation Huskya Lube O'Seal, or equal.
2.14 GASKETS FOR FLANGES
A. Gaskets shall be suitable for a maximum pressure of 300 psi and a maximum temperature of 500
degrees F. Gaskets for raw digester gas and methane gas service shall be one of the following
materials:

Teflon envelope type, full face, 1/8-inch insert, with compressed non -asbestos filler. Provide
free -flow design in which the Teflon is machined or milled between leaves to provide a space for
the filler.
2. PTFE with inert filler, 1/8-inch thick. Product: Garlock "Gylon."
3. Viton B, 1/8-inch thick.
2.15 WYE STRAINERS
A. Strainers 2 inches and smaller shall be stainless steel, wye pattern, with minimum pressure
rating of 300-psi WOG. Material shall conform to ASTM A351 or A743, Grade CFBM. Screen
shall be 20 mesh and same material as the strainer. Provide pet cock of the same material as
the strainer body in the blowoff connection. Ends shall be threaded conforming to ASME
B1.20.1. Provide one spare screen for each strainer. Strainers shall be Sarco Type 316,
Muessco No. 861, or equal.
2.2 PROTECTIVE END CAPS
A. Provide protective end caps on each piece of pipe or fabricated section, completely sealing the piece
from contamination during shipment and storage. Provide the same type of seals on each fitting, or
ship and store fittings in sealed boxes or containers.
2.3 SHOP FABRICATION
A. General
1. Shop fabricate 4-inch and larger stainless steel and carbon steel pipe and fittings in sections as
large as practical.
2. Pipe and fitting joints in shop fabrication shall be weld joints. Ends of shop fabrications shall have
flanges or plain ends. Plain ends shall be prepared for field installed couplings.
B. Shop Welding
1. Shop welding procedures for stainless steel pipe shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWS D10.4.
2. All process gas piping is welded in accordance with ASME B31.3 for normal gas service.
3. Prepare edges by machine shaping or cutting. Bevel ends of pipe and fittings with wall thickness
of 3/16-inch and larger. Bevel ends of stainless steel pipe to meet requirements of ANSI/AWS
D10.4. Separate abutting pipe ends before welding, and completely fuse inside walls of pipe
without overlapping. Welding shall be continuous around the joint and shall be completed without
interruption. Welds shall be single "V" butt type, of sound weld metal thoroughly fused into the
ends of pipe and into bottom of "V". Welds shall be free from cold spots, pin holes, oxide
inclusions, burrs, snags, rough projections or other defects.
4. Use an inert shielding gas welding method. Do not use oxygen fuel welding. Purge the interior of
the pipe with inert gas prior to root pass.
5. Welded butt joints (both longitudinal and circumferential) shall comply with ANSI/AWS
D10.4. Do not use backing rings. Provide full penetration and smooth internal diameters for the
root bead of welds. Grind the inside weld of socket welds flush with pipe internal diameter.
Welds shall be of smooth finish. Use anti -spatter compounds specifically formulated or
designed for use with stainless steel. Do not allow heat tint to form in the heat -affected zone or
remove heat tint completely from the heat -affected zone of the finished weld. The maximum
depth of grinding or abrasive blasting to remove defects shall not exceed 10-percent of the
wall thickness. Do not perform abrasive blasting with steel shot, grit, or sand.
6. No iron or steel surfaces shall come into contact with the stainless steel. This includes placing on
steel tables, racks, pipe supports, etc. Do not use carbon steel wire brushes or grinders.
7. Welding electrodes shall comply with AWS A5.4. Bare wire shall comply with AWS A5.9. Use
electrodes as follows:
a. Type 304 Pipe Material: E 308 Welding Electrode Material.
b. Type 304L Pipe Material: E 347 Welding Electrode Material.
c. Type 316 Pipe Material: E 316 Welding Electrode Material.
d. Type 316L Pipe Material: E 318 Welding Electrode Material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SHIPPING, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When loading piping for shipment to the project site, use spacers and other protective devices to
separate pipes to prevent damaging the surfaces during transit and unloading. If wood spacers are
used, remove wood splinters and particles from the pipe surfaces after separation. Use padded chains
or ribbon binders to secure the loaded pipe and minimize damage.

B. Cover piping 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of road salts, fuel
residue, and other contaminants in transit.
C. Provide stulls, braces, and supports during shipping and storage such that out -of -roundness or
deflection does not exceed 0.5% of the pipe diameter.
D. Handle piping with care during unloading, installation, and erection operations to minimize damage. Do
not place or store pipe on the ground or on top of other work unless ground or work is covered with a
protective covering or tarpaulin. Place pipe above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports.
E. Store piping at the site on pallets to prevent direct contact with ground or floor. Cover pipe during
storage with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of rainwater, salt air, dirt, dust,
and other contaminants.
F. Do not allow stainless steel piping to contact carbon steel surfaces during storage, handling, or
installation and erection at the site.
G. Piping supplier during manufacturing, fabrication and handling stages, and the Contractor during
handling and installation steps, shall use extreme care to avoid contact of any ferrous materials with
the stainless steel piping. Pipe storage and fabrication racks shall be non-ferrous, stainless steel, or
rubber lined. Nylon slings or straps shall be used for handling stainless steel piping. Slings or straps
used for stainless steel piping shall not be used with any other materials. Contact with ferrous items
may cause rusting or iron particles embedded in the piping walls. After installation, the Contractor shall
wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, the
Contractor shall pickle the affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS, or equal, scrub with stainless
steel brushes and rinse clean.
3.2 SHOP TESTING OF FABRICATED OR WELDED COMPONENTS
A. After completion of fabrication and welding in the shop, test each component according to the
referenced standards. Test fabricated fittings per ASME B31.3. Test the same in fittings which have not
been previously shop hydrostatically tested by the dye penetrant method as described in ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Appendix B. In lieu of the dye penetrant method of testing,
completed fittings may be hydrostatically tested. Use a hydrostatic pressure of 150-percent of the
design pressure.
1. Perform tests of production welds in fabricated piping in accordance with ASME B31.3.
3.3 FIELD WELD JOINTS FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Do not field weld pipe or fittings, unless field welding is approved in writing by the Engineer.
a. Welding in field shall be performed only when requested on shop drawings and accepted by
Owner and Owner's Representative in writing as specified in this Section.
b. Field welding of pipe or fittings will only be considered by the Engineer if:
• Contractor submits documentation of welder's certification to perform welding and
documentation of welder's experience in welding the style of pipe; and Contractor can
demonstrate that pipe can be welded to meet requirements of reference standards.
• If field welding is not approved by the Engineer, provide clamp type coupling joints or flange
joints, as specified in this Section and the appropriate piping material Section, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Field Weld Joints for Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings if Field Weld Joints are Allowed:
1. Welding procedures for stainless steel pipe and fittings shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWS
10.4.
2. Separate abutting pipe ends before welding, and completely fuse inside walls of pipe without
overlapping. Welding shall be continuous around the joint and shall be completed without
interruption. Welds shall be single "V" butt type, of sound weld metal thoroughly fused into the
ends of pipe and into bottom of "V". Welds shall be free from cold spots, pin -holes, oxide
inclusions, burrs, snags, rough projections, or other defects.
3. Protect and finish stainless steel weld joints as follows:
a. Wire brush outside weld area. Remove weld splatter. Brushes shall be stainless steel and
used only on stainless steel.
b. Remove surface oxidation by brushing or grinding and brushing.
c. Pickle the weld and heat -affected zone with field applied paste. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLING FLANGED PIPING

C. Set pipe with the flange bolt holes straddling the pipe horizontal and vertical centerline. Install pipe
without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any adjacent connecting valves or equipment.
Before bolting up, align flange faces to the design plane within 1/16 inch per foot measured across any
diameter. Align flange bolt holes within 1/8-inch maximum offset.
D. Inspection for Defects: Before installation, inspect pipe and appurtenances for defects and, when
applicable, tap the pipe with a light hammer to detect cracks. Reject defective, damaged, or unsound
pipe and appurtenances.
E. Inspect each gasket to verify that it is the correct size, material, and type for the specified service and
that it is clean and undamaged. Examine bolts or studs, nuts, and washers for defects such as burrs
or cracks and rust and replace as needed.
F. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire
brushing, lubricate carbon steel bolts with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and
progressively.
G. Bolt lengths shall extend completely through their nuts. Any that fail to do so shall be considered
acceptably engaged if the lack of complete engagement is not more than one thread.
H. Do not use more than one gasket between contact faces in assembling a flanged joint.
I. Tighten the bolts to the manufacturer's specifications, using the recommended cross bolt pattern in
multiple steps of increasing torque, until the final torque requirements are achieved. Do not over
torque.
J. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or replace the
gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be gas tight.
K. Install threaded nut and bolt thread protection caps after completing the bolt, nut, and gasket
installation. Install on exposed, buried, and submerged piping.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
A. Prior to assembly, coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant.
3.5 INSTALLING SUBMERGERED, ABOVEGROUND, OR EXPOSED PIPING
A. Set piping plumb and at the horizontal and vertical location shown on the Drawings. Provide pipe
hangers and supports to maintain alignment, as determined by the seller based on the application.
B. Install pipe without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any adjacent connecting valves or
equipment. Pipe penetrations through walls, slabs, and floors shall be as detailed on the Drawings
or as allowed for alternate configurations as specified herein.
C. Install pipe spools in walls and slabs before placing concrete.
D. Inspection for Defects: Before installation, inspect pipe and appurtenances for defects and, when
applicable, tap the pipe with a light hammer to detect cracks. Reject defective, damaged, or unsound
pipe and appurtenances.
E. Cutting: Cut pipe, when necessary, in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe,
interior lining, and exterior coating. Perform cutting with an approved mechanical cutter, using a wheel
cutter when applicable and practicable.
F. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.
G. Beveling: Grind smooth and bevel cut ends and rough edges using methods recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer.
H. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe. Clean flanges by
wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Lubricate bolts and tighten nuts uniformly and
progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or
replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be
watertight.
I. Provide a flange insulation kit at all flanges between dissimilar metals whether shown on the Drawings
or not.
3.6 FIELD INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARIES
A. Mount field -installed auxiliary equipment, piping, conduit, instruments, coolers, seal pots, control
panels, consoles, and so forth separately from the machine and driver unless such equipment is
manufactured or fabricated as an integral part of the machine. These items shall not interfere with

removal of the machine or driver or with access to the machinery for normal operation and
maintenance.
B. Locate auxiliary support piping, conduit, instrumentation, and so forth, for a single drop area on the
machinery baseplate or soleplate. Do not install piping, conduit, and other support systems at multiple
locations on the base.
C. Make openings for branch connections in piping of NPS 1 inch or smaller by drilling the run pipe. Do
not perform torch cutting of any opening smaller than NPS 1 inch in diameter.
D. Use process -compatible pipe joint compounds for threaded connections. Do not use PTFE tape pipe
sealant or antiseize lubricants to make up any threaded connections in lubricating oil, seal fluid, buffer
gas, or utility connections to any machine.
E. Threaded connections shall have two to five exposed pipe threads after making up the joint.
3.7 STRAY ELECTRICAL CURRENTS
A. Stray currents from welding can cause damage to seals, bearings, and other machinery components.
Stray electrical currents can also magnetize machinery components that can later generate damaging
currents. Conform to the following requirements for field welds around machinery.
B. Attach welding ground cables adjacent to the place where the weld is being made. Attach the welding
clamps onto the pipe near the weld and ground the welding machine properly. Do not use spring -type
alligator clamps.
C. Do not attach ground leads to any part of the machinery, auxiliary systems, or supports for any reason.
D. Should it be necessary to attach piping to the machinery for the purpose of field welding, isolate the
machinery from the pipe flange by using a full -circle 1/8-inch-thick composition gasket. Then install
insulated bolts or studs. Then perform a continuity check to prove the electrical isolation of the
machine from the piping.
E. Measure and record machinery magnetic flux density readings before and after welding. If residual
magnetism is in excess of 1 millitesla (10 gauss), degaussing shall be required.
3.8 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION
A. Prior to checking final piping alignment to the machinery, the piping system shall be complete as
follows.
B. Complete pipe pressure testing and drying out of the system and remove hydrotest blind flanges.
C. Install and adjust permanent supports and hangers.
D. Remove temporary supports and hangers.
E. All the system piping components and machinery shall be at the same ambient temperature within a
range of 18 degrees F before starting final piping alignment checks.
F. Verify that the machine inlet and outlet piping is properly constructed. This inspection shall include
verification of gasket material, gasket size, and the material, size, and length of flange bolts, studs,
and nuts.
G. Inspect the machine to verify that it is still removable. This means that sufficient flanged, threaded, and
grooved -end piping connections exist to completely remove the machinery from the mounting plate for
maintenance without requiring the cutting or welding of pipe or tubing.
3.9 FLANGE AND PIPING ALIGNMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not spring flanges of connecting piping into position.
B. Line up pipe flange bolt holes with machinery nozzle bolt holes within 1/16-inch maximum offset from
the center of the bolt hole to permit insertion of bolts without applying any external force to the piping.
C. The machine and piping flange faces shall be parallel to less than 0.001 inch per inch of pipe flange
outer diameter up to a maximum of 0.030 inch. For piping flange outer diameters smaller than 10
inches, the flanges shall be parallel to 0.010 inch or less. For raised face flanges, feeler gauge
readings shall be taken at the raise face.
D. Flange face separation shall be within the gasket spacing plus or minus 1/1 6-inch. Use only one
gasket per flanged connection.
3.10 PIPING ALIGNMENT

A. The objective of the following requirements is to verify that strains imposed by the piping on the
machinery are minimized. Less strain imposed on the machine casing results in less distortion of
running clearances and better machine performance and reliability.
B. Separately work machinery inlet and outlet piping systems into position to bring the piping flanges into
alignment with the matching machinery flanges. Do not move machinery to achieve piping alignment.
Do not use electrical heating stress relieving to achieve piping alignment.
C. Remove temporary supports for piping alignment (such as chain falls and wedges) during final
alignment readings and piping bolt -up. Support piping by permanent fixed and spring supports and
hangers. Piping shall not be binding on pipe guides or restraints.
D. Measure pipe strain while all piping connections are being made to the machine. This includes
lubricating oil piping, bearing cooling water piping, seal water piping, auxiliary piping such as steam,
air, and flushing medium, as well as process piping and electrical conduits.
E. For pieces of machinery with common piping such as pairs of pumps, monitor both shaft alignments
during pipe installation and connection operations. Additionally, all of the machinery shall be bolted up
at the same time with indicator readings taken on each shaft simultaneously.
3.11 PIPE STRAIN MEASUREMENT
A. Install an alignment bracket on the coupling hub or shaft of the machine being checked for pipe strain.
B. Mount indicators on the coupling hub to measure vertical and horizontal movement on the machine as
the flange bolts are being tightened.
C. Bolt -up of the piping flanges to the machinery flanges shall proceed with the largest flanges first.
Complete bolt -up in a continuous effort without disturbing the location of the dial indicators.
D. Use torque wrenches to tighten flange bolts. Initial tightening of the flange bolts shall be snug (10
percent of the total torque). Tighten flange bolts to 30 percent of final torque. Then tighten the flange
bolts to 100 percent of final torque. Piping bolt torque values shall be specified by the machinery
manufacturer taking into account whether bolt threads are lubricated or nonlubricated.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. After final piping connection, final shaft alignment shall be verified and all machinery shall be hand
rotated to ensure that neither binding nor case distortion has occurred during piping installation.
3.13 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat exposed carbon steel pipe and fittings per Section 099000, System No. 18.
B. Do not coat stainless steel pipe and fittings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 402091
PVC PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes materials, installation, and testing of PVC pipe and fittings for use in aboveground
or otherwise exposed process piping having a maximum design pressure of 50 psi and a maximum
design temperature of 105 degrees F.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Trenching and Backfilling: 312333.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
D. Pressure Testing of Piping: 400515.
E. Wall Pipes, Seep Rings, and Penetrations: 400762.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit materials list showing materials of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference and grade. Submit
manufacturer's certification of compliance with referenced standards, e.g., ASTM D1784, D1785,
D2467, and ASME B31.3. Show wall thickness of pipe and fittings. Show fitting dimensions.
C. Submit data sheets for solvent cement and demonstrating compliance with ASTM D2564 and F656.
D. Submit piping layout drawings showing location and dimensions of pipe and fittings. Include laying
lengths of valves, meters, in -line pumps, and other equipment determining piping dimensions. Label or
number each fitting or piece of pipe. Show location and detail of every pipe hanger and pipe support.
E. Submit manufacturer's recommended torques for tightening bolts on flanged connections.
F. Submit manufacturer's recommended method of installing solvent welded and hot gas welded joints.
Submit bonding procedure specification (BPS) developed in accordance with ASME B31.3 (2006
edition), Chapter VII, Part 9, paragraph A328.2.
G. Submit the names of employees to be utilized on the project who have been qualified per the BPS to
make solvent -welded joints and hot gas welded joints. Submit the results of the BPS qualification tests
per ASME B31.3, Chapter VII, Part 9, paragraphs A328.2.4 and A328.2.5 for each such employee.
H. If any fabricated branch connections or tees are used, submit design calculations, service experience
records, and performance test records per ASME B31.3, Chapter VII, Part 2, paragraph A304.7.2.
I. Submit certification from manufacturer that all pipes and fittings are NSF approved for conveying
potable water.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year after FINAL ACCEPTANCE,
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
A. Pipe shall be Schedule 40 or 80, as shown, Type I, Grade 1 (Class 12454-B), conforming to ASTM
D1784 and D1785.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be socket type, Schedule 80, as shown, and shall conform to ASTM D2467.
B. Fabricated branch connections or tees may be used only where the type or size of fitting is not
described in ASTM D2467. Joints and seams in fabricated fittings shall be in accordance with ASME
B31.3 (2006 edition), Chapter VII, Part 9, paragraph A328.5.4. The design and fabrication of such
branch connection and tees shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, Chapter VII, paragraphs A304.3
and A328.5.2. Minimum wall thickness shall be equivalent to that of Schedule 80 pipe.
2.3 FLANGES
A. PVC flanges shall be of the one-piece solid socket design and shall be made of the same material as
PVC PIPE (4 INCHES AND LARGER) 402091 -1

the pipe. Pressure rating shall be at least 150 psi at a temperature of 73 degrees F. Minimum burst
pressure shall be 500 psi. Flanges shall match the dimensions of ASME B16.5, Class 150 steel
flanges for outside diameter, bolt circle, and bolt holes.
2.4 JOINTS
A. Pipe and fitting joints shall be socket welded except where flanged joints are required to connect to
valves and equipment.
2.5 SOLVENT CEMENT
A. Solvent cement for socket joints shall comply with ASTM D2564 and F656.
2.6 GASKETS FOR FLANGES
A. See Section 400500.
2.7 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
A. See Section 400500.
2.8 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
A. See Section 400500.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Do not install PVC pipe when the temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. Store
loose pipes on racks with a maximum support spacing of 3 feet. Provide shades for pipe stored
outdoors or installed outdoors until the pipe is filled with water.
B. Store fittings indoors in their original cartons.
C. Store solvent cement indoors or, if outdoors, shade from direct sunlight exposure. Do not use solvent
cements that have exceeded the shelf life marked on the storage container.
D. Before installation, check pipe and fittings for cuts, scratches, gouges, buckling, kinking, or splitting on
pipe ends. Remove any pipe section containing defects by cutting out the damaged section of pipe.
E. Do not drag PVC pipe over the ground, drop it onto the ground, or drop objects on it.
3.2 SOLVENT -WELDED AND HOT GAS WELDED JOINTS
A. Bonding requirements shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 (2006 edition), Chapter VI I, Part 9.
Bonding shall include both solvent welding or cementing and hot gas welding.
B. Prior to solvent welding, remove fittings and couplings from their cartons and expose them to the air at
the same temperature conditions as the pipe for at least one hour.
C. Cut pipe ends square and remove burrs, chips, and filings before joining pipe or fittings. Bevel pipe
ends as recommended by the pipe manufacturer in the BPS.
D. Wipe away loose dirt and moisture from the inside and outside diameters of the pipe end and the
inside diameter of the fitting before applying solvent cement. Clean the surfaces of both pipes and
fittings that are to be solvent welded with a clean cloth moistened with acetone or methyl ethyl
ketone. Do not apply solvent cement to wet surfaces.
E. The pipe and fitting socket shall have an interference fit. Perform a dry fit test at each joint before
applying solvent cement. The pipe shall enter the fitting socket between one-third and two-thirds of the
full socket depth when assembled by hand.
F. Make field solvent -welded and hot gas welded joints only in the presence of the pipe manufacturer's
representative who shall instruct and advise the Contractor's personnel in the assembly of the joints.
Joint bonding shall be done in accordance with a BPS established by the pipe manufacturer.
Qualification of the BPS shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, Chapter VI I, Part 9, paragraphs
A328.2 through A328.5. Each person who will perform bonding shall be qualified in executing the BPS
per paragraph A328.2.5.
G. Make up solvent -welded joints per ASTM D2855 and the BPS. Application of cement to both surfaces
to be joined and assembly of these surfaces shall produce a continuous bond between them with
visual evidence of cement at least flush with the outer end of the fitting bore around the entire joint
perimeter.
H. Allow at least eight hours of drying time before moving solvent welded joints or subjecting the joints to
any internal or external loads or pressures.
PVC PIPE (4 INCHES AND LARGER) 402091 - 2

I. After completion of the solvent -welded joints, subject the piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure
of 75 psi per Section 400515. Solvent -welded joints that show minor weeping at isolated points around
the circumference of the joint may be repaired by the hot gas welding method. There shall be no more
than one point of weeping for every 12 inches of circumference of the pipe. Remove solvent -welded
joints that show excessive leakage and assemble new joints.
J. The hot gas welding method shall produce a continuous seal at the fillet formed by the junction of the
fitting socket entrance and the pipe. Use a hot gas welding procedure per the BPS and the following to
melt a plastic filler rod and the surfaces of the pipe in the fillet area. Force the softened rod into the
softened fillet. Provide the hot gas weld around the entire circumference of the solvent -welded joint.
K. Terminate a hot gas weld by lapping the bead on top of itself for a distance of 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch. Do
not terminate a hot gas weld by overlapping the bead side by side.
L. Provide three weld passes on each hot gas welded joint. Deposit the first bead at the bottom of the
fillet. Deposit the second and third beads on each side of the first bead. Stagger the starting point for
each bead and allow each weld pass to cool before proceeding with the next pass.
M. Upon completion of each hot gas welded bead, check that the filler rod has completely fused into the
base pipe. If the filler rod can be removed or pulled back from the base material, then reject the entire
hot gas weld. Reject any hot gas welds showing brown or black discoloration.
N. Upon completion of the hot gas welded joints, subject the piping system to a test pressure of 75 psi
per Section 400515. Cut out, remove, and replace anyjoints that are leaking. No rework of leaking hot
gas welded joints will be permitted.
O. Acceptance criteria for solvent -welded and hot gas welded joints shall be as follows:
1. Kind of Imperfection: Cracks.
a. Hot Gas Welded Joints: None permitted.
b. Solvent Cemented Joints: Not applicable.
2. Kind of Imperfection: Unfilled areas in joint.
a. Hot Gas Welded Joints: None permitted.
b. Solvent Cemented Joints: None permitted.
3. Kind of Imperfection: Unbonded areas in joint.
a. Hot Gas Welded Joints: Not applicable.
b. Solvent Cemented Joints: None permitted.
4. Kind of Imperfection: Inclusions of charred material.
a. Hot Gas Welded Joints: None permitted.
b. Solvent Cemented Joints: Not applicable.
5. Kind of Imperfection: Unfused filler material inclusions.
a. Hot Gas Welded Joints: None permitted.
b. Solvent Cemented Joints: Not applicable.
6. Kind of Imperfection: Protrusion of material into pipe bore, percent of pipe wall thickness.
a. Hot Gas Welded Joints: Not applicable.
b. Solvent Cemented Joints: Cement, 50 percent.
3.3 FLANGED JOINTS
A. Lubricate bolt threads with graphite and oil before installation.
B. Tighten bolts on PVC flanges by tightening the nuts diametrically opposite each other using a torque
wrench. Complete tightening shall be accomplished in stages and the final torque values shall be as
follows:
1. Pipe Size of 4 inches: 20 to 30 foot-pounds Final Torque.
2. Pipe Size of 6 to 8 inches: 33 to 50 foot-pounds Final Torque.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
A. See Section 400500.
3.5 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND AND EXPOSED PIPING
A. See Section 400500.
B. Fill empty piping with water, provide temporary shading, or other means to keep the surface
temperature of the pipe below 100 degrees F.
3.6 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat interior piping per Section 099000, System No. 30
PVC PIPE (4 INCHES AND LARGER) 402091 - 3

B. Coat exterior piping per Section 099000, System No. 9
3.7 FINAL HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Perform final hydrostatic testing for leakage in accordance with Section 400515 after all joints have
been tested and defective joints have been repaired or replaced.
END OF SECTION
PVC PIPE (4 INCHES AND LARGER) 402091 - 4

SECTION 409715
PRESSURE GAUGES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes materials and installation of pressure gauges and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. Call out materials of construction by
ASTM reference and grade. Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance with the referenced ANSI
standards. Identify each gauge by tag number to which the catalog data and descriptive literature
pertain.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Full warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one year after FINAL ACCEPTANCE,
including all parts, labor, and expenses.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gauges, diaphragm seals, dampeners, and tools shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, Crosby,
Marshalltown, Marsh, or equivalent.
2.2 GAUGE DESIGN
A. Gauges 4-1/2 inches in size shall comply with ANSI B40.1, Grade 1A (+/- 1.0% accuracy). Gages
2-1/2 inches in size shall comply with ANSI B40.1, Grade A (+/- 2-1/2% accuracy). Gages shall
incorporate the following features:
1. Solid or open front with side or rear blowout relief.
2. Pressure tight.
3. 270-degree arc with adjustable pointer.
4. Stem mounted, 1/2 inch size.
5. Hermetically sealed.
6. Liquid filled.
7. The dial size shall be 2-1/2 inches, except for gauges located on process pump discharge
lines which shall be 4-1/2 inches.
8. Dial shall have white background and black markings.
9. The units of measurement shall be indicated on the dial face.
B. Pressure ranges and locations shall be as indicated on the pressure gauge schedule.
2.3 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Materials of construction shall be as shown below:
1. Case shall be phenolic plastic.
2. Bourdon tube shall be stainless steel, AISI 316.
3. Windows shall be acrylic plastic.
4. Ring shall be stainless steel.
5. Stem shall be stainless steel.
6. Dial face shall be aluminum with clear baked on acrylic coating, 6061-T6, ASTM B 209.
2.4 DIAPHRAGM SEAL
A. Diaphragm seal shall isolate pressure gauge from corrosive liquids. Bottom housing shall be PVC,
diaphragm material shall be Teflon. Diaphragm seal shall be rated as continuous duty. Unit shall be
capsule type which will allow the diaphragm to be replaced. Filling fluid shall be Halocarbon.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Gauges and pulsation dampeners shall be installed at the locations indicated on the drawings. Install
per details on drawings.
B. Install diaphragm seals on all chemical feed line applications.
C. Unless otherwise specified herein, direct tapping of pipe walls for installation of gauge connections will
PRESSURE GUAGES 409715 - 1

not be permitted.
D. All gauges and diaphragm seals shall be installed in the vertical upright position. Teflon thread tape or
Teflon thread sealer, as specified in the miscellaneous piping section, shall be used in the assembly of
threaded connections. All connections shall be free from leaks.
END OF SECTION
PRESSURE GUAGES 409715 - 2

SECTION 460529
BLOWERS AND BLOWER CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Installation of Owner Furnished Blowers for mixing air supply and Blower Controls.
B. The Blower and Blower Control systems shall include Blower BLWR-201. Control panel shall
include a soft -start, circuit protection, ON/OFF switches, and run lights (New MD, New DP).
C. Each blower shall be supplied with a check valve and a pressure relief valve, shipped loose
for installation by Contractor. Note that the plans do not show the check valve or relief valve,
but each of these shall be installed by Contractor, and spatial provisions were made in Plans
to accommodate the addition of these items.
D. The Contractor will be directly responsible for providing and installing all items not listed
above for complete blower and blower control systems, including but not limited to the blower
equipment pads, downstream process air vibration isolators, isolation valves, piping and
appurtenances, communications conduit and cables routed to remote monitoring controls,
site work, electrical distribution, etc. Installation shall include the Contractor directly
performing startup and commissioning of the blowers and blower controls and coordinating
remotely with the Blower and Blower Controls supplier and Engineer.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
C. ANSI/AGMA 6011 - Specifications for High Speed Helical Gear Units; 2014.
D. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air -Cleaning Devices for Removal
Efficiency by Particle Size; 2012.
E. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; 2010.
F. ASME B40.100 -Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; 2013.
G. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements; 2005 (R2008).
H. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2011.
BLOWERS AND BLOWER 460529 - 1
CONTROLS

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Blower
A. Blower shall be Kaeser Com-paK, or approved equal, with the following attributes and
accessories:
1. Drive motor shall be 125 hp with 120.7 hp blower shaft power.
2. Drive motor power shall be 460V / 3 / 60Hz.
3. Flap style check valve (plate)
4. Discharge temperature gauge with switch.
5. Discharge pressure gauge.
6. Inlet filter differential pressure gauge.
7. IP 55 TEFC drive motor (NPE).
8. Vibration isolators
9. One-year manufacturer's warranty
B. Blower shall be integrated in a sound enclosure rated for outdoor duty.
1. Ventilation fan power shall be 460 V / 3 / 60Hz.
2.2 Blower Control Panel
A. Control panel shall be pre -assembled and shipped to site as a single unit with the following
attributes and accessories:
1. One (1) NEMA 3R 60"x36"x16" pole -mounted enclosure.
2. Enclosure cooling fan with rain hood and thermostat.
3. Enclosure heater with thermostat.
4. Main 225-amp circuit breaker with through -the -door disconnect.
5. 460/120 vac control transformer.
6. 22MM HOA selector switch.
7. Three 22MM Pilot Lights (Run, fault, Discharge high temp fault).
8. 22MM push button (Fault reset).
9. 3-pole mini -breaker for blower enclosure fan.
10. Relay for auxiliary heater.
11. Relays and terminal blocks as required.
12. UL 508A Listed.
13. Allen Bradley SMC-50 125hp RVSS with Internal Bypass
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with acceptable procedures submitted with the
shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions and installation manual and as indicated on the
Drawings and specified herein, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide the services of manufacturer's technical representative to supervise installation,
adjustment, demonstration, testing, and startup.
BLOWERS AND BLOWER 460529 - 2
CONTROLS

D. Anchor blower/motor bases to foundations per supplier recommendations.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - PRIOR TO STARTUP
A. After air distribution and diffusion systems have been installed, Contractor shall demonstrate of
proper operation of each blower at specified operating conditions
3.3 ELECTRICAL/CONTROL SYSTEMS.
A. Electrical equipment shall be of the type and quality set forth herein and in accordance with
Division 26. Items of equipment installed inside the control panel shall be arranged as shown
on the drawings and as specified.
B. All work shall be performed, and all materials shall be in accordance with, the National
Electrical Code, the National Electrical Safety Code, and applicable local regulations and
ordinances. Where required by applicable codes, materials and equipment shall be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories or other testing organization acceptable to the governing authority.
3.4 START UP SERVICE
A. The Owner -supplier agreement DOES NOT require blower system supplier to provide the
services of a factory -trained representative to perform initial start-up of the blowers and blower
controls and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of
the equipment provided by them. Contractor shall coordinate with Engineer and manufacturer
remotely during installation, startup and commissioning as required.
END OF SECTION
BLOWERS AND BLOWER 460529 - 3
CONTROLS

SECTION 465103
AIR DIFFUSERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Installation of Owner Furnished air distribution and diffusion system for:
1. Equalization Tank mixing
B. Air diffusers, in basin drop pipe, in basin air header, in basin supports, and in basin laterals.
C. E. The Contractor will be directly responsible for providing and installing all items not listed
above for air diffuser systems, including but not limited to the piping between the blowers and
drop pipes, the isolation valves upstream of the drop pipes, the tank improvements and
accessories, earthwork, etc. Installation shall include the Contractor directly procuring startup
and commissioning assistance from the blower and blower controls supplier.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Products relevant to this section will be Owner furnished for installation by Contractor.
Information on the products being Owner Furnished will be provided in Appendices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with Engineer approved procedures, approved shop drawings, diffuser
supplier's written instructions, and as indicated on the Drawings.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - PRIOR TO STARTUP
A. In -Tank Diffusers: Test by filling tank with water to depth of approximately two feet (600 mm)
above top of diffusers, and:
1. Inspect diffusers for proper operation and uniformity of diffusion.
2. Adjust diffusers as required for uniform diffusion.
END OF SECTION
AIR DIFFUSERS 465103 - 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AIR DIFFUSERS 465103 - 2

Attachment D: Engineering Calculations
Fab Tech Water Solutions 7 fabtechwws.com

BUTTERBALL — MOUNT OLIVE, NORTH CAROLINA
WATER RESOURCE RECOVERY SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
Engineering Calculations
FabTiech
WATER SOLUTIONS
Prepared for:
Lankford Ruffin
Director of Environmental Affairs and Sustainability
Butterball, LLC
1 Butterball Lane
Garner, NC 27S29
Prepared by:
Fab Tech Wastewater Solutions
820 O'Fallon Road
Weldon Spring, MO 63044
314-478-3344
��o��`�N
�OQ•���ss'���'��
s6v—
6/07/2022

Equalization Tank Dimensions and Detail
Height
24
ft
Inside Diameter
120
ft
Inside Radius
60
ft
Circumference
376.8
ft
Influent Pipe Diameter 2 total
10
in
Effluent Pipe Diameter 1 total
12
in
Tank Drain 1 total
8
in
Overflow Pie 1 total
8
in
Water Dimensions
Water Surface Area
11,304
ft^2
Max Water Depth
23
ft
Min Water Depth
2
ft
Max Water Volume
259,992
ft"3
Average Water Volume
141,300
f A3
Water Volume @ 10' Depth
113,040
f A3
Min Water Volume
22,608
ft"3
Mixing Air Requirements
Mixing Type:
Coarse
References:
1.25 —
2.0
cfm/1,000 gal
Airflow 10'
1750
scfm
Check 10'
2.07
cfm/1,000 al
Check for cfm/sf
0.15
Max Pressure
11.501
psi
Influent Pumo Evaluation
Pump Elevation
147.1
ft
Distance to Existing Tank
2557.5
ft
Additional Distance to New Tank
165
ft
Pipe Elevation at Old Tank
174.48
ft
Pipe Elevation at New Tank
170
ft
Difference in Elevation Between Old and New Tank
-4.48
ft
Head Loss from New Pipe and Fittings
0.045
ft
Net Variance in Head
-4.435
ft
Effluent Pumo Evaluation
Old Tank Effluent Pipe Elevation
146.57
ft
New Tank Effluent Pipe Elevation
147.5
ft
Difference in Elevation Between Old and New Tank
-0.93
ft
Additional Distance of 12" Suction Pie
325
ft
Net Variance in Head
-1.96
ft

Attachment E: Operation and Maintenance Plan
Fab Tech Water Solutions 8 fabtechwws.com

BUTTERBALL - MOUNT OLIVE, NORTH CAROLINA
WATER RESOURCE RECOVERY SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
Operation and Maintenance Plan
FabTech
WATER SOLUTIONS
Prepared for:
Lankford Ruffin
Director of Environmental Affairs and Sustainability
Butterball, LLC
1 Butterball Lane
Garner, NC 27529
Prepared by:
Fab Tech Wastewater Solutions
820 O'Fallon Road
Weldon Spring, MO 63044
314-478-3344

Table of Contents
1.0 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 1
I.I. Objective............................................................................................................................ 1
1.2. Scope of the Manual.......................................................................................................... 1
2.0 System Overview..................................................................................................................... 2
2.1. Physical Description.......................................................................................................... 2
2.2. Drawings and Specifications............................................................................................. 2
3.0 Routine System Operation...................................................................................................... 3
3.1. General Discussion............................................................................................................ 3
3.2. System Operating Strategy................................................................................................ 3
3.3. Equipment Operation and Control..................................................................................... 3
3.4. Operator Duties.................................................................................................................. 4
4.0 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................5
4.1. General...............................................................................................................................5
4.2. Site Access......................................................................................................................... 5
4.3. Daily Maintenance Procedures.......................................................................................... 5
4.4. Periodic Maintenance........................................................................................................ 5
5.0 Contact Information................................................................................................................ 6
5.1. Emergency Services........................................................................................................... 6
5.2. Butterball, LLC — Environmental Manager....................................................................... 6
5.3. Regulatory Agency............................................................................................................ 6

Introduction
1.1 Objective
This manual will provide insight into the operation and general maintenance of the secondary
equalization tank prior to the dissolved air floatation (DAF) system at the Butterball plant in
Mount Olive, North Carolina.
1.2 Scope of the Manual
This manual identifies various components of the equalization tank and general operation and
maintenance of said tank. Detailed operation and maintenance information for specific
components is supplied by the vendor of that equipment.

System Overview
2.1 Physical Description
The 2-million-gallon stainless steel equalization tank is approximately 120-ft in diameter and 24-
ft high with stairs to a lighted viewing and sampling platform at the top. There are two (2) 10-in
influent pipes with butterfly valves to control flow into the tank. Mixing is supplied by coarse
bubble aeration with a positive -displacement blower set next to the tank. A single 12-in effluent
line directs flow out of the tank to the existing pipe leading to the DAF building. An 8-in tank
drain with butterfly valve intersects with an 8-in tank overflow pipe that discharges into the
lagoon. Liquid level in the tank is monitored by a pressure transducer.
2.2 Drawings and Specifications
Detailed drawings and specifications may need to be referenced for significant maintenance
and/or repair. These documents are part of the plan set developed by 21 Design with the
assistance of Fab Tech Wastewater Solutions. A complete set of these plans shall be provided to
the owner and operator for future reference.
2

Routine System Operation
3.1 General Discussion
The equalization tank supports optimal function of the dissolved air flotation (DAF) system.
3.2 System Operating Strategy
The purpose of the equalization tank is to convert variable flow from plant processes to consistent
flow for optimal DAF performance. The overall strategy is to provide as consistent a flow rate as
possible to the DAF.
3.3 Equipment Operation and Control
Very little day-to-day hands-on operation of the equalization tank is to be expected. Blower
operation for mixing and liquid level for hydraulic management are the two primary operating
parameters
The equalization tank is mixed by bubbles from a coarse -bubble diffuser grid. The diffusers
themselves are considered maintenance -free because there are no membranes that need to be
serviced at regular intervals.
Air to the coarse -bubble diffusers is provided by a positive -displacement blower. The blower is
designed for continuous operation, regardless of the water height in the tank, and is controlled
with hand switches. The operators should refer to the manufacturer's IO&M manual for specific
maintenance information regarding air filters, oil and lubrication, and belts.
A pressure transducer is attached to the side of the tank and used to determine liquid level height
within the tank. The signal from the transducer is sent to the Operator's SCADA system and
alarms for high- and low-water levels should be part of the programming for that system. The
high-water alarm should be set for 22-ft of liquid height, or 1-ft below the overflow pipe. The
low-water alarm should be set at 1-ft above the top of the effluent pipe to prevent the DAF feed
pumps from running dry. The Operator is encouraged to review the manufacturer's IO&M
manual for specific maintenance information on the transducer, which may include routine
cleaning and/or calibration.
There are three sets of valves that control flow to and from the tank. Only one equalization tank
should be used at a time. Both influent and effluent valves should be closed to whichever tank is
in standby. The third valve set is for the tank drain. This valve should normally be closed. The
overflow pipe from the tank was designed without a valve to prevent operational error. All valves
should be exercised on a regular basis and the Operator is encouraged to review the
manufacturer's IO&M for specific instruction.

3.4 Operator Duties
The Operator should visit the equalization tank daily, but no less than once per week, to ensure
blower is operating and to verify accurate liquid level feedback. The Operator must document the
operation, maintenance, and visitors to the system in a daily log and notify the Owner
immediately of any overflows or bypasses. The Owner, in turn, is required to notify the
Wilmington Regional Office (see Section 5) of an overflow or bypass within 24-hours of
becoming aware of the incident.
The Operator must provide written notification to the Owner if system repairs or modifications
are needed to ensure all regulatory compliance.
The main plant should be contacted if there is a power outage at the equalization tank, DAF, or
connecting pumps.
3.4.1 Daily Routine
The operator should log flows from the processing plant over the course of several days and
weeks to determine that average flow requirement for the DAF. That average flow can then be
adjusted as needed to account for the limitations of process water storage across the two
equalization basins (existing and new).
3.4.2 Emergency Power Plan
The only component solely obligated to the proposed equalization tank is the blower, which is not
a critical item for operation of the equalization tank. Power failure to effluent pumps could result
in the tank being overfilled if the influent pumps were to remain in operation, but over filling the
tank would result in a bypass discharge around the DAFs and directly into the receiving lagoon.
Therefore, no emergency power plan is necessary for the proposed equalization tank because the
system can tolerate septic wastewater due to prolonged detention and sufficient storage capacity
exists, between the equalization tank and receiving lagoon, that no potential for overflow exists.
4

Maintenance
4.1 General
Timely and prompt maintenance is imperative for the performance of any treatment system and
will extend the overall life of the components.
4.2 Site Access
Fences, gates, and security guards restrict access to the water resource reclamation facility for
safety and security.
4.3 Daily Maintenance
No daily maintenance is required. General daily inspection is suggested but should be conducted
no less than once per week. Inspection should consist of ensuring blower is operating, checking
for symmetrical mixing (free of dead zones), and checking water level in the tank.
4.4 Periodic Maintenance
The following sections provide general direction and notes. Please refer to the manufacturer's
recommendations and IO&M manual(s) for detailed information.
4.4.1 Blowers
Refer to manufacturer's instructions. General maintenance includes air filter, checking discharge
pressure and adjusting pressure relief valve, changing oil, inspecting belts, etc.
4.4.2 Valves
Exercising valves on a periodic basis is crucial to valve longevity. Please refer to the
manufacturer's instructions for more information.
4.4.3 Diffusers
Each diffuser features a small duckbill valve to prevent water from backing up into the aeration
system. Failure of this valve is not operationally critical. There is the potential for plugging of the
aeration distribution lines should one or more valves fail, and if the blower is turned off for an
extended period. "Dead zones" will be apparent when blower function resumes. In this case the
lines will need to be purged and duckbill valves in the area of the dead zone should be inspected
and replaced as needed.
4.4.4 Pressure Transducer
Please refer to the manufacturer's IO&M manual for periodic calibration and service
requirements.

Contact Information
5.1 Emergency Services
Duplin County E-911
Phone: 911
5.2 Butterball, LLC — Environmental Manager
Josh Batchelor
1628 Garners Chapel Road
Mount Olive, NC 28365
Cell: 252-560-8327
Email: [e-mail]
5.3 Regulatory Agency
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality — Non -Discharge Permitting
Information Processing Unit
1636 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1617
Wilmington Regional Office
Phone: [phone]
Fax: [phone]
Division of Emergency Response
Dean Hunkele (Regional Senior Environmental Specialist): 910-796-7380
Division of Emergency Management: 919-733-3300
Afterhours: 800-858-0368
0

Attachment F: Existing Permit
Fab Tech Water Solutions 9 fabtechwws.com

Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
May 11, 2018
MICHAEL D. BLISS — VICE PRESIDENT OF OPERATIONS
BUTTERBALL, LLC
POST OFFICE Box 589
MT. OLIVE, NORTH CAROLINA 28365
Dear Mr. Bliss:
ROY COOPER
Governor
MICHAEL S. REGAN
Secretary
LINDA CULPEPPER
Interim Director
Subject: Permit No. WQ0000884
Butterball — Mt. Olive WWTF
Wastewater Irrigation System
Duplin County
In accordance with your permit major modification request received December 20, 2017, and
subsequent additional information received March 26, 2018, we are forwarding herewith Permit No.
WQ0000884 dated May 11, 2018, to Butterball, LLC for the continued operation of the existing wastewater
treatment and irrigation facilities, as well as the construction and operation of the proposed wastewater
treatment and irrigation facilities.
The modifications to the subject permit are as follows: the existing sanitary wastewater package
plant, effluent lift station pumps, and control panel are to be replaced. The monitoring well names have
been changed from CP-1, CP-2, CP-3, and CP-4 to MW-39, MW-40, MW-41, and MW-42.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until September 30, 2022, shall void Permit
No. WQ0000884 issued October 6, 2017, and shall be subject to the conditions and limitations as specified
therein. Please pay particular attention to the monitoring requirements listed in Attachments A, B, and C
for they may differ from the previous permit issuance. Failure to establish an adequate system for collecting
and maintaining the required operational information shall result in future compliance problems.
Please note the following permit conditions have been removed since the last permit issuance
dated October 6, 2017:
➢ Old Conditions I.3., I.5., I.6., and IV.11. —The requirements of these conditions have been met.
Please note the following permit condition is new since the last permit issuance dated October
6, 2017:
➢ Condition I.3. — The existing domestic wastewater plant will be demolished within 1 year after
startup of the new plant.
State of North Carolina I Environmental Quality I Water Resources I Water Quality Permitting I Non -Discharge Permitting
1617 Mail Service Center I Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
919-807-6332

Mr. Michael D. Bliss
May 11, 2018
Page 2 of 2
If any parts, requirements or limitations contained in this permit are unacceptable, the Permittee
has the right to request an adjudicatory hearing upon written request within 30 days following receipt of
this permit. This request shall be in the form of a written petition, conforming to Chapter 150B of the North
Carolina General Statutes, and filed with the Office of Administrative Hearings at 6714 Mail Service
Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-6714. Unless such demands are made, this permit shall be final and binding.
One set of approved plans and specifications is being forwarded to you. If you need additional
information concerning this permit, please contact Tessa Monday at [phone] or
tessa.monday@ncdenr..gov.
Sincerely,
.l�
Linda Culpepper, Interim Directo
Division of Water Resources
cc: Duplin County Health Department (Electronic Copy)
Wilmington Regional Office, Water Quality Regional Operations Section (Electronic Copy)
Katie Jones, PE — Dewberry Engineers, Inc. (Electronic Copy)
Beth Buffington, — Protection and Enforcement Branch (Electronic Copy)
Digital Permit Archive (Electronic Copy)
Central Files

NORTH CAROLINA
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
RALEIGH
WASTEWATER IRRIGATION SYSTEM PERMIT
In accordance with the provisions of Article 21 of Chapter 143, General Statutes of North Carolina as
amended, and other applicable Laws, Rules and Regulations
PERMISSION IS HEREBY GRANTED TO
Butterball, LLC
Duplin County
FOR THE
operation of a 2,000,000 gallon per day (GPD) wastewater treatment and irrigation facility consisting of
the:
construction and operation of a replacement 100,000 GPD domestic wastewater pretreatment facility
consisting of. a mechanical bar screen; a 25,000 gallon flow equalization basin with dual 185 gallon per
minute (GPM) pumps and a 70 cubic feet per minute (CFM) blower; dual train 37,500 gallon aeration basins
with dual 380 CFM blowers; dual train 22,000 gallon clarifiers; dual 300 GPM effluent to industrial
wastewater plant pumps; a 300 GPM diesel powered backup effluent pump; and all associated piping,
valves, controls, and appurtenances; the
continued operation and subsequent abandonment of the existing 100,000 GPD domestic wastewater
pretreatment facility consisting of: a bar screen; a 10,400 gallon aerated flow equalization tank; a 36,400
gallon aeration tank with dual blowers; a 10,700 gallon clarifier; and all associated piping, valves, controls,
and appurtenances; the
continued operation of a stormwater capture system consisting of: a 350,000 gallon eastern stormwater
pond; a 245,000 gallon western stormwater pond; and all associated piping, valves, controls, and
appurtenances; the
continued operation of an industrial wastewater treatment plant consisting of. a 1 million gallon (MG) flow
equalization tank with mixing equipment; two dissolved air floatation (DAF) units operating in parallel
with polymer feed station; a DAF sludge pump station; a DAF sludge storage tank; a DAF sludge decant
observation tank; a 13 MG aerated lagoon (which gravity feeds into the 41 MG lagoon) with five 60
horsepower (hp) high-speed surface aerators and two air induction units that receives the domestic
wastewater pretreatment facility effluent and the stormwater capture system effluent; a 41 MG holding
lagoon with three 20 hp surface aerators; chlorine disinfection facilities; and all associated piping, valves,
controls, and appurtenances; the
continued operation of an irrigation system consisting of: four 100 hp irrigation pumps; two 50 hp booster
irrigation pumps; approximately 531.84 acres of spray irrigation area comprised of 29 irrigation fields; and
all associated piping, valves, controls, and appurtenances; and the
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 1 of 12

construction and operation of an irrigation facility consisting of: approximately 25.04 acres of spray
irrigation area comprised of 6 fields (i.e., Fields 15A, 15B, 17A, 1713, 17C and 17D) for a cumulative area
of 556.88 acres; and all associated piping, valves, controls, and appurtenances
to serve the Butterball — Mt. Olive WWTF, with no discharge of wastes to surface waters, pursuant to the
application received December 20, 2017, and subsequent additional information received by the Division
of Water Resources, and in conformity with the project plans, specifications, and other supporting data
subsequently filed and approved by the Department of Environmental Quality and considered a part of this
permit.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until September 30, 2022, shall void Permit No.
WQ0000884 issued October 6, 2017, and shall be subject to the following specified conditions and
limitations:
I. SCHEDULES
Upon completion of construction and prior to operation of the modified permitted facilities (i.e., Fields
15A, 15B, 17A, 1713, 17C, and 17D, and the domestic wastewater treatment plant), a certification
(attached) shall be submitted from a licensed North Carolina Professional Engineer certifying that the
permitted facility has been installed in accordance with this permit, Division approved plans and
specifications, and other supporting documentation, including the location of all monitoring wells as
applicable. If this project is to be completed in phases and partially certified the Permittee shall retain
the responsibility to track further construction approved under the same permit, and shall provide a
final certificate of completion once the entire project has been completed. Send the Certification to the
Division of Water Resources, Non -Discharge Permitting Unit, 1617 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC
27699-1617 or [e-mail]. [15A NCAC 02T .0116(a)]
2. The Wilmington Regional Office, telephone number [phone], shall be notified at least 48 hours
in advance (excluding weekends and holidays) of operation of the new domestic wastewater plant such
that an in -place inspection can be made. Notification to the regional supervisor shall be made from
8:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m. on Monday through Friday, excluding State Holidays. [15A NCAC 02T
.0108(b)(2)]
3. Within one year of startup of the replacement 100,000 GPD domestic wastewater pretreatment facility,
the existing 100,000 GPD domestic wastewater pretreatment facility shall be decommissioned from the
site. The Permittee may request a one year extension in the event that circumstances arise which
warrant additional time. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(2)]
4. Within 60 days of completion of all proposed irrigation fields, the Permittee shall submit two original
copies of a site map with a scale no greater than 1-inch equals 100 feet; however, special provisions
may be granted upon prior approval for large properties. At a minimum, the map shall include the
following information:
a. The location and identity of each monitoring well.
b. The location of major components of the waste disposal system.
c. The location of property boundaries within 500 feet of the disposal areas.
d. The wetted perimeter of al disposal fields.
e. The latitude and longitude of the established horizontal control monument.
f. The elevation of the top of the well casing (i.e., measuring point) relative to a common datum.
g. The depth of water below the measuring point at the time the measuring point is established.
h. The location of compliance and review boundaries.
i. The date the map is prepared and/or revised.
Control monuments shall be installed in such a manner and made of such materials that the monument
will not be destroyed due to activities taking place on the property. The map and any supporting
documentation shall be sent to the Division of Water Resources, Non -Discharge Permitting Unit, 1617
Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-1617. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(2)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 2 of 12

Upon completion of construction and prior to irrigation, a soil scientist evaluation shall be completed
for all areas where fill material is placed within the permitted irrigation areas (i.e., Fields 17A and 17C).
The report shall certify that areas utilizing fill material are capable of accepting the designed loading
rate. This report shall specifically address, but not be limited to, soil features such as soil compaction
and saturated hydraulic conductivity of the least permeable layer, as well as any other properties that
might impact the soil's ability to accept irrigation water. Two copies of the soils report shall be sent to
the Division of Water Resources, Non -Discharge Permitting Unit, 1617 Mail Service Center, Raleigh,
NC 27699-1617 or Non-Discharg_e.Report&cdenngov. The requested information must be received
and acknowledged in writing by the Wilmington Regional Office's Water Quality Regional Operations
Section, prior to any irrigation of wastewater. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
The Permittee shall submit an annual report to the Wilmington Regional Office, along with the GW-
59s summarizing any exceedances of permitted monitoring well limits and corrective action
taken. Upon review of the report, the Division may re-evaluate the field and groundwater conditions
to determine if PAN loading rate limits are needed for Fields OlA — 18. If the Division determines
PAN limits are required, the Permittee shall be notified in writing of its findings. This condition also
requires that the Permittee submit a permit modification request within six months of receiving the
Division's written notification, in order to establish agronomic PAN loading rates. [15A NCAC 02T
.0108(b)(1)]
No later than six months prior to the expiration of this permit, the Permittee shall request renewal of
this permit on official Division forms. Upon receipt of the request, the Division will review the
adequacy of the facilities described therein, and if warranted, will renew the permit for such period of
time and under such conditions and limitations as it may deem appropriate. Please note Rule 15A
NCAC 02T .0105(d) requires an updated site map to be submitted with the permit renewal application.
[15A NCAC 02T .0105(d), 02T .0106, 02T .0109, 02T .0115(c)]
II. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
The subject non -discharge facilities shall be effectively maintained and operated at all times so there is
no discharge to surface waters, nor any contravention of groundwater or surface water standards. In
the event the facilities fail to perform satisfactorily, including the creation of nuisance conditions due
to improper operation and maintenance, or failure of the irrigation areas to adequately assimilate the
effluent, the Permittee shall take immediate corrective actions including Division required actions, such
as the construction of additional or replacement wastewater treatment or irrigation facilities. [G.S. 143-
215.1, 143-213.3(a)]
2. This permit shall not relieve the Permittee of their responsibility for damages to groundwater or surface
water resulting from the operation of this facility. [ 15A NCAC 02B .0200, 02L .0100]
3. All wells constructed for purposes of groundwater monitoring shall be constructed in accordance with
15A NCAC 02C .0108 (Standards of Construction for Wells Other than Water Supply), and any other
jurisdictional laws and regulations pertaining to well construction. [15A NCAC 02C .0108]
4. Effluent quality shall not exceed the limitations specified in Attachment A. [15A NCAC 02T
.0108(b)(1)]
5. Application rates, whether hydraulic, nutrient or other pollutant, shall not exceed those specified in
Attachment B. [15A NCAC 02T .0505(c), 02T .0505(n)]
This disposal system was individually permitted on or after December 30, 1983; therefore, the
compliance boundary is established at either 250 feet from the effluent disposal area, or 50 feet within
the property boundary, whichever is closest to the effluent disposal area. An exceedance of
groundwater standards at or beyond the compliance boundary is subject to remediation action according
to 15A NCAC 02L .0106(d)(2) as well as enforcement actions in accordance with North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.6A through 143-215.6C. [15A NCAC 02L .0106(d)(2), 02L .0107(b)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 3 of 12

7. In accordance with 15A NCAC 02L .0108, the review boundary is established midway between the
compliance boundary and the effluent disposal area. Any exceedance of groundwater standards at the
review boundary shall require action in accordance with 15A NCAC 02L .0106. [15A NCAC 02L
.0106, 02L .0108]
8. The Permittee shall apply for a permit modification to establish a new compliance boundary prior to
any sale or transfer of property affecting a compliance boundary. [15A NCAC 02L .0107(c)]
9. In accordance with 15A NCAC 02L .0107(d), no wells, excluding Division approved monitoring wells,
shall be constructed within the compliance boundary except as provided for in 15A NCAC 02L
.0107(g). [15A NCAC 02L .0107]
10. Except as provided for in 15A NCAC 02L .0107(g), the Permittee shall ensure any landowner who is
not the Permittee and owns land within the compliance boundary shall execute and file with the Duplin
County Register of Deeds an easement running with the land containing the following items:
a. A notice of the permit and number or other description as allowed in 15A NCAC 02L .0107(f)(1);
b. Prohibits construction and operation of water supply wells within the compliance boundary; and
c. Reserves the right of the Permittee or the State to enter the property within the compliance boundary
for purposes related to the permit.
The Director may terminate the easement when its purpose has been fulfilled or is no longer needed.
[15A NCAC 02L .0107(f)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 4 of 12

11. The facilities permitted herein shall be constructed according to the following setbacks:
a. The setbacks for irrigation sites (i.e., Field 1 through existing Field 13) permitted under 15A NCAC
02H .0200 shall be as follows (all distances in feet):
i. Any habitable residence or place of public assembly under separate ownership: 400
ii. Surface waters: 100
iii. Any well with exception of monitoring wells: 100
iv. Any property line: 150
v. Public right of way: 50
[15A NCAC 02H .02190)]
b. The setbacks for irrigation sites (i.e., expanded Field 13 through Field 18) permitted under 15A
NCAC 02T .0500 shall be as follows (all distances in feet):
i. Any habitable residence or place of public assembly under separate ownership:
400
ii. Any habitable residence or place of public assembly owned by the Permittee:
200
iii. Any private or public water supply source:
100
iv. Surface waters:
100
v. Groundwater lowering ditches:
100
vi. Surface water diversions:
25
vii. Any well with exception of monitoring wells:
100
viii. Any property line:
150
ix. Top of slope of embankments or cuts of two feet or more in vertical height:
15
x. Any water line from a disposal system:
10
xi. Subsurface groundwater lowering drainage systems:
100
xii. Any swimming pool:
100
xiii. Public right of way:
50
xiv. Nitrification field:
20
xv. Any building foundation or basement:
15
[15A NCAC 02T .0506(a)]
c. The setbacks for storage and treatment units permitted under 15A NCAC 02H .0200 shall be as
follows (all distances in feet):
i. Any well with exception of monitoring wells:
ii. Any property line:
[15A NCAC 02H .02190)]
100
50
d. The setbacks for storage and treatment units permitted under 15A NCAC 02T .0500 shall be as
follows (all distances in feet):
iii. Any habitable residence or place of public assembly under separate ownership
iv. Any private or public water supply source:
v. Surface waters:
vi. Any well with exception of monitoring wells:
vii. Any property line:
[15A NCAC 02T .0506(b)]
100
100
50
100
50
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 5 of 12

III. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REOUIREMENTS
1. The facilities shall be properly maintained and operated at all times. The facilities shall be effectively
maintained and operated as a non -discharge system to prevent the discharge of any wastewater resulting
from the operation of this facility. The Permittee shall maintain an Operation and Maintenance Plan,
which at a minimum shall include operational functions, maintenance schedules, safety measures and
a spill response plan. [15A NCAC 02T .0507]
2. Upon the Water Pollution Control System Operators Certification Commission's (WPCSOCC)
classification of the subject non -discharge facilities, in accordance with 15A NCAC 08G .0200 the
Permittee shall designate and employ a certified operator in responsible charge (ORC) and one or more
certified operator(s) as back-up ORC(s). The ORC or their back-up shall visit the facilities in
accordance with 15A NCAC 08G .0200, and shall comply with all other conditions specified in the
previously cited rules. [ 15A NCAC 02T .0117]
3. A suitable year round vegetative cover shall be maintained at all times, such that crop health is
optimized, allows for even distribution of effluent and allows inspection of the irrigation system. The
Permittee shall adhere to an agronomist's recommendations for a proper crop maintenance programs,
as well as a proper weed control program. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
4. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent effluent ponding in or runoff from the irrigation sites listed
in Attachment B. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
5. Irrigation shall not be performed during inclement weather or when the ground is in a condition that
will cause ponding or runoff. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
6. All irrigation equipment shall be tested and calibrated at least once per permit cycle. Calibration records
shall be maintained at the facility for a period of no less than five years, and shall be made available to
the Division upon request. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
7. Only effluent from the Butterball — Mt. Olive WWTF shall be irrigated on the sites listed in Attachment
B. Wash water from the ProRecycle Truck Washing Facility in Wayne County may be irrigated on the
sites listed in Attachment B if approved by in writing by the Division. [G.S. 143-215.1]
8. No automobiles or machinery shall be allowed on the irrigation sites except during equipment
installation or while maintenance is being performed. [ 15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
9. Public access to the irrigation sites and wastewater treatment facilities shall be prohibited. [ 15A NCAC
02T .0505(q)]
10. The residuals generated from the wastewater treatment facilities shall be disposed or utilized in
accordance with 15A NCAC 02T .1100. The Permittee shall maintain a residual management plan
pursuant to 15A NCAC 02T .0508. [15A NCAC 02T .0508, 02T .1100]
11. Diversion or bypassing of untreated or partially treated wastewater from the treatment facilities is
prohibited. [15A NCAC 02T .05050)]
12. Freeboard in the 41 million gallon (MG) holding lagoon shall not be less than two feet at any time.
[15A NCAC 02T .0505(d)]
13. A gauge to monitor waste levels in the 41 million gallon (MG) holding lagoon shall be provided. This
gauge shall have readily visible permanent markings, at inch or tenth of a foot increments, indicating
the following elevations: maximum liquid level at the top of the temporary liquid storage volume;
minimum liquid level at the bottom of the temporary liquid storage volume; and the lowest point on
top of the dam. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 6 of 12

14. A protective vegetative cover shall be established and maintained on all earthen embankments (i.e.,
outside toe of embankment to maximum allowable temporary storage elevation on the inside of the
embankment), berms, pipe runs, erosion control areas, and surface water diversions. Trees, shrubs, and
other woody vegetation shall not be allowed to grow on the earthen dikes or embankments. Earthen
embankment areas shall be kept mowed or otherwise controlled and accessible. [15A NCAC 02T
.0108(b)(1)]
15. The Permittee shall utilize all irrigation fields available to them as evenly as possible while adhering to
approved hydraulic rates established in Attachment B. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
IV. MONITORING AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
1. Any Division required monitoring (including groundwater, plant tissue, soil and surface water analyses)
necessary to ensure groundwater and surface water protection shall be established, and an acceptable
sampling reporting schedule shall be followed. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
2. A Division certified laboratory shall conduct all laboratory analyses for the required effluent,
groundwater or surface water parameters. [15A NCAC 02H .0800]
3. Flow through the treatment facility shall be continuously monitored, and daily flow values shall be
reported on Form NDMR.
The Permittee shall install and maintain an appropriate flow measurement device to ensure the accuracy
and reliability of flow measurement consistent with accepted engineering and scientific practices.
Selected flow measurement devices shall be capable of measuring flows with a maximum deviation of
less than ten percent from true flow; accurately calibrated at a minimum of once per year; and
maintained to ensure the accuracy of measurements is consistent with the selected device's accepted
capability. The Permittee shall maintain records of flow measurement device calibration on file for a
period of at least five years. At a minimum, documentation shall include:
a. Date of flow measurement device calibration,
b. Name of person performing calibration, and
c. Percent from true flow.
[ 15A NCAC 02T .0105(k)]
4. The Permittee shall monitor the effluent from the subject facilities at the frequencies and locations for
the parameters specified in Attachment A. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
5. The Permittee shall maintain adequate records tracking the amount of effluent irrigated. At a minimum,
these records shall include the following information for each irrigation site listed in Attachment B:
a. Date of irrigation;
b. Volume of effluent irrigated;
c. Site irrigated;
d. Length of time site is irrigated;
e. Continuous weekly, monthly, and year-to-date hydraulic (inches/acre) loadings;
f. Continuous monthly and year-to-date loadings for any non -hydraulic parameter specifically
limited in Attachment B;
g. Weather conditions; and
h. Maintenance of cover crops.
[15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
6. Freeboard (i.e., waste level to the lowest embankment elevation) in the 41 million gallon (MG) holding
lagoon shall be measured to the nearest inch or tenth of a foot, and recorded weekly. Weekly freeboard
records shall be maintained at the facility for a period of no less than five years, and shall be made
available to the Division upon request. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 7 of 12

7. Three copies of all monitoring data (as specified in Conditions IV.3. and IVA.) on Form NDMR for
each PPI and three copies of all operation and disposal records (as specified in Conditions IV.5. and
W.6.) on Form NDAR-1 for every site in Attachment B shall be submitted on or before the last day of
the following month. If no activities occurred during the monitoring month, monitoring reports are still
required documenting the absence of the activity. All information shall be submitted to the following
address:
Division of Water Resources
Information Processing Unit
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
[15A NCAC 02T .0105(l)]
8. A record shall be maintained of all residuals removed from this facility. This record shall be maintained
at the facility for a period of no less than five years, and shall be made available to the Division upon
request. At a minimum, this record shall include:
a. Name of the residuals hauler;
b. Non -Discharge permit number authorizing the residuals disposal, or a letter from a municipality
agreeing to accept the residuals;
c. Date the residuals were hauled; and
d. Volume of residuals removed.
[15ANCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
9. A maintenance log shall be maintained at this facility. This log shall be maintained at the facility for a
period of no less than five years, and shall be made available to the Division upon request. At a
minimum, this log shall include:
a. Date of calibration of flow measurement device;
b. Visual observations of the plant and plant site; and
c. Record of preventative maintenance (e.g., changing of equipment, adjustments, testing, inspections
and cleanings, etc.).
[15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
10. Monitoring wells shall be sampled at the frequencies and for the parameters specified in Attachment
C. All mapping, well construction forms well abandonment forms and monitoring data shall refer to
the permit number and the well nomenclature as provided in Attachment C and Figure 1. [ 15A NCAC
02T .0105(m)]
11. Two copies of the monitoring well sampling and analysis results shall be submitted on a Compliance
Monitoring Form (GW-59), along with attached copies of laboratory analyses, on or before the last
working day of the month following the sampling month. The Compliance Monitoring Form (GW-59)
shall include this permit number, the appropriate well identification number, and one GW-59
certification form shall be submitted with each set of sampling results. All information shall be
submitted to the following address:
Division of Water Resources
Information Processing Unit
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
[ 15A NCAC 02T .0105(m)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 8 of 12

12. An annual representative soils analysis (i.e., Standard Soil Fertility Analysis) shall be conducted on
each irrigation site listed in Attachment B. These results shall be maintained at the facility for a period
of no less than five years, and shall be made available to the Division upon request. At a minimum, the
Standard Soil Fertility Analysis shall include the following parameters:
Acidity
Exchangeable Sodium Percentage
Phosphorus
Base Saturation (by calculation)
Magnesium
Potassium
Calcium
Manganese
Sodium
Cation Exchange Capacity
Percent Humic Matter
Zinc
Copper
pH
[15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
13. Noncompliance Notification:
The Permittee shall report by telephone to the Wilmington Regional Office, telephone number (910)
796-7215, as soon as possible, but in no case more than 24 hours, or on the next working day following
the occurrence or first knowledge of the occurrence of any of the following:
a. Treatment of wastes abnormal in quantity or characteristic, including the known passage of a
hazardous substance.
b. Any process unit failure (e.g., mechanical, electrical, etc.), due to known or unknown reasons,
rendering the facility incapable of adequate wastewater treatment.
c. Any facility failure resulting in a by-pass directly to receiving surface waters.
d. Any time self -monitoring indicates the facility has gone out of compliance with its permit
limitations.
e. Ponding in or runoff from the irrigation sites.
Any emergency requiring immediate reporting (e.g., discharges to surface waters, imminent failure of
a storage structure, etc.) outside normal business hours shall be reported to the Division's Emergency
Response personnel at telephone number [phone], [phone], or [phone]. Persons
reporting such occurrences by telephone shall also file a written report in letter form within five days
following first knowledge of the occurrence. This report shall outline the actions taken or proposed to
betaken to ensure the problem does not recur. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(1), 02T .0108(b)(1)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 9 of 12

V. INSPECTIONS
1. The Permittee shall provide adequate inspection and maintenance to ensure proper operation of the
wastewater treatment and irrigation facilities. [ 15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)]
2. The Permittee or their designee shall inspect the wastewater treatment and irrigation facilities to prevent
malfunctions, facility deterioration and operator errors resulting in discharges, which may cause the
release of wastes to the environment, a threat to human health or a public nuisance. The Permittee shall
maintain an inspection log that includes, at a minimum, the date and time of inspection, observations
made, and any maintenance, repairs, or corrective actions taken. The Permittee shall maintain this
inspection log for a period of five years from the date of the inspection, and this log shall be made
available to the Division upon request. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)]
3. Any duly authorized Division representative may, upon presentation of credentials, enter and inspect
any property, premises or place on or related to the wastewater treatment and irrigation facilities
permitted herein at any reasonable time for the purpose of determining compliance with this permit;
may inspect or copy any records required to be maintained under the terms and conditions of this permit,
and may collect groundwater, surface water or leachate samples. [G.S. 143-21.5.3(a)(2)]
VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. Failure to comply with the conditions and limitations contained herein may subject the Permittee to an
enforcement action by the Division in accordance with North Carolina General Statutes 143-215.6A to
143-215.6C. [G.S. 143-215.6A to 143-215.6C]
2. This permit shall become voidable if the permitted facilities are not constructed in accordance with the
conditions of this permit, the Division approved plans and specifications, and other supporting
documentation. [ 15A NCAC 02T .0110]
3. This permit is effective only with respect to the nature and volume of wastes described in the permit
application, Division approved plans and specifications, and other supporting documentation. No
variances to applicable rules governing the construction or operation of the permitted facilities are
granted, unless specifically requested and approved in this permit pursuant to 15A NCAC 02T .0105(n).
[G.S. 143-21.5.1]
4. The issuance of this permit does not exempt the Permittee from complying with any and all statutes,
rules, regulations, or ordinances, which may be imposed by other jurisdictional government agencies
(e.g., local, state, and federal). Of particular concern to the Division are applicable river buffer rules in
15A NCAC 02B .0200; erosion and sedimentation control requirements in 15A NCAC Chapter 4 and
under General Permit NCGO10000; any requirements pertaining to wetlands under 15A NCAC 02B
.0200 and 02H .0500; and documentation of compliance with Article 21 Part 6 of Chapter 143 of the
General Statutes. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(c)(6)]
In the event the permitted facilities change ownership or the Permittee changes their name, a formal
permit modification request shall be submitted to the Division. This request shall be made on official
Division forms, and shall include appropriate property ownership documentation and other supporting
documentation as necessary. The Permittee of record shall remain fully responsible for maintaining
and operating the facilities permitted herein until a permit is issued to the new owner. [15A NCAC
02T .0104]
6. The Permittee shall retain a set of Division approved plans and specifications for the life of the facilities
permitted herein. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)]
7. The Permittee shall maintain this permit until all permitted facilities herein are properly closed or
permitted under another permit issued by the appropriate permitting authority. [15A NCAC 02T
.01050)]
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 10 of 12

8. This permit is subject to revocation or unilateral modification upon 60 days notice from the Division
Director, in whole or part for the requirements listed in 15A NCAC 02T .0110. [ 15A NCAC 02T .0110]
9. Unless the Division Director grants a variance, expansion of the permitted facilities contained herein
shall not be granted if the Permittee exemplifies any of the criteria in 15A NCAC 02T .0120(b). [15A
NCAC 02T .0120]
10. The Permittee shall pay the annual fee within 30 days after being billed by the Division. Failure to pay
the annual fee accordingly shall be cause for the Division to revoke this permit. [ 15A NCAC 02T
.0105(e)(3)]
Permit issued this the I I' day of May 2018
NORTH CAROLINA ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
Linda Culpepper, Interim Director
Division of Water Resources (i
By Authority of the Environmental Management Commission
Permit Number WQ0000884
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 11 of 12

Permit No. WQ0000884
Butterball, LLC
Butterball — Mt. Olive WWTF
ENGINEERING CERTIFICATION
❑ Partial ❑ Final
Wastewater Irrigation System
May 11, 2018
Duplin County
In accordance with 15A NCAC 02T .0116, I, , as
a duly registered Professional Engineer in the State of North Carolina, having the Permittee's authorization
to ❑ periodically ❑ weekly ❑ fully observe the construction of the permitted facility, hereby state to the
best of my abilities that due care and diligence was used in the observation of the construction, such that
the facility was built within substantial compliance and intent of this permit, the Division -approved plans
and specifications, and other supporting documentation.
❑ Any variation to this permit, the Division -approved plans and specifications, and other supporting
documentation has been documented in the attached as -built drawings, and shall serve as the
Permittee's minor modification request to amend the permit accordingly.
Provide a brief narrative description of any variations:
THE COMPLETED ENGINEERING CERTIFICATION, INCLUDING ALL SUPPORTING
INFORMATION AND MATERIALS, SHALL BE SENT TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES
WATER QUALITY PERMITTING SECTION
NON -DISCHARGE PERMITTING UNIT
By U.S. Postal Service:
1617 MAIL SERVICE CENTER
By Courier/Special Delive :
512 N. SALISBURY ST.
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617 RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
WQ0000884 Version 4.1 Shell Version 171103 Page 12 of 12

W
Ri
r.i
A
a
w
a
z
yd
L
COI
���II
s
_
s
k
R
A
s
s
.s
F
A
W
A
� R
C y
O
Q
w L
O
=
Q
a
o.
�
C
O
Q
Fy
N
w
•v
t.
a
A
F
�
O
R
a
L.,
z
�
a
�
o
w
w
� �
o
U
,r,
O
00
00
00
0
0
0
0

I
W
O
O
X
CD
CD
0
CD
0
C
c
CD
CD
�a
a
C
,aCD
c
W
Q
C
a
i
0
0
O
0
0
�i'
O
O
O
Cl
O
0
0
0
0
0
p
0
O
CD
O
CD
cA
0
W
CA
O
O
o
O
0
O
0
O
o
d
w
O
�
A
a
a1
a1
a
D
O
a
O
D
a
w
O
N
w
v�
p
`p
O
O
cA
a,
O
O
N
O
N
(n
O
w
0
N
J
LAa,
O
a,
Cl
A
O
Oo
O
D\
O
'�
0
0
0
0
�
x
•-•
r;
�
�
r•
�
o
o
�
�
w
a
a
c
co
o
o
0
0
00
vao
IQv°a
CD
v°o
CD
EL
CD
w
o
CD
CD
O
a
CD
H
o
z
r
z
c
cc
CD
c
cD
RL
C•
—
O
G
E
EL
n
z
o
CD
a
CAD
a
CDw
cro°
w
o
H
w
�'
::
-9
n
�
w
n
y
C
fD
_
O
m
Cyr9
C�
w
CD
o
ryi
�-
LA
N
� y
O
< H1
�
M
O
� �
A
O
yy
d
U5
°C
o•
c
C
c
k
c
N
ky
X
ky
Xyy
k
k77
k77
k77
Xy
kyy
Xyy
�
X
X
kyy
X
Xyy
t�D ,�,
a
�Xy
a
�Xy7
�1-
a
a
a
sky�y-
tit-
a
a
r
-•
sky�y
CD
O
O CD
O
O
O
0
G
�p
O
O
O
O
O
0
'.:
0
�
0
G
CD
O
�'�
O
O
O
fD fD
y
C
�,
5L
7
�•
4
;s'
p
�
M
7'
N
x
,-
�
�'
�
;s'
�
?'
','
cC
z
z
c
CD
:0
c
c
w
c
w
o
»
c
c
c
c
CD
c
c
c
o
c
a.
o.
o
CD
A
y
cn

F
z
�
a
w
x
0
0
0
0
O
A
7
F
A
a
c
w
�o
w
�7
C y
O
O L
y
0
�
c
F
°
z
z
U
°
�
cc
CC
U
U
o
W
y
O
00
D
O
en
O
O
U o
p" U
Clo
0
0
0
o
en
0
O
o
0
Ln
F
z
�
w
a
w
x
O
A
O
.0
F
A
a
w
�L
o +'
w
�o
w
�
�d
on
6.
C i'
O d
Q
d
C
£"+"
0
kn
U
c
0
x
�
Cd
Cd
cd
0
0
0
W
U
U
Z
Z
Z
Io,
V] d
pOp
O
N
C
N
0
0
Ufs+ o
U
o
0
0
en
0
re

A
C
a
i
0
0
0
o
w
o
o ,ti
rn
N
N)
0. v'
0
0
r
O
O
O
y
CD
CD
CD
�x
CD
y
A
n
0
y y
C
� O
'S M
A �
A
O
m
3 �
r
0
o
�y
��e
y
00
d
�
a
3
C
C
C
3
Oil
A y
O
f
y
eb
o
Nr
Z
c�
z
r�
C
ci
fb
eo
y
Cl
c ro
�
a
rn
ON
rn
o
a
CD
CD
y
0
z
w
Q
O
CD
s
0
A
O
O
'S M
A� 7.
I
A �
A
0
o
�7
A
C
-s o
riy
e
so
d
�
�e
R
C
3
C
k_
C
f-D
O
O
C
O
O
O
O
w0 C
F�.I
o
z
c�
z
m
�e
z
y

z
=
� F
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
W
a
r-i
d
W
a
40
W
•k
O
8
0
E
F
A
�
c
Cd
W
a �
W
�
o
W
C7
s b0
�
= L
O �
an
mE
C
E
E
rOn
0
H
C
�
O
^
a
z
z
W
N
p
wC13
d
m
L
U
F
6
A.
$
�,
0
42
o
t
0
0
�1
W
U
U
Z
Z
Z
a
U
o
m
o
0
0
0
W)
4.
0
p.
a

M-■I
r

v.
v,
rn yU,
yU,
yU,
rn
m
yU,
ti y0,
rn
y0,
sue.
ticd
rn y0„
y0,
rn
C
o�
R R
00
N
00
.
N
00
�•'•�
V1
y
V�
v'1
V1
Rn
00
r-
l--
00
r-
N
Z
o�
xx
F
to
OA
E
bq
G
C.O
Q
bb
Q
b4
G
by
C
OA
Q
bQ
Q
bA
G
w
E
OA
C
bD
C
bb
r..
by
Ob
a
Z'
o
O
aka
O
xa
ro 0
x,�
O
�a
O
xa
O
xa
O
x,�
O
x,�
O
xa
O
xa
O
xa
O
x,�
O
xa
O
xa
O
aka
O
xa
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
d
u
to
64
Ubo
to
UY.
t
U(�L•4C�L
a
ei
•O.O.O
S.
rO
L.+
Y
.
O
00
L
yy
yy
y
.Y
.yO
Cd
�1¢
Q¢
QQ
A¢
.4
Q¢
AQ
Q¢
Q14 ¢
Q14 ¢
C14 ?Q
Q�
Q¢
QQ
AQ
f�¢
��
0
Q ��
C
C
C
C
Za
Za
Za
Za
o
Za
o
Za
o
Za
oA
Za
oA
Za
A
Za
o�
Z
o
Za
o
Za
o'.
Za
o�
ZP,
o
Za
bo 0
00 o
Oo o
bo o
Oo o
Oo o
Oo o
Oo o
Oo 0
00 o
00 o
Oo 0
00 o
Oo o
00 o
bo 0
N a
N a
N d
N a
N a
N a
N a
N a
N a
N a
N d
N a
N a
N a
N a
N
03
03
03
03
E 3
E 3
03
03
03
03
0�
03
0�
03
03
0
L
d
Cd
� '�
Cd
id 'b
(Ci
Cd
T%
Cd
'�
Cd
Y '�
Cd
cd
Y�
(d
W
Y `�
Y '�
Cd
,d
Cd
cC
Cd
tC
Cd
tti
Cd
id
Cd
iC
N
N
�
y,
cd
y
cd
y
cd
y
cd �
cd
cd �
cc
cd
cd
cd
cd
U
U i
U a�i
U
U a�i
U
U
U u
U u
U I
U 0U
u
U u
A
' d
o
A
en
y
kn
tin
\O
Q
O
o
M0
0O0
00
fn
kn
N
0000
O
�
IN
/HyI
S
'fl
O
O
O
O
o
O
o
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
o
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
0
O
o
O
O
O
O
00
�O
M_
110
00
.--i
\O
M
kn
O\
M
M
00
CT
O
Wn
00
kn
O\
M
l-
00
O
M
00
N
l--
It
IC
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
o
N
N
N
N
N
N
O
O
o
O
O
O
o
0
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
0
0
0
0
O
p
o
0
O\
0
O\
0
N
0
C\
0
N
0
N
0
�O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ICI
�+
V1
M
M
�n
It
�c
O\
[l-
M
O
00
M
�c
kn
CT
kn
�O
kn
M
\O
M
\O
F
d
►a
kn
vi
kn
vi
vi
vi
vi
vi
vi
vi
vi
vi
vi
wl
vi
vi
h
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
f�."
�
Cam.
f�.
Cam.'
• �
�
Cam.
Cam.
Cam.'
. f..7'
Cam+
Cam.
C�."r�.
.
hi
�
.
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
V
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
L
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
C
id
id
id
9
3
o
p
a
a
.n
as
c�
ca
ca
as
as
ca
�a
oa
�
as
as
�
�
as
a
Qa
U
N
N
O
O
O
O�O
oho
oVo
O¢1
Pa
Pa
O
O
M
w
0
a

b
iU
(CD
N
O
w
N
b7
G1
w
b7
CC
w
W
w
w
Cd
b7
w
w
Cd
w
w
w
w
G
G
G
I
G
C
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
N
0
fD
ID
(D
CD
(C D
(D
CD
CD
CD
(D
a CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
(D
0
CD
c
a•
�
c
cr
a'
c
cr
c
c
a•
a•
c
c
a'
c
c
6•
c
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
C7
t7
t7
C7
d
C7
C7
CJ
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
CJ
C7
CJ
C7
C7
G
o
G
o
G
�cs
G
cs
G
cs
G
a
G
cc
G
cs
G
�
G
�cs
G
cs
G
cs
G
o
G
c
G
cs
G
o
G
�cs
G
cs
G
�
5'
�'
S'
�'
�'
S'
S'
S'
S'
S'
�'
�'
S'
S'
S'
S'
�•
5'
S'
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
O
o1
N
�O
w
01
Oo
DD
N
N
Oo
�O
4l
A
C1
�
cn
A
A
O
U
O
J
O
\D
O
Co
a1
O
A
O
O
0
O
O
O
N
0
N
0
N
0
w
0
0
0
Do
00
0
0o
00
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
w
w
w
w
w
N
�--•
w
w
w
w
N
w
w
N
N
N
w
0
?
0
00
00
0
A
N
0
— �--�
0
00
Q�
0
O
O
0
i
C\
0
O
W
0
D
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
0
N
?
O
O
?
N
ao
O
�''�
N
: 1
CN
�O
.w.•
vi
.�-
"'
00
LA00
N
O\
N
�-`
•ON1
N
O
N
ww
0�0
w
�O
0'p0
m
z
z
z
a
r
r
a
a
a
�
a
r
a
a
°a
a
a
m
rc
z
a
�
rz
W
w
w
fD
(D
(D
CD n
0
CD (']
O
0
CD
CD
CD (']
n
CD
(D (')
CD
CD (]
CD
CD
O
N
w
w
w
w
w
G v,
w
G vi
3 w
C N
w
G
w
w
�7
w
G w
m
G
w
G vi
w
G w
w
G rn
zvCD
G rn
(D
CD
w
w
w
w
PD w
w
.-
.-
w
w
w
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
I
O00
OCC
O00
O00
O00
I
h7z
I
dz
I
t7z
I
`Cz
I
dz
I
dz
I
`Cz
I
`Gz
I
dz
I
rJz
I
'l7z
I
`Gz
I
'dz
I
'Gz
I I
'Cz
I I
`Cz
I I
dz
I I
bz
I I
dz
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
910
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C7
y...
CJ
a...
C7
y...
C7
y...
C7
y...
C7
y...
C7
y...
C7
a...
C7
y...
C7
a...
C7
a...
C7
y...
C7
y...
C7
y...
C7
y...
C7
a...
C7
a...
t7
y,..
C7
y,..
w
w
w
w
w
wO'Q
w Aw9w9
�w9w9w
wV(
w
w
w
w q
w
9
99
UQ
6• VQ
dQ
(TQ
bQ
uq�
CD 0
(D CD
N CD
CD CD
N CD
N CD
N CD
N CD
(p CD
N CD
N CD
N �
N CD
N CD
N CD
N �
N CD
N CD
N �
Z
Z
z
z�a
z-
z.�
z�a
z 0a
Z-
Z-
Z
Z�
Z.
z.
z�a
zba
z-
Z a
Z
�a
n
n'
n'
n
n'
n'
n'
n'
n'
n'
n
n
n
n'
n'
n
n'
CD
UQ
UQ
UQ
CD
UQ
CD
bQ
CD P
UQ
CD
UQ
CD
dQ
CD
UQ
0
m
CD
m
CD
CfQ
CD
OQ
CD
UQ
CD
m
CD
qQ
CD
QQ
CD
Ps
�
r;�
r�
r;�
ray
r�
r�
r;n
ray
r�
r�
r�;
o
o
o
w
w
o
w r
CD
O.; CD
O. (D
G. (D
G: (D
P. (D
P. CD
P- (D
Q. (D
P.0. (D
P.: CD
CD
O.; CD
G; CD
P. (D
a.: (D
O. (D
CL (D
UGQ
VGQ
UGQ
bGQ
dGQ
UGQ
UGQ
UGQ
OGQ
UGQ
bGQ
bQ
VGQ
UGQ
UP
UGQ
UGQ
0GQ
0GQ
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
O�
�l
Oo
cn
N
N
N
w
J
w
J
w
J
oo
w_
w
N
w
w
N
.-.
00
W
�D
O
N
Do
N
N
W
oo
IJ
O
N
A
N
N
W
�
�A
�O
in
o0
a.
(U'
C �^S•
C `�
a.
�
c ��•
C
C
6.
w
C
��•
5
a `�
C
Er
w o
w
w
!/
w
L7
w
V1
w o
w
w
w
w
w
w
m
w
VJ r`3
w
VJ
m
w
w
w
Cp
0
.ns (D
n CD
N
D
.n, N
.�', CD
w
(D
�'
h CD
�'
,ni CD
,n„i CD
Ln
CD
o CD
CD
CD
0
�'
(D
.n, CD
N
.�', CD
�'
n CD
Ln
.(', CD
Ln
(D
0
1
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
(p
I
CD
I
CD
N
CD
(D
CD
CD
0

0
00
00
00
M
0
0
0
fV M 4 Vi

h
C
M
W
z
a
H
R
U
O
Z
O
�
v
k
M
k
M
k
M
k
M
k
M
k
M
k
M
k
M
k
M
C
U
7
a
L
�I
d
�
�
W
F
�
3
•�
V
ai
w
3
O
a
•�
y
U
O
b
o
w
z
z
d
t
z
a
a
o
0
H
�
0
°'
a
o
00
It
�0
0ell
0
0
o
U
o
o
M
o
0
0
0
00
w
0
0
0.
dp
H
75
H
en
9
w
O
Cd
A

b
r

�t

14T
ff-AT
Cm
L
r
OL)
ca
Co
O
P.-)
CD
ILL
0
co a
00 co
03
I I
CD ao
co
CSI
/*
cn
-7v
_.co

co
N
2
U
rn
a
CV
r-
4
1
ao
LO
i
U
00
0
yi
Co
I 1
m
co
0
00
O
CmJ r
41m.1
m�
co
_
W
6
m
N
Q
0
Q cfl
Q Q
0]
rn
o 0
0 -
ice► � f 4
1 7
x
1
O
0
C]
..
uj
IW
MNYYYMe 41
O
0
0 Cb
0 N